folds
Contact numbers General Enquiries: T: 01992 474600 F: 01992 474601 E: info@dwwindsor.co.uk
DW Windsor Lighting Pindar Road, Hoddesdon Hertfordshire. EN11 0DX T: 01992 474600 F: 01992 474601 E: info@dwwindsor.co.uk
DW Windsor Limited is a member of DW Group Holdings Limited © DW Windsor 2012
DWW2012_Cover_OUTER_AW.indd 1
folds
Products at a glance
Dedicated product advice: E: answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
See pages 4 - 5 for a visual index of all our products
If you have a question about our products please contact us using our dedicated email address for an answer within twenty-four hours (Monday to Friday)
New products
Akord Bullet Akord Cone Anello LED Aventis Barosa Berkeley Braemar Camaro Cannon Capra Capra-Compact Capra-Mini Cassia LED Colada Colada LED Columns Corvus Cradle Crieff Dover DW400 Ely Eton Evora Evora LED Excel Forza Garda Hatfield Henley Iffley Knightsbridge Kona Lago Lancaster LED Light Engine Light Point Luca Lyra Malo LED Manhattan Mano LED Meridian Milano
Monaro Monaro LED II Monza Newport Nexus Pall Mall Petra Pharola Pharola-Max Pharola-Wall Polar Polar (bollard) Portea LED Portland Reno Renza LED Riga Rio Road Lantern Rona Sabre Salisbury Silka Silka-Max Solar & Wind Sorento Strand A & A Plus Strand B & C Stratum Tatra Tizona Toro Toronto Trebem Vaio LED Vector Vertica Vertica LED Warwick Waterford Westminster Windsor York
86 86 166 212 78 118 138 66 244 182 184 180 186 248 248 256 104 98 102 96 146 124 244 58 62 94 88 214 132 140 130 114 202 226 112 32 168 196 188 194 82 190 148 44
See pages 6 - 9 for some of our latest innovative products
52 54 192 136 240 116 176 228 230 200 98 242 172 118 198 174 240 80 144 238 252 136 232 236 152 74 120 122 92 210 250 150 84 224 160 242 206 204 134 138 116 110 134
Product index
Exterior Lighting | Issue 4
www.dwwindsor.com
Exterior Lighting Contemporary Classic Traditional Functional Solar & Wind Architectural LED Handrail Illuminated Bollards Floodlighting Columns & Brackets
Please open this flap for our handy guide to specifying our products
www.dwwindsor.com 05/11/2012 11:59
Light Solutions
1
Light solutions Light shapes our perception of the world. As an international, award-winning designer and manufacturer of exterior lighting solutions and urban furniture, DW Windsor recognises that lighting specifiers require products which are both innovative and sustainable in their offering. Combining style and quality with high performance, we have led the way in creating lighting solutions designed to enhance the environment. From traditional to contemporary or bespoke, we offer considerable breadth and depth of product choice, backed by the strongest environmental credentials.
Milano LED Bankside, London
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
2
Light Solutions
We strive to offer a comprehensive range of quality products and value-added services as standard.
Welcome to DW Windsor Outstanding quality & service, every time DW Windsor Light Solutions
1
Products at a Glance
4
NEW Products
6
In Recognition of our Commitment
10
How We Can Support You 12
Contemporary
42
Classic
90
Traditional
106
Functional
142
Architectural
158
44
Stratum
92
LED Light Engine
108
Road Lantern
144
Vaio LED Introduction
160
Illuminated LED Handrail
214
Milano Introduction Milano Curved Arms
46
Excel
94
Windsor
110
DW400
146
Vaio LED
164
Design Philosophy
216 218
Milano Straight Arms
48
Dover
96
Lancaster
112
Meridian
148
Anello LED
166
Garda LED Handrail
Monaro Introduction
50
Polar & Cradle
98
Knightsbridge
114
Toro
150
Light Point
168
Monaro LED II
52
100
Westminster & Pall Mall
116
Solar & Wind
152
Portea LED
172
Monaro
54
Technical Details (Optima Series)
How to Illuminate Areas 220 using Garda LED Handrail
118
Renza LED
60
104
120
Evora LED
Corvus
Strand
Lighting Powered by Nature
154
58
102
Portland & Berkeley
Evora Introduction
Crieff
Ely
124
156
Evora
62
Strand/Ely Technical
128
Stand-Alone & Grid Connected Systems
It’s always been our belief that lighting should be more than just functional illumination. After all, good lighting can help shape the character of an environment, by engaging and uplifting the people it touches.
We aim to deliver the best quality and service, on time, every time, for our customers. And for your customers, we try our utmost to provide lighting that will enrich the environments where they work and live.
That’s why we continually seek to work with our customers to look beyond pure aesthetics, sharing our knowledge and technical expertise to provide the right light, in the right place and controlled with the right systems.
Terry Dean | Managing Director
Illuminated Bollards 222
Floodlighting
246
Trebem
224
Colada LED
248
Lago
226
Colada
248
256 Columns, Brackets, Pedestals & Feeder Pillars Special Structures
258
Column Introduction
260
Standard Columns
262
Special Columns Painting Columns & Brackets
Pharola
228
Tizona
250
Pharola-Max
230
Sabre
252
Silka
232
Floodlighting Brackets
254
174
Silka-Max
236
Petra
176
Rona
238
Capra Introduction
178
Nexus & Riga
240
Capra-Mini
180
Polar & Vector
242
Columns Technical Details
272
Cannon & Eton
244
Raise & Lower Columns
274 276
270
Lighting Car Parks
302
Minimising Light Spill
304
Wildlife Considerations
306
15
Integrating Sphere
16
Camaro Introduction
66
Iffley
130
Capra
182
A Sure Test of Quality
17
68
Hatfield
132
Capra-Compact
184
White Light
18
Camaro Design Philosophy
Cassia LED
186
20
72
134
CosmoPolis
Camaro
York & Warwick
74
Salisbury & Newport
136
Lyra
188
22
Sorento Introduction
Column Enhancements: Banners, Festive Decorations, Baskets and CCTV
Mano LED
190
Pedestals
278
24
76
138
Control & Dim
Sorento
Braemar & Waterford
Monza
192
Column Brackets
279
26
78
140
LeafNut
Barosa
Henley
Finials
284
28
80
194
Diamond Optic®
Rio
Malo LED
Wall Brackets
286
32
82
196
LED Light Engine
Manhattan
Luca
Feeder Pillars
289
34
84
198
LX1 Luminance Optic
Toronto
Reno
EN 40 Column Standard
290
36
86
200
Uniqute Solutions
Akord Bullet
Pharola-Wall
38
86
202
Refurbishments & Replicas
Akord Cone
Kona
Forza
88
Vertica LED
204
Urban Furniture
40
Vertica
206
Tatra
210
Aventis
212
Traditional | 106
Functional | 142
Solar & Wind | 152
Architectural | 158
LED Handrail | 214
Bollards | 222
Floodlighting | 246
Columns | 256
Lighting Facades, Statues 296 and Monuments
266
Providing the Highest Performing Products
Classic | 90
294
298
14
Contemporary | 42
292
Lighting Pedestrian Crossings
Photometric Calculations Available Via DIALux
StreetWise
How-to Guides Lighting Landscapes, the Vertical and Using In-ground Luminaires
How to Guides | 292
Technical Information
308
CEN Code of Practice
310
WEEE Directive & Energy Related Products
312
Ingress Protection & Shock Resistance
313
Lamp Data
314
Glossary
316
Index
318
General Conditions of Trading
320
Technical Info | 308
4
Light Solutions
Light Solutions
Contemporary
Classic
Products at a Glance
Architectural
Milano
Monaro LED II
Monaro
Evora LED
Evora
Camaro
Stratum
Excel
Dover
Polar
Vaio LED
Anello LED
Light Point
Portea LED
Renza LED
44 – 51
52 – 55
52 – 57
58 – 63
58 – 65
66 – 73
92 – 93
94 – 95
96 – 97
98 – 99
160 – 165
166 – 167
168 – 171
172 – 173
174 – 175
Sorento
Barosa
Rio
Manhattan
Toronto
Akord Cone
Cradle
Crieff
Corvus
Petra
Capra-Mini
Capra
Capra-Compact Cassia LED
Trebem
Lago
Pharola
Pharola-Max
Silka
74 – 77
78 – 79
80 – 81
82 – 83
84 – 85
86 – 87
98 – 99
102 – 103
104 – 105
176 – 177
178 – 181
178 – 183
178 – 185
186 – 187
224 – 225
226 – 227
228 – 229
230 – 231
232 – 235
Akord Bullet
Forza
Lyra
Mano LED
Monza
Malo LED
Luca
Silka-Max
Rona
Nexus & Riga
86 – 87
88 – 89
188 – 189
190 – 191
192 – 193
194 – 195
196 – 197
236 – 237
238 – 239
240 – 241
Polar & Vector
Cannon & Eton
242 – 243
244 – 245
Traditional
Functional
Reno
Pharola-Wall
Kona
Vertica LED
Vertica
198 – 199
200 – 201
202 – 203
204 – 205
206 – 207
Bollards
Floodlighting
Windsor
Lancaster
Knightsbridge Westminster
Pall Mall
Portland
Road Lantern
DW400
Meridian
Toro
Tatra
Aventis
Colada LED
Colada
Tizona
Sabre
110 – 111
112 – 113
114 – 115
116 – 117
118 – 119
144 – 145
146 – 147
148 – 149
150 – 151
210 – 211
212 – 213
248 – 249
248 – 249
250 – 251
252 – 253
116 – 117
5
Projection
Berkeley
Strand
Ely
Iffley
Hatfield
York
118 – 119
120 – 123
124 – 127
130 – 131
132 – 133
134 – 135
Solar & Wind
Illuminated LED Handrail
Columns, Brackets, Pedestals & Feeder Pillars Projection
Warwick
Salisbury
Newport
Braemar
Waterford
Henley
Lighting Powered by Nature
Garda
Columns
Brackets
Pedestals
Feeder Pillars
134 – 135
136 – 137
136 – 137
138 – 139
138 – 139
140 – 141
154 – 155
218 – 219
260 – 265
279 – 283
278
288 – 289
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
6
Light Solutions
Light Solutions
7
NEW Products
NEW Products
Camaro
Pages 152 – 157
Solar Wind
Rona
Pages 238 – 239
Forza
Pages 88 – 89
Pages 66 – 73
Evora LED
Pages 32 – 33 & 108 – 109
LED Light Engine
Pages 266 – 269
Special columns
Pages 62 – 63
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Pages 150 – 151
Pages 178 – 185
Pages 194 – 195
Malo LED
NEW Products
Toro
Pages 190 – 191
Capra-Compact
Mano LED
Pages 186 – 187
Capra
Capra-Mini
Cassia LED
Pages 224 – 225
Trebem
Pages 230 – 231
Pharola-Max
8 Light Solutions Light Solutions 9
NEW Products
Mano LED – Square
Mano LED – Circular
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Light Solutions
In Recognition of our Commitment
Sophisticated solutions to meet stringent regulations For over 35 years, DW Windsor has worked in parallel with the market, developing our products and services in line with changing expectations, raising standards and bringing our considerable experience and industry knowledge to bear. Known throughout the industry for the quality of our products and the high standards of service and support we offer our customers, we are also recognised for our ambitious new product development improvement programme. We have a reputation, particularly in public sector lighting, for outstanding quality and performance through innovation, attention to detail and customer focus. We offer a wide range of additional services to our customers including: special product design and manufacture, lighting scheme design and visualisation, project management, laboratory testing and refurbishment and replica. Pro-active in approach, our business is built on developing long term, trusting relationships. Working alongside our clients we help manage your project from start to finish, providing expert support and advice at all stages. Our many successes include: • Queen’s Award for Outstanding Export Achievement • Queen’s Award for Environmental Achievement • Royal Warrant
LUX 2011 Award for Urban Lighting using Garda LED Handrail
Essex Street Steps, London
11
DW Windsor products and services are accredited and audited to the highest possible industry standards, ensuring that we always deliver on our company ethos of Style with Performance. ISO Standards held: ISO is the International Organisation for Standardisation. DW Windsor were one of the first within the lighting industry to receive all three accreditations, giving customers, suppliers and employees a benchmark assurance that our operational standards and business processes are among the best in the industry.
ISO 9001
The International Standard for Quality Management Systems (QMS). ISO 9001:2008 ensures a systematic and consistent approach to the management of our business activities. DW Windsor is recognised, both within the UK and overseas, as a provider of quality, exterior lighting solutions. Our reputation is built on a commitment to quality, dedication to customer satisfaction, continuous improvement of both product and processes, outstanding levels of product performance and an innovative approach to research and development.
ISO 14001
OHSAS 18001
The International Standard for Environmental Management Systems.
The International Occupational Health and Safety Management Standard. Addressing health and safety (rather than product safety).
There are three fundamental requirements to achieve ISO 14401: prevention of pollution, compliance with legislation and continual improvement through an EMS (Energy Management System). As a UK manufacturer who continually strives to exceed our customers’ exacting carbon reduction commitments, the ISO 14001 accreditation for our Environmental Management System (EMS) is a particularly important milestone. Reducing our environmental impact is an on-going process. Our dedicated team continually look towards our next set of performance improvements including the yearly reduction of our landfill waste by 10 tonnes.
Lumicom
ROSPA
DW Windsor was privileged to receive The Royal Society for the Prevention of Accidents Gold Award for Occupational Health and Safety in May 2012. The extremely prestigious Gold award, is awarded to those organisations that demonstrate the most robust of health and safety management systems, leadership and workforce involvement.
As an environmentally aware manufacturer we subscribe to the Lumicom system to manage the collection and responsible disposal of end of life lighting equipment (see page 312).
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
12
Light Solutions
Light Solutions
13
How We Can Support You We offer a comprehensive, complimentary lighting design service to clients. Whether you require a detailed design from scratch, a quick calculation to check your own design, or even just an initial discussion of concepts, we have the capabilities to help you. Our experienced team is equipped to visit you at any time, before, during or after the design process to assist with establishing design parameters, requirements and time frames for your project. Our aim is to provide thorough, timely and professionally presented lighting design schemes to meet your targets and exceed your expectations.
Night-time 3D environment created using photometric data
Our in-house team of lighting designers use the latest software to undertake lighting designs including road, car park, area, sports, railway, architectural and accent lighting. This careful selection of software allows us to produce designs using customers’ drawings and to create visualisations including night-time 3D environments with accurate photometric data. The realism which can be achieved is impressive; so much so that it can often be difficult to distinguish reality from simulation.
St. Giles Hospital, Camberwell
Comprehensive scheme designs are produced in either hard copy or digital format. These can include a layout plot with results, a comprehensive report document, scheme visualisations, product information, general drawings and quotations. The aim is for the scheme design to include all information that may be required including an explanation of the requirements we have designed to, details of lamp specifications, luminaires and all other aspects relating to the project. We take pride in our openness and clarity regarding technical aspects of the design, with the emphasis on providing a high quality, high efficiency solution.
Sharing the Knowledge Our CPD seminars provide valuable insight and debate on key issues that continue to present challenges and opportunities to all of us involved in the lighting industry. We invest heavily in researching the areas that really matter and over the years we have built a significant knowledge base. The result of which is a range of seminars that aim to fulfil the ever changing needs of today’s lighting specifiers.
If you have a question about our products please contact our dedicated email address: answers@dwwindsor.co.uk, for an answer within twenty-four hours (Monday to Friday)
Check our website for an up-to-date list of available topics: dwwindsor.co.uk To request a seminar, email marketing@dwwindsor.co.uk or discuss with your Project Engineer.
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
14
Light Solutions
Light Solutions
Photometric Calculations Available Via DIALux
15
Providing the Highest Performing Products
With over 394,000 users worldwide and available in 26 languages, DIALux has fast become the industry standard lighting design software. DW Windsor is therefore working in partnership with DIALux to offer photometric data for our products via this design software package.
With a typical lifespan of 25 years, exterior luminaires are required to cope with a significant amount of punishment from the forces of nature. Throughout that time they must maintain their design integrity while consistently delivering on performance. Our products are the most important thing we have to say about ourselves – which is why we have an established new product development programme. With a strong track record in the development of high quality exterior lighting, we strive to anticipate future trends and provide solutions that exceed expectation and provide real value to our customers. Visualisations created using DIALux software
By providing data in this way we hope to assist you to make an informed product and performance choice, helping you to specify the right product for your project requirements. DIALux is suitable for interior or exterior calculations and visualisations. It provides readily available and up to date product photometry, with its “instant” update facility. Professional detailed lighting reports and visualisations can be created.
Visualisations created using DiaLUX software
For more detailed information or assistance in using DIALux contact our Applications Department on 01992 474600
It is free to use and can be downloaded from our website at: dwwindsor.com/dialux
Integrating Sphere
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
16
Light Solutions
Light Solutions
17
A Sure Test of Quality Integrating Sphere As part of our on-going commitment to providing high performing luminaires and in light of the significant evolution in LED technology, DW Windsor has invested in an integrating sphere for our well-equipped laboratory. With a diameter of three metres it will accommodate even the largest of our LED luminaires. A large sphere is necessary to measure large luminaires because the internal surface area of the sphere needs to be over fifty times the external surface area of the luminaire being measured. Without this relationship, the accuracy of the measurements may be questionable. Custom designed to our specification, we believe the sphere, which is calibrated with three ultimate reference lamps to traceable standards, thus more accurate than a traditional photometer, is one of the biggest and possibly the most accurate sphere in the country. We believe, therefore, that the Integrating Sphere is vital to our on-going ability to continue to design and develop high performance LED luminaires.
What is an Integrating Sphere? Measuring lumen output, an Integrating Sphere, also known as an Ulbricht sphere, is an optical tool consisting of a hollow spherical cavity which is both diffuse and highly reflective. Use of a spectroradiometer allows measurement of the colour spectrum including, colour temperature and colour rendering, allowing us to issue accurate data, in line with industry best practise and legislation.
Why do we need one? The spectral output of LEDs is significantly different to that of a traditional discharge light source, with many variables to take into consideration, including BIN, tolerance, colour temperature, junction temperature and secondary losses through optical systems such as lens and glazing. Additionally and very importantly, the drive current, thermal management and other factors relating to the luminaire in which the LEDs are mounted have a significant effect on total luminous flux so trying to extrapolate LED manufacturers technical data is impossible.
We continually strive for innovation as a means to positively affect the performance characteristics of our designs. Accurate measurement and reliable testing are the foundation of our product development activities. As part of our on-going commitment to have one of the UK’s most comprehensive lighting laboratories, we have made the significant investment of a market-leading Integrating Sphere.
Test facilities: Integrating sphere Measures lumen output. Use of a spectral radiometer allows measurement of colour temperature and colour rendering outputs – information required by our customers, allowing us to issue accurate data in line with industry best practise and legislation.
The only truly accurate method is to measure the light output using an Integrating Sphere and spectroradiometer, allowing us to produce data in accordance with LM79. We can measure photopic lumens, scotopic lumens as well as scotopic-photopic (SP) ratios, an important metric and one that is referenced in the forthcoming update to BS 5489. On the 1 September 2010, EU legislation came into force requiring light output to be labelled in terms of lumens (the measure of visible light), instead of electrical Watts (the measure of electrical power supplied), to enable the fair comparison of lighting technologies.
Goniophotometer Measures the distribution of light and efficacy of a luminaire as a graphic format expressed as a polar diagram of luminous intensity. This is the basis for photometric data production and calculations. Ingress protection Measures ingress resistance levels to solids and liquids. Water ingress testing
With potentially misleading information on the market we believe that the accuracy of the data we are now able to supply will prevent disillusionment with LEDs as a light source and give specifiers the confidence to design schemes with deliverable performance.
Thermal compliance Tests thermal performance of proprietary components and the entire product within its envisaged environment.
Electrical protection Tests electrical safety, wiring and insulation compliance, electrical strength and earth continuity. Impact protection Tests resistance to external mechanical forces, in accordance with the IK Code. Vibration protection Tests resistance to external wind and vibration forces. Life endurance Determines long-term continuity of performance and compliance to standards. All our products are designed, manufactured and tested under a Quality Assurance system, registration number 53278, for BS EN ISO 9001:2000.
Radio suppression Tests compliance with radio frequency interference suppression to the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) regulations.
The Integrating Sphere, which encapsulates all light, has an optical sensor located in a satellite sphere to accurately measure only the reflected light.
Impact test on glazing
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Light Solutions
19
White Light Changing the world with energy efficient white light High pressure sodium lamps have been the first choice in street lighting for a number of years, mainly because they produce high levels of light for a given amount of energy and have a long, reliable lifespan. However, their distinctive yellow/ orange light makes it difficult to distinguish colours. Today outdoor lighting no longer has to rely on yellow high pressure sodium light. Alternative light sources, such as LED and metal halide lamps combine high-quality white light with a very high efficacy, superior to that of high pressure sodium. For further information on these technologies and the energy savings that can be achieved with LED see pages 32 – 33, CosmoPolis lamps see pages 20 – 21 and StreetWise lamps see pages 22 – 23.
When there is insufficient or no daylight, we have to rely on alternatives to illuminate our world. As far back as 1417, lanterns with candles were used on the streets of London on winter nights. The subsequent invention of gas, oil and finally electric street lighting helped bring urban areas out of the dark ages. Today, billions of people take street lighting for granted. Why use white light in outdoor lighting? Accident prevention White light makes the streets safer for drivers and pedestrians. Improved visibility means much better road safety. Tests show that drivers are able to detect roadside movement faster and from a greater distance with white light. Crucially, this gives them more time to stop if a child, adult or animal is about to cross their path. Sense of safety and crime reduction White light plays a crucial role in helping people feel safer when they are outdoors at night. Superior colour rendering and a high level of perceived brightness make it easier to distinguish objects, colours, shapes and people. In particular, it makes facial recognition easier, even from a distance, and this really helps to reduce anxiety levels. Research has shown that white light promotes a virtuous cycle – when people feel safer, they stay in the streets later and in larger numbers. Beautification White light plays a major role within architectural lighting schemes to create striking effects in order to highlight important features. The use of different variations of colour temperature within the white light range ensures that a contrast exists between area and feature lighting.
Mesopic vision In recent years, many studies have taken place to try and understand how the eye perceives white light compared to the yellow light of high pressure sodium (SON) light sources. The use of white light for street lighting has increased as the efficacies and colour properties have improved, ensuring it provides comparable light output to a traditional high pressure sodium scheme for a similar amount of energy consumption. Scotopic vision is the term used for low light level vision, where the eye utilises only the rod receptors for sight, picking out movement but no discernible colours or definition. Photopic vision is the opposite of this, whereby well-lit conditions encourage the cone receptors, responsible for colour and definition, to be used for sight. When artificial street lighting is used, we create lighting levels which lie somewhere between Photopic and Scotopic vision, known as Mesopic vision. During this state, both photopic and scotopic vision is required to be able to see. Research has found that the quality of white light alters our perception of brightness, allowing lower lighting levels with white light to create the same eye response to those requiring higher lighting levels using a yellow light source.
S/P ratios at lower wattages (or dimmed) to provide the same perceived light level as high wattage, low S/P ratio sources. In general, white light sources have high S/P ratios and with yellow/orange sources these ratios are low. This reduction in light output when using white light sources has been recognised by the British lighting standards. The level of illumination required on subsidiary roads and paths may be reduced by as much as 30% if the light source has a colour rendering index of 60Ra or higher. Future lighting standards will utilise these reductions in light levels if white light sources are adopted more widely than at present. This will ensure that enough lighting is being provided to correctly illuminate the required area whilst being able to reduce the installed wattage of a product by opting for a white light source. By utilising the accuracy of our integrating sphere, we are able to measure both the photopic and scotopic lumens created by a light source. The ratio between the two, expressed as a single number, is required to calculate the reduction in lighting level which can be employed to create a similar lit scene to that of a high pressure sodium scheme lit to a higher lighting level.
Scotopic/Photopic Ratios In order to understand the level to which a white light source can be dimmed relative to a SON source and be perceived by the human eye to give the same level of brightness, the ratio of scotopic to photopic lumens (S/P ratio) must be understood. The higher the ratio, the better the light is at stimulating the eye and therefore we can use light sources with high
Monaro Victoria Way, Ashford
Sorento, Westfield, Stratford City
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
20
Light Solutions
Light Solutions
21
CosmoPolis
Energy Savings Solution In the past, one of the main reasons for using high-pressure sodium lamps was energy efficiency. However, thanks to ongoing innovation, white light has made a breakthrough in energy efficiency with the Philips CosmoPolis system that can reach up to 120 lm/W. This means that you can save energy by using CosmoPolis instead of high-pressure sodium lamps in new lighting installations. If you use advanced drivers with integrated controls, additional savings of up to 40% can be made through dimming.
A public lighting project will typically have a life-cycle of 25 to 30 years. The total cost of ownership over this period consists of the initial investment and ongoing maintenance and energy costs. The energy cost accounts for the largest portion of the total, and therefore offers the greatest potential for savings. A small additional investment can have a huge impact on the energy consumption over the entire life of an installation. This means a return on investment (ROI) for the additional expenditure is positive in 3 – 5 years, depending on energy prices. Investment cost The total investment cost depends mainly on the choice of luminaire, lamp system and whether it offers dimming. Although, in many cases the advanced optics, in combination with the CosmoPolis system, will result in wider spacing requirements and therefore fewer luminaires to light the street, making extra investment in new columns a consideration. Energy cost The energy cost depends mainly on the choice of lamp system. CosmoPolis has the highest efficiency (20% better than high-pressure sodium) and can be combined with electronic dimming solutions to generate additional savings of up to 40%. The use of white light can bring lower lighting levels and therefore even greater energy savings. If energy costs rise, reducing energy use becomes even more critical. Maintenance cost Thanks to the high reliability and long lifetime performance of the CosmoPolis Xtra system, maintenance cycles can be extended. While the initial service lifetime (90% survivals) of 4 years already set the industry benchmark, continued innovation now delivers reliable performance for up to 6 years (24,000 burning hours).
CosmoPolis System Warranty The long lifetime and reliability of the CosmoPolis system is underpinned with testing evidence. For that reason Philips gives an 8 year warranty on the Xtreme gear and a 3 year warranty on the lamp when operated on a Philips ballast.
CosmoPolis system is the key to unlocking energy savings The high efficiency of CosmoPolis is driven even higher with the use of electronic dimming gear. By dimming street lighting at appropriate times, CosmoPolis instantly uses even less energy, reduces costs and light pollution. The DynaVision Xtreme range can dim the CosmoPolis lamp down to 50% light output without a negative effect on lamp performance. There are now several control options available for CosmoPolis systems, from easy, integrated stand-alone dimming like LumiStep to full CMS compatibility using a DALI interface. These options allow for a very efficient and cost effective solution for every installation.
Xtreme driver The full range of PrimaVision and DynaVision products is now designed with Xtreme technology, delivering long life and reliable operation. The product is designed to perform under typical outdoor conditions with moisture, dust, vibrations and shocks and reach at least a 20 years lifetime with exceptionally low failure rates. Xtreme technology also protects against electrical surges on the mains and will not extinguish the light, fail or allow these surges to reduce system lifetime. It even protects the gear from lightning strikes of up to 5kA/10kV.
For detailed lamp information see pages 314 – 315 CosmoPolis lamps are now available as standard across a large range of DW Windsor luminaires See individual Product Codes for availability
www.philips.com/cosmopolis
In addition, CosmoPolis lamps are extremely low in mercury content compared with high pressure sodium lamps.
Evora Tabard Sreet, London
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Light Solutions
23
StreetWise
™
CMH Technology Until now, public authorities and other organisations have had to choose between high cost, high quality outdoor illumination or low cost alternatives which, even at peak efficiency, make streets and other areas look less inviting. Scene lit with high pressure sodium lighting
Ceramic Metal Halide (CMH) outdoor lighting offers the best of both worlds, offering bright, white light and low running and maintenance costs. With CMH lighting, streets and other public spaces can feel safer for pedestrians. Furthermore, the good colour rendering of these lamps improves the ability of drivers to recognise shapes and colours, especially in peripheral vision. It promotes quicker driver response times, too. CMH lighting delivers competitive levels and higher quality of light compared with high pressure sodium (HPS) with similar energy consumption; it combines the efficiency of HPS with the whiteness of metal halide. As well as good colour rendering and reduced running costs, the combination of CMH technology with suitable electronic gear ensures excellent and sustained rates of durability, while the compact nature of the light sources enables designers to ensure consistent light distribution in any application.
The European Union continues to apply pressure to eliminate outdated, inefficient lighting. Under ErP Regulations, manufacturers will be required to phase-out a number of popular lamp types between 2012 and 2017. The reason for these changes is clear as lighting now accounts for more than 20 per cent of energy consumption around the world. CMH technology complies with all the current and pending EU requirements for lamps, and can therefore be specified with the confidence that the technology will not be out of date in a few years’ time. GE Lighting’s CMH StreetWise™ ceramic metal halide produces lumen output per system Watt greater than competitive technologies, enabling end users to cut energy bills. Users can simply replace existing luminaires with lower-wattage CMH StreetWise™ lamped products on a one-for-one basis or fit the same wattage CMH StreetWise™ and reduce the number of luminaires required. Either way, as well as reduced energy costs, they also benefit from the high reliability and lower re-lamping cycles of CMH technology.
Dimming for further energy saving
Ultimate performance
CMH StreetWise™ lamps can be dimmed with relatively little effect on their colour performance, offering the potential for further energy savings.
GE ConstantColor™ CMH StreetWise™ lamps are fitted with standard E27/E40 bases used for high pressure sodium lamp types, allowing direct replacement in existing luminaires. The lamps support both electronic and magnetic gear types and can be dimmed, outperforming most standard HID systems.
The colour performance of lamps in the StreetWise™ range is such that, when dimmed, they provide similar colour properties. Colour rendering is 70Ra at full power and 65Ra at 65% power; Colour temperature increases by 400K when dimmed to 65% power. This ensures that if used throughout a scheme, there will be no noticeable different in colour during dimmed periods.
With the high reliability and sustained lumen output across a longer working life of 24,000 hours, this relates to around 6 years of regular usage within a street lighting scheme. This helps to reduce maintenance cycles and the costs associated with regular lamp changes, providing further savings. Features: • Excellent white light with efficiency up to 111 lm/W • Lumen maintenance, 80% at 12,000 hours • Wide range: 50W/70W/100W/150W • Direct retrofits with High Pressure Sodium lamp types • Dimmable (with the exception of 50W on electromagnetic ballast) • System flexibility, operating on both electronic and magnetic gear
For detailed lamp information see pages 314 – 315 StreetWise lamps are now available as standard across a large range of DW Windsor luminaires See individual Product Codes for availability
www.gelighting.com/eu
Scene lit with StreetWise ceramic metal halide
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Light Solutions
25
Control & Dim Giving you the control you need The Carbon Reduction Commitment (CRC) is now in place to ensure users of energy are also taking active steps to reduce their carbon consumption. This places further importance on taking extra steps to reduce electricity consumption. We want to support our customers who are facing these difficult choices by offering a range of options to cover the potential solutions available. This means that the majority of our products now have the ability to be manufactured with pre-set dimming or switching schedules as standard, giving you the control you need.
With the ever increasing global demand for energy and the decreasing availability of natural resources, it is now imperative for all of us to consider carefully energy use. In recent times many local authorities and private sector businesses have had to consider the possibility of implementing a routine to either dim or switch off street lighting in order to reduce energy costs and the associated carbon usage. Option ‘PS’ – Part Night Switch
Option ‘PD’ – Part Night Dim
Option ‘C’ – Full CMS Interface
One option is to switch off exterior lighting altogether for the part of night when traffic levels are much lower and areas are not in use – typically the early hours of the morning.
Utilising intelligent photocells and control gear we can supply a predefined dimming schedule designed to reduce energy consumption and lighting levels.
Using photocell controls similar to that in the Part Night Dim setup, lighting can be controlled to switch off between certain periods rather than be dimmed.
By implementing a dimming regime to an exterior lighting scheme, it is possible to save around 40% on energy bills without having to completely switch off the lighting. This ensures that a level of light is still present for security and access reasons without impacting on the environment.
Using a Central Management System (CMS) such as Harvard LeafNut, Mayflower, Telensa or Zodion, users can control a number of exterior lighting components through a central web based system.
Using this type of arrangement, users can expect somewhere in the region of a 50% reduction in energy costs as well as the associated carbon reduction. The standard DW Windsor option covers complete switch off between Midnight and 6am via a part-night photocell. Other times and solutions can be offered also, contact us at answers@dwwindsor.com for further details. To choose this option for specific products, please choose Option ‘PS’ under photocell control within the Product Code table.
The standard DW Windsor option covers dimming down to 25% (dependant on light source) between Midnight and 6am. Other times and dimming levels can be offered in addition to this, contact us at answers@dwwindsor.com for further details. To choose this option for specific products, please choose Option ‘PD’ under photocell control within the Product Code table.
This allows dimming and switching regimes to be designed and implemented as users see fit. The majority of these systems also report back on details such as energy consumption, operating conditions and life expectancy. Speak to one of our Project Engineers to find out more information about the current CMS software we are able to integrate with. To choose this option for specific products, please choose one of the following options under photocell control within the Product Code table. Option ‘CH’ – Harvard LeafNut (see pages 26-27) Options ‘CM’ – Mayflower CLC Options ‘CT’ – Telensa PLANet Options ‘CZ’ – Zodion Vizion
For more product specific information on the Harvard LeafNut CMS system, please see pages 26 – 27
Monaro Victoria Way, Ashford
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
26
Light Solutions
Light Solutions
27
LeafNut
For Ultimate Lighting Control There has recently been much discussion about how to deal with the subject of street lighting energy consumption, which is widely regarded as a major contributor to carbon emissions. Switching lights off completely during off-peak periods to save energy and reduce pollution has been discussed and tested, resulting in public outcry that complete blackouts may have a major impact on crime levels and road safety.
LeafNut is a complete turn-key solution for street lighting equipment, from ballast to the secure user interface; it allows street lighting systems to integrate seamlessly with each other. This gives local authorities the ability to effectively and efficiently manage public street lighting by dimming lights as and when required, instead of having to resort to turning them off. Using the Internet, modern electronics and innovative wireless technology, LeafNut is already being used by around 100 local authorities worldwide.
LeafNode
As an alternative to complete switch off, many local authorities in the UK and across the world are looking at technologically advanced systems to help reduce street lighting levels, carbon emissions and make energy savings. Harvard’s LeafNut system is leading the way in this field.
Supplied with an auto commissioning PDA tool, the LeafNut system is easy to install and configure. As soon as each LeafNode is connected, the GPS locates the exact position, specific serial number and the ballast type which is then automatically stored into the LeafNut system as well as asset management databases used by the local authority. BranchNode
LeafNode control integrated into Rio
LeafNut is deployed as part of a complete street lighting solution that also includes the WiMAC wireless Central Management System (CMS) protocol. This system, which has been tested in many field trials across the UK, ensures it is robust and ready to be widely implemented, allowing street lighting operators to remotely adjust the light output of each individual street light.
With the system, street lighting equipment can be controlled wirelessly and real time linked, through the use of a webserver and GPS, directly to the microprocessor in the electronic ballast. Street lights can be programmed with different switching or dimming regimes, corresponding to peak requirements such as rush hours and areas of late night entertainment or periods of reduced usage such as the early hours of the morning. By gathering information from each luminaire’s ballast, LeafNut can accurately monitor all lighting units under its control. It provides on-screen diagnostics including operational efficiency, predicted lamp failure, ballast condition, fault finding and energy consumption. LeafNut has a mapping feature which utilises Google Maps to identify individual lamps showing their location, history and status, allowing fault reports with work orders to be automatically raised and emailed to maintenance crews. An Android App allows mobile monitoring of entire systems to deliver detailed summaries of performance statistics. This is especially useful in more remote areas where the system benefits isolated villages, eliminating the cost and carbon footprint of roving maintenance vehicles touring outlying districts on the lookout for failed lamps.
LeafNode control integrated into Windsor
UK street lighting is entirely unmetered and has traditionally been charged via inventory records and a photocell array, required to measure the switching times of all street lights within a location and hence calculates the cost of electricity. Before the introduction of CMS systems, no allowance or mechanism for variable lighting control has been possible. LeafNut’s CMS was the first solution in the UK to directly measure actual consumption, allowing local and highway authorities to obtain the full financial benefits that can be realised from dimming street lighting levels.
LeafNut technology is now available as standard across a large range of DW Windsor luminaires See individual Product Codes for availability
www.harvardeng.com
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
28
Light Solutions
Light Solutions
Key Features
• Allows for increased column spacings giving lower capital, maintenance and running costs • Compatible with Philips CosmoPolis and GE Streetwise, as well as the full range of existing lamp types
29
Diamond Optic
®
The ultimate in flexible, precise lighting control
• An adjustable reflector profile to refine the light distribution
Our unique and revolutionary Diamond Optic® reflector system has been favoured by local authorities and private sector specifiers through out the UK since 1990, primarily because of its combination of high performance, exceptional versatility and control of light pollution. It is designed to create widely different light distribution patterns from a single luminaire style – and the optic can even be adjusted on-site during the life of the scheme to meet changing user requirements.
What is Diamond Optic®? The patented Diamond Optic® system comprises four multi-facetted reflector elements, arranged in the shape of a diamond – hence its name. These reflectors can be independently adjusted to create a wide range of composite light distributions. Each reflector produces a controlled beam that can put light precisely where it is needed – and the four beams combine to make possible a wide range of light patterns, appropriate to most types of area lighting installation.
A 5/35
Milano The Hub, Milton Keynes
B 10/10
Diamond Optic® – a versatile lighting design tool Diamond Optic® gives engineers and designers the freedom to tailor the lighting to the physical shape of the space being lit. For example, the same luminaire can be set up to offer a rectangular distribution for road lighting, a wider rectangular pattern for wide roads and pedestrian precincts – or a square formation for car parks. In a roadside situation, ‘back lighting’ to the adjacent pavements can be created to facilitate pedestrian safety.
Tailoring the light pattern to the specific area being lit also gives the planner freedom to place lighting columns where they look best, rather than being forced into layouts determined by inflexible light distributions. Equally importantly, the use of the Diamond Optic® enables column spacings to be increased, reducing the total number of lighting units required.
If you wish to find out more about this uniquely powerful optic, please contact our Applications Department on 01992 474600
C 31/35
D 5/25
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Light Solutions
30
Light Solutions
31
Diamond Optic
®
Setting A (5/35)
Setting B (10/10)
Typical Applications: Wide roads Car parks (from perimeter)
Typical Applications: Footpaths Cycle paths
The 5º reflectors light the near side pavement, the 35º reflectors light wide distances across from the luminaire.
Reflector pairs are pulled in to 10º to create a near symmetrical lozenge-shaped isolux template.
A highly flexible reflector system 5º
10º
35º
10º
Setting C (31/35)
Setting D (5/25)
Typical Applications: Open areas Car parks (from perimeter)
Typical Applications: Standard roads Wide pathways
This setting splits the distribution equally around the column and can dispense with the need for two luminaires on each column.
The 5° reflectors light the near side pavement, the 25° reflectors light a ‘standard’ road-width across from the luminaire.
31º
5º
35º
25º
The example illustrates the full flexibility, functionality and maximum efficiency that can be achieved with Diamond Optic®. One luminaire type can be used throughout a multi-area scheme, with different Diamond Optic® settings, to create the optimal lighting performance for each area.
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
32
Light Solutions
Light Solutions
Key Features
• Available as a retrofit LED solution for existing DW Windsor schemes or provides LED options for new luminaires
33
LED Light Engine
• Significant energy savings and reduced maintenance costs across all products • Simple on-site installation for retrofit • Equivalent distribution to Diamond Optic® A, B, C & D
Known for developing high performance solutions, such as our popular Diamond Optic®, we have introduced an easy and cost effective way to upgrade existing lighting schemes to LED, across our range of Contemporary to Traditional street lights.
• Energy saving dimming, switching and full CMS options
What is our LED Light Engine? Our commitment to include an LED version of all our product ranges has been the driving force behind introducing a selfcontained LED light source, called LED Light Engine. This is available as a replacement, retrofit light source for DW Windsor schemes installed less than 10 years ago, across a number of ranges. In addition, we are now able to create new LED versions of a wide range of our luminaires. Retrofit LED Designed for simple on-site retrofit into DW Windsor products, installed within the last 10 years, the LED Light Engine can be fitted directly into an existing lantern. In the same time as it takes to replace a lamp all the benefits of LED can be incorporated into a previously lamped scheme, without the cost of new luminaires.
Luminaires available with LED Light Engine Retrofit & New • DW400 pages 146 – 147 • Stratum pages 92 – 93 • Dover pages 96 – 97 • Windsor pages 110 – 111 • Strand Family pages 120 – 123 • Ely pages 124 – 125 • Iffley pages 130 – 131 New • Milano pages 48 – 51 • Evora LED pages 62 – 63 • Lancaster pages 112 – 113 • Knightsbridge pages 114 – 115 • Pall Mall/Westminster pages 116 – 117 • Hatfield pages 132 – 133 • York/Warwick pages 134 – 135 • Newport/Salisbury pages 136 – 137 • Waterford/Braemar pages 138 – 139 • Henley pages 140 – 141 • Tizona pages 250 – 251
Performance Equivalent to Diamond Optic® The optical performance of LED Light Engine has been designed to match that of our popular Diamond Optic, offering a choice of four different lighting distributions. The similarities are particularly useful when considering retrofitting LED as a light source into existing lanterns or schemes, where LED technology can be provided with relatively little effect on the lit environment. This is particularly interesting when considering reducing energy usage and lowering maintenance costs in an existing lamped scheme.
Array A
Array B
Performance Compared with Lamped Versions The DW Windsor LED Light Engine is available in three different sizes. The specific information on which LED Light Engine is available for each luminaire option can be found within the product code tables on each product page. Comparisons to light output of other light sources are below: Number of LEDs
Total Wattage
Comparison Light Source
12
29W
45W CosmoPolis / 50W SON-T
24
58W
60W CosmoPolis / 70W SON-T
36
87W
90W CosmoPolis / 100W SON-T
Compatible Control Options The following control options are available for luminaires using LED Light Engine as retrofit or new. • Switch: on/off through conventional photocell (or part-night switch off) • Dim: factory set/customer specific regime • Dali: full CMS/remote monitoring functionality: suitable for use with Harvard LeafNut, Telensa and Mayflower Light Source Information We use high performing Cree LEDs for this offering.
Array C
Array D
Colour Temperature / Colour Rendering (CRI): • 3000K (warm white) / 80Ra or • 4500K (neutral white) / 70Ra Light Engine Efficacy: 73 lm/W
Please contact answers@dwwindsor.co.uk for achievable savings or for assistance in planning an effective roll-out of upgrading to LED with our Light Engine
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Light Solutions
Key Features • Designed specifically for roadway lighting solutions • Optimised to achieve the stringent ME class lighting levels for main roads utilising CosmoPolis, High Pressure Sodium and Metal Halide light sources • Available in a wide range of DW Windsor products in Contemporary, Classic, Traditional and Functional product ranges
35
LX1 Luminance Optic DW Windsor is well known for its high performance, versatile and award-winning Diamond Optic® reflector system which provides a wide number of lighting distributions to suit both typical and unusual lighting scheme needs. In order to increase this offering further, we have developed a new Luminance Optic, the LX1, to increase the DWW product range for main road lighting schemes. As with the Diamond Optic®, the LX1 can be specified in many of our products, from Contemporary and functional to Classic and Traditional ranges to provide the highest performance lighting solution in the style of luminaire needed to suit the environment. Main road lighting schemes requires stringent lighting design parameters to be met, which often requires a different type of optic to be used. These are usually a single-piece pressed optic, which completely surrounds the lamp, with various facets to create the desired shape of light required on the ground. In order to ensure we provide the best possible solution to complement our product range, we are using the most up-todate, highly reflective material from which to manufacture the optic. This gives us excellent light output and reduced losses, whilst also creating the shape of light required to meet the lighting levels for main road lighting (see pages 310 – 311).
Adjustability In order to provide the greatest choice of options for light distribution, the LX1 Luminance Optic has numerous lamp settings available by simply adjusting the forward or backward position of the lamp holder. This can either be factory pre-set or adjusted on-site to ensure flexibility through design and installation.
Specification The precision engineered LX1 Luminance Optic can be specified within a range of our products simply through choosing this option within the product code table.
If you wish to find out more about this road optic, please contact our Applications Department on 01992 474600
Products with LX Luminance Optic options: • Evora pages 64 – 65 • Rio pages 80 – 81 • All Optima luminaires pages 92 – 99 • Akord Cone A & B pages 86 – 87 • Strand A & A+ pages 120 – 121 • Ely A pages 124 – 125
New LX1 Luminance Optic for main road lighting available in a range of products
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
36
Light Solutions
Light Solutions
37
Unique Solutions If you need stylish, reliable and robust product solutions, any of our standard range of products will meet your requirements. If on the other hand you require a bespoke or unique solution our designers can help you to deliver your vision.
Brilliance Project, Blackpool
Brilliance Project, Blackpool
Sometimes we start from an architects’ drawing, sometimes from a tight technical specification. Just as importantly, there are times when our brief is nothing more than a half-formed notion in our customer’s imagination; whatever the initial input, the outcome is always as brilliant as its inspiration.
LED staircase Royal Terrace Gardens, Torquay
Bankside, London
02 Arena, Greenwich
Our bespoke solutions can be found all over the UK: Cleveleys Promenade, Edge Lane – Liverpool, the O2 Arena – London to name just a few and overseas in Singapore, Bahrain, Cyprus, Portugal and Dubai. No matter what the brief, our team are ready and waiting to respond to the challenge.
If you have your own unique product design requirement, contact your Project Engineer or Customer Services: e: customerservices@dwwindsor.co.uk t: 01992 474600
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
38
Light Solutions
Light Solutions
39
Refurbishments & Replicas Maintaining the overall look and feel of ‘Heritage’ lighting can be seen as both an art and a science; the lantern, column and embellishments have to remain authentic, yet comply with all the current lighting standards. DW Windsor has perfected this balance over a number of years to become one of the strongest in the industry.
Albert Embankment, London
By appointment to Her Majesty The Queen Manufacturer of Replicas and Refurbs DW Windsor Lighting Hertfordshire
Battersea Bridge, London
London Eye
Effective, respectful restoration involves all the traditional craftsmanship and skill that went into the product’s original creation. But making a vintage luminaire meet modern performance and quality standards calls for a whole new set of talents: the design ingenuity and technical expertise to build the latest optics and electrical components into housings originally designed for a very different, less demanding age.
Tower Bridge, London
Battersea Bridge, London
There are plenty of companies capable of ‘tidying up’ worn and weathered columns and lanterns. We prefer a hands-on approach with real involvement which can mean deconstructing each piece of equipment, rebuilding, re-engineering and sensitively recreating a product as good as new or better.
For further information contact Customer Services: e: customerservices@dwwindsor.co.uk t: 01992 474600
Having often worked with English Heritage, we take the responsibility of preserving important parts of the nation’s architectural legacy very seriously, ensuring every detail is as historically authentic as it is technically excellent.
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
40
Light Solutions
Light Solutions
41
Urban Furniture Not just a lighting manufacturer, DW Windsor offers a wide range of urban furniture products which perfectly reflect our vision; to offer immensely stylish, quality furniture that also delivers on performance. Many of our products are designed to work alongside our lighting products to ensure completely holistic design solutions can be achieved. For further information or to register for a catalogue please contact Customer Services: e: customerservices@dwwindsor.co.uk t: 01992 474600 or visit www.dwwindsor.co.uk
Cube Bench Orchard Theatre, Dartford
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Contemporary
43
Contemporary Enhancing beautiful spaces
Milano LED Bankside, London
73% energy savings achieved with LED Light Engine
Milano
Monaro LED II
Monaro
Evora LED
44 – 51
52 – 55
52 – 57
58 – 63
Bankside case study
Evora
Camaro
Sorento
Barosa
58 – 65
66 – 73
74 – 77
78 – 79
Rio
Manhattan
Toronto
Akord Cone
80 – 81
82 – 83
84 – 85
86 – 87
Akord Bullet
Forza
86 – 87
88 – 89
Creative styling and high performance are two prerequisites for this range of contemporary luminaires. Whether lighting needs to be discrete or to make a statement, there is a luminaire to enhance any environment including business developments, retail or leisure parks and pedestrian areas. Designed to maximise performance and aid future-proofing, many ranges are compatible with leading Central Management Systems and/or offer dimming and switching options. In addition, they use LED or other efficient light sources to match styling with performance.
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Contemporary
45
Milano
Milano Inspired by architecture
IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I
Features • Choice of straight or curved arms
Milano enhances prestigious urban spaces and architectural landscapes from city centres to corporate car parks.
• Wide choice of light sources • LED provides similar light distribution to Diamond Optic® settings
By day or night the clean lines and simple geometry provide visual empathy with surroundings, as seen at numerous landmark installations including The Gherkin, London.
• CMS compatible or other control options available • High quality aluminium construction
With an all-aluminium construction and wide range of available light sources including LED, Milano ensures scheme longevity. Energy savings are achievable through a range of leading Central Management Systems or via simple dimming and switching options.
Milano offers a choice of straight or curved arms
Milano LED Bankside, London
D
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
46
Contemporary
Milano St. Marys Axe, The Gherkin, London
Contemporary
47
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
48
Contemporary
Milano curved arm
Contemporary
Product Codes Example 1. Model MIL
MIL
2. Arm Style C
Curved Arms
C
F
Flat Toughened Glass
F
P
Polycarbonate Bowl
3. Glazing
4. Mounting 76
76mm Ø
76
5. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E
Electronic Gear: available for all light sources
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
E
6m
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
150S
150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
035C*
35W CDM-T
070C*
70W CDM-T
150C*
150W CDM-T
042P
42W PL-T
057P*
57W PL-T
045W
45W CosmoPolis
060W
60W CosmoPolis
090W
90W CosmoPolis
140W
140W CosmoPolis
L230
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L245
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
Installation and Maintenance
Milano curved arm For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
Cable termination within product base
Glazing: Flat toughened glass (standard) Polycarbonate bowl Mounting: 76mm Ø 89mm Ø (available on request) Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
Milano
Tool-less access via quarter-turn latch and hinged lid
curved arm
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35
B 10/10
C 31/35
IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I • Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options
D 5/25
• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions
Light source: See product codes
6. Light Source 050S
Options
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33
Colours: RAL 9016 White RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey
49
• Straight arm option available see pages 50 – 51 Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details
Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution L230
Other: Obtrusive light shield (polycarbonate bowl)
20
Materials
7. Colour – for alternative colours see below 20
5m
RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey
8. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution A
Suggested column/ bracket options
B
10/10 31/35
Arms: High pressure die cast aluminium
D
5/25
Canopy: Spun aluminium
B
9. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS N
No Photocell
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
Part Night Switch Off
PD
Part Night Dim
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated
U
Example Code = MIL C F 76 E L230 20 B U *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
40
10
20
21
81
26
27
DB 703
RAL 9007
RAL 9006
PAN 7621
RAL 7037
RAL 7016
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
RAL 9005
1m
Base: High pressure die cast aluminium
C
RAL 9016
2m
Milano with curved arms shown on Tapered Aluminium 5m column
3m
Milano with curved arms shown on Tubular Steel 4m column
4m
5/35
DB
Dimensions mm This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
A
B
C
630
700
76
Weight kg
Windage
16
0.16m2
Milano LED Heron Tower, London
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
50
Contemporary
Milano straight arm
Contemporary
Product Codes Example 1. Model MIL
MIL
2. Arm Style S
Straight Arms
S
F
Flat Toughened Glass
F
P
Polycarbonate Bowl
3. Glazing
4. Mounting 76
76mm Ø
76
5. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E
Electronic Gear: available for all light sources
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
E
6m
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
150S
150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
035C*
35W CDM-T
070C*
70W CDM-T
150C*
150W CDM-T
042P
42W PL-T
057P*
57W PL-T
045W
45W CosmoPolis
060W
60W CosmoPolis
090W
90W CosmoPolis
140W
140W CosmoPolis
L230
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L245
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
Installation and Maintenance
Milano straight arm For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
Cable termination within product base
Glazing: Flat toughened glass (standard) Polycarbonate bowl Mounting: 76mm Ø 89mm Ø (available on request) Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
Milano
Tool-less access via quarter-turn latch and hinged lid
straight arm
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35
B 10/10
C 31/35
IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I • Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options
D 5/25
• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions
Light source: See product codes
6. Light Source 050S
Options
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33
Colours: RAL 9016 White RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey
51
• Curved arm option available see pages 48 – 49 Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details
Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution L230
Other: Obtrusive light shield (polycarbonate bowl)
20
Materials
7. Colour – for alternative colours see below
Suggested column/ bracket options
B
10/10
C
31/35
Arms: High pressure die cast aluminium
D
5/25
Canopy: Spun aluminium
B
9. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS N
No Photocell
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
Part Night Switch Off
PD
Part Night Dim
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated
U
Example Code = MIL S F 76 E L230 20 B U *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
40
10
20
21
81
26
27
DB 703
RAL 9007
RAL 9006
PAN 7621
RAL 7037
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
RAL 7016
1m
Base: High pressure die cast aluminium
5/35
RAL 9005
2m
A
RAL 9016
3m
RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey
8. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution Milano with straight arms shown on Tubular Steel 4m column
4m
20 Milano with straight arms shown on Tapered Aluminium 5m column
5m
DB
Dimensions mm This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
A
B
C
630
700
76
Weight kg
Windage
16
0.16m2
Derby Station
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Contemporary
53
Monaro
Monaro Engineered for longevity
IP66 | IK09 | CLASS I
Features • Wide choice of light sources
Monaro’s low-profile design combines simplicity with functionality. Invisible mounting fixings and flush access latches contribute to a smooth profile to suit any surrounding, from amenity to residential and car park lighting.
• LED version provides similar light distribution to Diamond Optic® setting D • CMS compatible or other control options available • Direct or side entry mounting
Offering optimal road lighting distribution, Monaro is available in a wide range of light sources, including CosmoPolis and LED, providing superior life-time performance. Monaro LED’s unique thermal management system extends life further still, with independent testing certifying in excess of 85,000 hours.
• High quality aluminium construction
With a future-proof (wholly upgradable) design and virtually zero upward light, Monaro assists the environmentally conscious designer with energy control systems such as CMS and dimming options giving additional efficiencies.
Robust future-proof design AMRC building, Sheffield
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Contemporary
Product Codes Example 1. Model MOR
MOR
2. Mounting Side Entry
D
Direct Entry
D
3. Glazing 8m
L
Polycarbonate Low Profile Bowl
G
Pressed Low Profile Toughened Glass
G
4. Light Source
7m
LD40
24 x 2.4W LED – Neutral White 4500K
LD40
5. Colour – for alternative colours see below 6m
20
RAL 7016 Anhracite Grey
N
No Photocell
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
Part Night Switch Off
PD
Part Night Dim
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
Monaro LED II
Smooth, easy to clean glazing
LED Array Distribution
IP66 | IK09 | CLASS I
D 5/25
Glazing: Polycarbonate low-profile bowl Pressed low-profile toughened glass Gear, switching and control: Electronic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
D
L70 Lifetime prediction: 86,500 hours (independently tested)
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options • Improved efficacy and colour rendering giving increased light output and lower energy consumption (compared with Monaro LED)
Optical distribution shown is equivalent to the Diamond Optic® D See pages 28 – 31 for details
• Road distribution equivalent to Diamond Optic® D setting
Total circuit watts: 63W U
Example Code = MOR D G LD40 20 D U
Suggested column/ bracket options
Colour temperature: 4500K Colour rendering index: 70Ra Colours: RAL 9016 White RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey Optical control: LED Array Distribution
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
Materials Body: High pressure die cast aluminium Access: High pressure die cast latch Seals: Single piece silicone Finish: Polyester powder coated
A
B
A
10
20
21
81
26
27
DB 703
RAL 9007
RAL 9006
PAN 7621
RAL 7037
RAL 7016
C 40
RAL 9005
1m
5/25
Mounting: Side entry [42mm Ø] Direct entry [60mm Ø & 76mm Ø] with 0º tilt
Light source: High performance Cree LEDs
7. Switching, Dimming & Control
RAL 9016
2m
Monaro LED II shown on Tapered Steel 5m column
3m
Monaro LED II shown on Tubular Steel 5m column with Linear column bracket
4m
D
Ease of access via quick release latch
20
6. LED Array Distribution 5m
Installation and Maintenance
DB
Dimensions mm This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
A
B
C
610
330
142
Weight kg
Windage
13
0.09m2
C*
9m
S
Options Monaro LED II For mounting at 4 – 6 metres
55
B
Monaro LED II
Contemporary
CC
54
Clacton Promenade
LED detail
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
56
Contemporary
Monaro
Contemporary
Product Codes Example 1. Model MOR
MOR
2. Mounting S
Side Entry
D
Direct Entry
D
3. Glazing L
Polycarbonate Low Profile Bowl (up to 90W max)
D
Polycarbonate Deep Bowl (100, 140 & 150W only)
G
Low Profile Toughened Glass (all wattages)
G
4. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E
Electronic Gear: available for all light sources
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
M
5. Light Source
9m
8m
150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
035C*
35W CDM-T
070C*
70W CDM-T
150C*
150W CDM-T
042P
42W PL-T
057P*
57W PL-T
045W
45W CosmoPolis
060W
60W CosmoPolis
090W
90W CosmoPolis
140W
140W CosmoPolis
070S
A
5/35
B
10/10
C
31/35
D
5/25
Tool-less maintenance via quick release latch and hinged cover
Mounting: Side entry [42mm Ø] Direct entry [60mm Ø & 76mm Ø] with 0º & +5º tilt
Diamond Optic® A 5/35
IP66 | IK09 | CLASS I
B 10/10
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options
Glazing: Polycarbonate low-profile bowl [up to 90W only] Polycarbonate deep bowl [100W and above only] Pressed low-profile toughened glass [all wattages] Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
Monaro
C 31/35
• LED option available see pages 54 – 55
D 5/25
• Easy clean profile for reduced maintenance
See pages 28 – 31 for details
Light source: See product codes Colours: RAL 9016 White RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey
Other: Zebra crossing version available 20
See page 298 – 301 for details
Materials C
8. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS
Suggested column/ bracket options
Installation and Maintenance
Monaro For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
Optical control: Diamond Optic®
RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey
N
No Photocell
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
Part Night Switch Off
PD
Part Night Dim
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
Body: High pressure die cast aluminium Access: High pressure die cast latch Seals: Single piece silicone Finish: Polyester powder coated
U
Example Code = MOR D G M 070S 20 C U *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
40
10
20
21
81
26
27
Dimensions mm
DB 703
RAL 9007
RAL 9006
PAN 7621
RAL 7037
Side entry RAL 7016
1m
150S
RAL 9005
2m
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
RAL 9016
3m
100S
7. Diamond Optic® Setting
Monaro shown on Tapered Steel 5m column
4m
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
20 Monaro shown on Tubular Steel 5m column with Linear column bracket
5m
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
6. Colour – for alternative colours see below
7m
6m
050S
Options
57
DB
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
Weight Windage kg
A
B
C
C•
610
330
180
142
•with low profile glazing
13
0.09m2 Victoria Way, Ashford
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Contemporary
59
Evora
Evora Exceptional thermal management
IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I
Features • Wide range of light sources
Evora is a contemporary, low-profile luminaire engineered to incorporate the very latest technologies including integral electronic gear and remote monitoring systems.
• LED provides similar light distribution to Diamond Optic® settings • CMS compatible or other control options available • Main road lighting using new LX1 Luminance Optic
Available in a wide range of light sources including LED and MasterColour CDM-T Elite MW. With mounting heights up to 10m, Evora’s unrivalled Cool-Zone thermal management offers superior life-time performance.
• 8 year guarantee on standard electronic ballasts
With a clean, unobtrusive design, without visible fastenings and wide range of bracket options, Evora fits elegantly into any surrounding including road, residential, amenity and car park lighting.
Uninterrupted profile and tool-less access via push-button latch
Evora shown with C1 column bracket Archer Road, Stevenage
Tabard Street, Southwark, London
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
60
Contemporary
Evora Tabard Street, London
Contemporary
61
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
62
Contemporary
Evora LED
Contemporary
Product Codes
Options
Installation and Maintenance
Example
Evora LED For mounting at 4 – 8 metres
Tool-free access via single push button latch for ease of maintenance
EVO
Mounting: Side entry [42mm Ø] Direct entry [76mm Ø]
LED Array Distribution
1. Model EVO 2. Mounting
Evora C1
Evora C8
S
Side Entry
D
Direct Entry
D
3. Glazing P
Polycarbonate Bowl
F
Flat Toughened Glass
F
4. Control Gear Evora C9
Evora C10
E
Electronic Gear
E
5. Light Source L230 7m
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L245
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
L330
36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L345
36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
L245
6. Colour – for alternative colours see below
6m
20
RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey
20
31/35
D
5/25
C
N
No Photocell
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
Part Night Switch Off
PD
Part Night Dim
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
Gear, switching and control: Electronic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS) Light source: See product codes
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33
A 5/35
Evora LED IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I
B 10/10
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options • See pages 64 – 65 for lamped versions C 31/35
• Extremely low profile design, without visible fastenings
D 5/25
• High transmission flat glass for enhanced optical performance and zero upward light • UMSUG approved
See pages 32 – 33 for details
Colours: RAL 9016 White RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey Optical control: LED Array Distribution
Materials
8. Switching, Dimming & Control
Body: High pressure die cast aluminium U
Canopy: Spun aluminium Latches: High pressure die cast aluminium Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated
Example Code = EVO D F E L245 20 C U
Suggested column/ bracket options For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
40
10
20
21
81
26
27
Dimensions mm
DB 703
RAL 9007
RAL 9006
PAN 7621
LED detail RAL 7037
1m
10/10
C
RAL 7016
2m
5/35
B
RAL 9005
3m
A
RAL 9016
4m
Evora shown on Tapered Steel 5m column
5m
Evora shown on Tubular Steel 6m column with Linear column bracket
7. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/LX1 Luminance Optic
Glazing: Polycarbonate bowl Flat toughened glass
63
DB
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
Weight kg
Windage
A
B
Bowl
165
518
17.0
0.07m2
Flat glass
132
518
17.5
0.05m2
Evora Chesterton Road, London
Bowl option
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
64
Contemporary
Evora
Contemporary
Product Codes Example 1. Model EVO
EVO
2. Mounting S
Side Entry
D
Direct Entry
D
3. Glazing P
Polycarbonate Bowl
F
Flat Toughened Glass
F
4. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources Evora C1
Evora C8
E
Electronic Gear: available for most light sources
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
E
5. Light Source
Evora C9
Evora C10
10m
9m
8m
150S
150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
250S
250W SON-T+/CDO-TT
035C*
35W CDM-T
070C*
70W CDM-T
150C*
150W CDM-T
042P
42W PL-T
057P*
57W PL-T
060W
60W CosmoPolis
090W
90W CosmoPolis
140W
140W CosmoPolis
210W
210W CDM-T Elite MW
Tool-free access via single push button latch for ease of maintenance
Mounting: Side entry [42mm Ø] Direct entry [76mm Ø]
Diamond Optic® A 5/35
Evora IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I
B 10/10
Glazing: Polycarbonate bowl Flat toughened glass Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS) Light source: See product codes Colours: RAL 9016 White RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey
090W
Optical control: Diamond Optic® LX1 Luminance Optic
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options C 31/35
• LED version now available (see pages 62 – 63)
D 5/25
• Extremely low profile design, without visible fastenings • High transmission flat glass for enhanced optical performance and zero upward light
See pages 28 – 31 for details
• UMSUG approved
LX1 Luminance Optic
• NEW LX1 Luminance Optic available
Distribution optimised for main road lighting See pages 34 – 35 for details The LX1 Luminance Optic is currently available with 90W/140W CosmoPolis & 100W/150W SON lamp types
Materials
RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey
20
Body: High pressure die cast aluminium
7. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/LX1 Luminance Optic
Canopy: Spun aluminium
A
5/35
B
10/10
Latches: High pressure die cast aluminium
C
31/35
D
5/25
L
LX1 Luminance Optic (selected lamps – see opposite)
C
Suggested column/ bracket options
N
No Photocell
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
Part Night Switch Off
PD
Part Night Dim
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
CZ
Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated
CMS Zodion Vizion
U
Example Code = EVO D F E 090W 20 C U *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
40
10
20
21
81
26
27
Dimensions mm
DB 703
RAL 9007
RAL 9006
PAN 7621
RAL 7037
Bowl option RAL 7016
1m
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
RAL 9005
2m
100S
RAL 9016
3m
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
Installation and Maintenance
Evora For mounting at 4 – 10 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 250W
8. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS Evora shown on Tapered Steel 5m column
4m
070S
20 Evora shown on Tubular Steel 10m column with Linear column bracket
5m
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
6. Colour – for alternative colours see below
7m
6m
050S
Options
65
DB
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
Weight kg
Windage
A
B
Bowl
165
518
17.0
0.07m2
Flat glass
132
518
17.5
0.05m2
Edgeware Road, London
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Contemporary
67
Camaro
Camaro Intelligently designed optics
IP66 | IK08 | CLASS I
Features • Compact, circular luminaire
Camaro’s slim profile is designed to minimise daytime impact; offering a consistent look for foot paths, from residential roads and car parks to major traffic routes.
• Performance-engineered optical lens and concave glazing design • Different lighting distributions with the same look for project continuity
Using precisely-positioned, individually directed and controlled LEDs it optimises light output while providing the desired uniformity of distribution. Camaro’s innovative concave glazing design ensures zero upward light above the horizontal, achieving a class-leading glare rating of G6 in the Area and Path models and G3 for Camaro Road.
• Suitable for lighting main, residential roads, cycleways and city centres • Managed LED light output gives in excess of 60,000 hours service life
To help meet your carbon reduction commitments Camaro offers a flexible range of energy management options including basic stand-alone switching and factory-set dimming.
Nema and Miniature photocell options available, located off-luminaire to reduce visual impact and ensure ingress protection
Camaro Road Swindon Cycle Path
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
68
Contemporary
Contemporary
69
Camaro
Road, Area, Path
Camaro Road Designed specifically for road lighting, whether high traffic highways or residential street, achieving the higher and more stringent requirements. Providing a neutral white (4000K) and available in 36, 72 or 108 LEDs for mounting at 6 – 12 metres.
Camaro Road (36 LED) mounted at 8m
Available in a choice of two colour temperatures: Warm White (3200K) and Neutral White (4000K). Suitable for mounting heights from 4m (22 LEDs) to 12m (108 LEDs), Camaro has a choice of three optical distributions to best-match your project requirements and provide continuity throughout your scheme.
Smithfield, Dublin
Camaro Area Designed to maximise the spread of light over a wide area, by providing a 160º beam, ideal for illuminating parks, squares, car parks and typical conflict areas. For mounting at 6 – 12 metres, Camaro Area provides a neutral white (4000K) and is available with 36, 72 or 108 LEDs.
Camaro Area
Camaro Area (72 LED) mounted at 6m
M20 Footbridge, Ashford
Camaro Bracket Options
Camaro Path
Camaro Path
Camaro Road/Area
Single arm 500mm projection
Designed specifically to distribute light along linear pathways & cycle paths. For mounting at 4 – 6 metres, in an inviting warm white (3200K).
Camaro Path (22 LED) mounted at 5m
Swindon Cycle Path Single arm 1000mm projection
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
70
Contemporary
Camaro
Contemporary
The Camaro range has been designed solely with LED as its light source, therefore the technical information for this product differs to that of a conventional street lighting product. Innovative positioning of the LEDs creates a pattern of light by ensuring each LED within the array is optimally orientated to maximise the lighting distribution. By grouping the LEDs in banks of 12 and adjusting the current accordingly, we can carefully balance the output of the entire product, enhancing the optical performance.
Camaro
Drive Current Details Camaro Road 36 LED Version 12 LEDs @ 550mA 12 LEDs @ 530mA 12 LEDs @ 510mA 72 LED Version
71
design philosophy
48 LEDs @ 320mA 24 LEDs @ 350mA 108 LED Version 108 LEDs @ 350 mA
Camaro Area 36 LED Version 12 LEDs @ 450mA 12 LEDs @ 400mA 12 LEDs @ 350mA 72 LED Version 24 LEDs @ 450mA 24 LEDs @ 250mA 24 LEDs @ 200mA 108 LED Version 36 LEDs @ 450mA 36 LEDs @ 220mA 36 LEDs @ 200mA
Camaro Path 22 LED Version 11 LEDs @ 150mA 11 LEDs @ 300mA 22 LED High Output Version 11 LEDs @ 250mA 11 LEDs @ 500mA
High Efficiency Light System Performance Engineered From inception, Camaro’s design has been driven by technology, providing precise lighting control and impressive efficiency. This has been achieved through state-of-the-art LED lenses and an innovative diffusing screen, to reduce refraction. Camaro’s High Efficiency Lighting System optimises performance and quality of light through meticulous positioning of the LEDs and its uniquely shaped glazing; providing uniform light distribution and glare-free illumination with no light spill above 90º.
Camaro key advantages Performance • High performance Cree LEDs for energy savings, long life and reduced maintenance (in excess of 60,000 hours service life) • Reduced energy consumption (when compared to conventional light sources) by up to 68%: further savings achievable through the addition of a dimming regime • Intelligent thermal management, ensures high efficacy and long life of LEDs • State-of-the-art lens and unique concave glazing provide a uniform light distribution and glare-free illumination, with no light spill above 90º • Clean, white light: no harmful infra red or ultra violet radiation or chemicals such as mercury • Instantaneous lighting, even in extremely cold temperatures (down to –40ºC) Control • Precise positioning of the LEDs, critical lens design and management of the drive current ensure optimum optical performance and life
Advanced Cooling System Thermal Management Key to maximising the life of the LEDs is efficient thermal management. Camaro’s intelligently managed thermal design increases LED life and improves efficiency by maintaining a low junction temperature. Its Advanced Cooling System, an innovative die cast aluminium LED mounting platform with integral cooling fins, ensures effective heat dissipation.
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Contemporary
Contemporary
Camaro
Product Codes Road CAR
Optical control: Road Optic distribution designed specifically for main road lighting
Area
Example
Road For mounting at 6 – 12 metres
CAP
CAA
CAR
Path For mounting at 4 – 6 metres
2. Light Source 022L
22 LED High Output 036L
036H
36 LED 36 LED High Ouput
072L
072L
72 LED
108L
108L
108 LED
072L
3. Colour 16
16
16
Textured Basalt Grey
26
26
26
Textured Aluminium
16
4. Switching, Dimming & Control – factory-set dimming options available on request N
N
C
C
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
U
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
PS
PS
Part Night Switch Off
Example Code = CAR 072L 16 U
Glazing: Concave PMMA diffuser
Materials
Gear, switching and control: Electronic gear Miniature photocell or on/off switching using Nema socket Factory set dimming options
Glazing: PMMA
U
• Uses long life, energy saving LED • Consistent look for paths, roads and car park lighting • Zero light above the horizontal and glare rating G6 (Path & Area) or G3 (Road)
Finish: Polyester powder coated
Installation and Maintenance
Road 36 LED (48W) 36 LED High Output (66W) 72 LED (82W) 108 LED (122W)
Supplied with cable tails: Road: 10m Area: 8m Path: 6m Remote positioning of photocell ensures ingress protection of product during any required maintenance
Area 36 LED (51W) 72 LED (73W) 108 LED (105W)
9m
• Energy saving dimming and switching options
Seals: Silicone rubber
Path 22 LED (19W) 22 LED High Output (32W) 10m
• Range of circular, low profile luminaires
Body: High pressure die cast aluminium
Light source: High performance Cree LEDs
No Photocell
IP66 | IK08 | CLASS I
Area Optic distribution designed specifically for maximum light spread
Mounting: Direct entry: 76mm Ø Side entry: 60mm Ø
73
Camaro
Path Optic distribution designed specifically for linear path lighting
Area For mounting at 6 – 12 metres
22 LED
022H 036L
N
Options
Path
1. Model
LED Array Distribution Path
Road
L70 lifetime prediction: In excess of 60,000 hours
8m
Colour temperature: Path: 3200K (warm white) or Road/Area: 4000K (neutral white)
7m
6m
Colour Rendering Index (CRI): Road/Area: 75Ra Path: 85Ra
5m
Colours: RAL 7012 Textured Basalt Grey RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium
Area
2m
1m
Camaro Path on 4m tubular column
3m
Camaro Area on 8m conical column
4m Camaro Road on 10m conical column
72
Path
Suggested column/bracket options For full range of columns and brackets see page 256 Road/Area Dimensions mm
Weight kg
Windage
A
B
C
D
E
Path
93
340
470
240
300
4.5
0.04m2
Road/Area
146
500
750
240
500
10.5
0.08m2
M20 Footbridge, Ashford
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Contemporary
75
Sorento
Sorento Timeless iconic design
IP65 | IK07 | CLASS I
Features • Tall, slim design
Sorento’s timeless design brings elegance to prestigious developments or historic surroundings alike.
• Aluminium construction • Choice of light sources including LED
Attention to detail provides a truly iconic post-top lighting solution through innovative engineering. Illumination of the graceful supporting arms render the Sorento equally beautiful by day or night.
• Effective Diamond Optic® distribution • Energy control options including CMS
With an aluminium construction and wide range of light sources including LED, Sorento provides outstanding quality to meet the most onerous technical performance criteria. Efficiencies are achieved through a range of flexible energy management options from basic stand-alone switching to full remote-monitoring integration.
Designed in conjunction with Priestmangoode and Speirs & Major Associates
Westfield, Stratford City
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
76
Contemporary
Sorento
Contemporary
Product Codes Example 1. Model SOR
SOR
2. Light Source
7m
6m
050S
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
150S
150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
035C*
35W CDM-T
070C*
70W CDM-T
150C*
150W CDM-T
045W
45W CosmoPolis
060W
60W CosmoPolis
090W
90W CosmoPolis
140W
140W CosmoPolis
L130
12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L145
12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
20
5/25
140W
20
C
Suggested column/ bracket options
Colours: RAL 9016 White RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey
IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options
B 10/10
• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions
C 31/35
• Equally suited to both historic and modern urban spaces
D 5/25
Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details
Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution
N
No Photocell
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
Part Night Switch Off
Body: Spun aluminium
PD
Part Night Dim
Canopy: Cast aluminium
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
Latch: Stainless steel
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
Materials U
Base frame: Cast aluminium
Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated
Example Code = SOR 140W 20 C U *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
40
10
20
21
81
26
27
DB 703
RAL 9007
RAL 9006
PAN 7621
RAL 7037
RAL 7016
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
RAL 9005
1m
31/35
D
RAL 9016
2m
10/10
C
Sorento
Ease of lamp replacement via quick release hinged glass
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33
5. Switching, Dimming & Control Sorento shown on special wall bracket
3m
Sorento shown on Tapered Aluminum 6m column
4m
5/35
Mounting: 76mm Ø
Light source: See product codes
RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey
B
Cable termination within product base
Gear, switching and control: Electronic gear only Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
4. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution A
Installation and Maintenance
Glazing: Flat toughened glass
3. Colour – for alternative colours see below 5m
Options Sorento For mounting at 4 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
77
DB
Dimensions mm This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
Weight Windage kg
A
B
C
1693
380
76
23
0.22m2
Sorento with special LED marker Westfield, Stratford City
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
78
Contemporary
Barosa
Contemporary
Product Codes Example 1. Model BAR
BAR
BAR
BAR
BAR
BAR
2. Optic Styles 350S
350 Spot 350A
350 Asymmetric 350F
350 Flood 400S
350F
400 Spot 400F
3. Light Source 070S
070S
150C
150C
150W CDM-T
250C
250W CDM-T
250C 070HD
70W HQI-TS
150HD
150W HQI-TS 100S
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/ StreetWise
150S
150S
150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/ StreetWise
250H
250H
250W HQI-T
400H
400W HQI-T
9m
8m
150C
IP65 | IK08 | CLASS II
Spot
Glazing: Flat toughened glass
• High-performance flood, spot or asymmetric lighting distributions • Choice of three bracket styles, multiple arm and single or dual bracket options
Asymmetric
• Ideally suited to amenity areas and car park lighting
Bracket options: Bracket Style 1 Bracket Style 2 Bracket Style 3
• All-aluminium construction
Body: High pressure die cast aluminium Luminaire fixing bracket: Steel
Glazing: Flat toughened glass Barosa Bracket Style 3 & Barosa Bracket Style 2 combination shown on 6m Tubular Steel column
Suggested column/ bracket options
Barosa Bracket and Column Combinations
Example
Arm Type – 1st Arm B1
Barosa Bracket Style 1
B2
Barosa Bracket Style 2
B3
Barosa Bracket Style 3 No second arm (1 arm only)
B1
Barosa Bracket Style 1
B2
Barosa Bracket Style 2
B3
Barosa Bracket Style 3
Bracket Style 2
Finish: Polyester powder coated B1
Brackets: Steel Bracket finish: Polyester powder coated
Arm Type – 2nd Arm 0
Seals: Silicone Rubber
Column clamps: High pressure die cast aluminium Column clamps finish: Polyester powder coated B3
Column Mounting Diameter 89
89mm Ø
102
102mm Ø
140
140mm Ø
102
Example Code = B1 B3 102 When ordering Barosa please ensure you order the correct number of luminaires for the arm configuration that you want to achieve
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
ØD
B
ØC
1m
Flood
Glazing retainer ring: High pressure die cast aluminium
Barosa Bracket Style 2 & Barosa Bracket Style 1 combination shown on 8m Tubular Steel column
2m
Light Distribution
Materials
6m
3m
Barosa 350 For mounting at 4 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 250W
Barosa
Colour: RAL 7004 Signal Grey
Example Code = BAR 350F 150C
4m
Supplied pre-cabled with flexible cable suitable for the column height
Light source: See product codes
7m
5m
Installation and Maintenance
Barosa 400 For mounting at 6 – 10 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 400W
Optical control: Spot Flood Asymmetric
400 Flood 70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/ StreetWise
Options
79
Dimensions mm
Bracket Style 1
Bracket Style 3
Weight kg
Windage
A
B
C
D
400
440
415
188
400
15
0.13m2
350
380
357
166
350
12
0.10m2
Chippenham Gardens, Brentwood
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
80
Contemporary
Rio
Contemporary
Options
Installation and Maintenance
Rio 500 For mounting at 8 – 12 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 250W
Easy maintenance via stainless steel quick release latch
S
Rio 450 For mounting at 6 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution
E
Mounting: Side entry [42mm Ø] Direct entry [76mm Ø]
Product Codes 500
450
Example
RI4
RI5
1. Model RI5
2. Mounting S
S
Side Entry
D
D
Direct Entry
3. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E
E
Electronic Gear: available for most light sources
M
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
Glazing: Flat toughened glass
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
100S
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
150S
150S
150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
4. Light Source
250S*
250W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
035C*
035C*
35W CDM-T
070C*
70W CDM-T
150C*
150W CDM-T
045W
45W CosmoPolis
060W
60W CosmoPolis
090W
90W CosmoPolis
L230
L230
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L245
L245
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
L330
L330
36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L345
L345
36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
150C* 10m
090W 140W
9m
Suggested column/ bracket options
A
A
5/35
B
B
10/10
C
C
31/35
D
D
5/25
L
L
LX1 Luminance Optic (selected lamps see opposite)
20
B
Colours: RAL 9016 White RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution LX1 Luminance Optic
Rio IP65 | IK07 | CLASS I
B 10/10
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options • Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions
C 31/35
• Flat glass option for zero upward light
D 5/25
• Coloured central spill light for enhanced decorative effect • NEW LX1 Luminance Optic available Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details
LX1 Luminance Optic
Distribution optimised for main road lighting See pages 34 – 35 for details The LX1 Luminance Optic is currently available with 90W/140W CosmoPolis & 100W/150W SON lamp types
Other: Blue spill light feature Green or white available on request
7. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS
Materials
N
N
No Photocell
Ring: Cast aluminium
C
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
PS
Part Night Switch Off
PD
PD
Part Night Dim
Access: Body coloured stainless steel latches
CH
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CM
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
Entry: Cast aluminium
CT
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
CZ
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
Canopy: Spun aluminium U
Spill light: Acrylic cover
Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated
Example Code = RI5 S E L330 20 B U *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
40
10
20
21
81
26
27
Dimensions mm
DB 703
RAL 9007
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
RAL 9006
1m
RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey
PAN 7621
2m
20
RAL 7037
3m
L330
6. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/LX1 Luminance Optic
RAL 7016
4m
140W CosmoPolis
20
RAL 9005
5m
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33
5. Colour – for alternative colours see below
RAL 9016
6m
Rio 450 shown on Tubular Steel 6m column with Gina column bracket
7m
Rio 500 shown on 10m Tapered Steel column with double arm Gina column bracket
8m
Light source: See product codes
A 5/35
81
DB
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
Weight kg
Windage
A
B
500
276
750
20
0.14m2
450
252
675
17
0.12m2
St. Martin’s Quarter, Worcester
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
82
Contemporary
Manhattan
Contemporary
Product Codes Example 1. Model MAN
MAN
2. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E
Electronic Gear: available for all light sources
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
E
3. Light Source
9m
8m
7m
050S
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
150S
150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
035C*
35W CDM-T
070C*
70W CDM-T
150C*
150W CDM-T
042P
42W PL-T
045W
45W CosmoPolis
060W
60W CosmoPolis
090W
90W CosmoPolis
140W
140W CosmoPolis
L130
12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L145
12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
81
Suggested column/ bracket options
5/35 10/10
C
31/35
D
5/25
Base has external connector block for ease of maintenance
Mounting: 76mm Ø Glazing: Clear polycarbonate glazing cone
Manhattan
Access via removable canopy
IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution
Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
A 5/35
Light source: See product codes
C 31/35
81
C
Colours: RAL 9016 White RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options
B 10/10
• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions • All aluminium construction in a sleek, architectural design
D 5/25
Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details Due to physical restrictions, with 100W SON-T+ or CDO-TT lamps, setting A is not available and setting C can achieve a maximum 25/25 reflector position
Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution
Materials Canopy/brim: Spun aluminium
6. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS
Base: Cast aluminium
N
No Photocell
Seals: Neoprene
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
Finish: Polyester powder coated
PS
Part Night Switch Off
PD
Part Night Dim
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
PD
Example Code = MAN E 090W 81 C PD *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
A
ØB
40
10
20
21
81
26
27
DB 703
RAL 9007
RAL 9006
PAN 7621
RAL 7037
RAL 7016
ØC RAL 9005
1m
PAN 7621 Metallic Silver
B
RAL 9016
2m
Manhattan shown on Tapered Aluminium 6m column
3m
Manhattan shown on Tubular Steel 6m column with double arm Elegance column bracket
5m
4m
090W
5. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution A
Installation and Maintenance
Manhattan For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33
4. Colour – for alternative colours see below
6m
Options
83
DB
Dimensions mm This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
Weight Windage kg
A
B
C
810
800
76
18
0.19m2
Chester Railway Station
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
84
Contemporary
Toronto
Contemporary
Product Codes Example 1. Model TOR
TOR
2. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E
Electronic Gear: available for all light sources
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
E
3. Light Source
9m
8m
7m
050S
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
150S
150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
035C*
35W CDM-T
070C*
70W CDM-T
150C*
150W CDM-T
042P
42W PL-T
045W
45W CosmoPolis
060W
60W CosmoPolis
090W
90W CosmoPolis
140W
140W CosmoPolis
L130
12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L145
12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
81
31/35
D
5/25
Suggested column/ bracket options
Glazing: Clear polycarbonate glazing cone
81
C
Colours: RAL 9016 White RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey
Access via removable canopy
IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options
B 10/10
• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions
C 31/35
• All aluminium construction in a sleek, architectural design
D 5/25
Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details Due to physical restrictions, with 100W SON-T+ or CDO-TT lamps, setting A is not available and setting C can achieve a maximum 25/25 reflector position
Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)
Materials
N
No Photocell
Canopy: Spun aluminium
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
Base: Cast aluminium
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
Seals: Neoprene
PS
Part Night Switch Off
PD
Part Night Dim
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
Finish: Polyester powder coated PD
Example Code = TOR E 140W 81 C PD *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
A
ØB
40
10
20
21
81
26
27
DB 703
RAL 9007
RAL 9006
PAN 7621
RAL 7037
ØC RAL 7016
1m
C
RAL 9005
2m
10/10
RAL 9016
3m
140W
6. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS Toronto shown on Tubular Steel 5m column
4m
Toronto shown on Tapered Aluminium 6m column
5m
5/35
Mounting: 76mm Ø
Toronto
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33
PAN 7621 Metallic Silver
B
Base has external connector block for ease of maintenance
Light source: See product codes
5. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution A
Installation and Maintenance
Toronto For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
4. Colour – for alternative colours see below
6m
Options
85
DB
Dimensions mm This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
A
B
C
810
360
76
Weight kg
Windage
18
0.18m2
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
86
Contemporary
Akord Cone & Akord Bullet
Contemporary
Product Codes Akord Cone A
Akord Cone B
Akord Cone C
Bullet
Example
ACB
ACC
ABU
ACB
S
S
S
S
Side Entry Easy-fit™
E
E
E
E
Top Entry Easy-fit™
3
3
3
1. Model ACA 2. Mounting E
30°Easy-fit™ 4
45°Easy-fit™
E
E
E
Electronic Gear: available for most light sources
M
M
M
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
E
4. Light Source 050S
050S
070S
070S
150S
150S*
150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
250S*
250S*
250W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
150S
400W SON-T+ 035C*
035C*
070C*
070C*
150C*
10m
9m
35W CDM-T 70W CDM-T 150W CDM-T
060W
042P
042P
42W PL-T
045W†
045W†
45W CosmoPolis
060W†
060W†
60W CosmoPolis
090W
090W
90W CosmoPolis
140W
140W
140W CosmoPolis
5. Colour – for alternative colours see below 81 7m
Suggested column/ bracket options
A
A
5/35
B
B
B
10/10
C
C
C
C
31/35
D
D
D
D
5/25
L
81
C
LX1 Luminance Optic (selected lamps – see opposite)
L
7. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS Akord Cone: All 250W+ models are fitted with high temperature (105°C) photocells as standard N
N
C
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
PS
Part Night Switch Off
PD
PD
Part Night Dim
CH
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CM
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
CT
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
CZ
CZ
N
N
CMS Zodion Vizion
Akord Cone & Akord Bullet
Top casting: Cast aluminium Entry: Corrosion protected steel
Akord Cone B For mounting at 6 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 250W
Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated
Akord Cone C & Akord Bullet For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 70W
Installation and Maintenance
IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I
Easy-fit™ entry connector for ease of installation and accurate luminaire alignment
Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options
See page 100 for details
Access for Cone A & B via quick release latch
• Flat glass for zero upward light • NEW LX1 Luminance Optic available
Access for Cone C & Bullet via quarter turn fasteners
• Choice of entries including unique 30º (Cone) and 45º (Bullet)
Diamond Optic®
Mounting: Easy-fit™ side entry, top entry & angled entry (30º – Cone; 45º – Bullet) Cone A & B: [48.3mm Ø] Cone C & Bullet: [42.4mm Ø]
A 5/35
B 10/10
C 31/35
D 5/25
Cone
Colours: Top casting: PAN 7621 Metallic Silver Canopy: RAL 9016 White RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey
See pages 28 – 31 for details
LX1 Luminance Optic
Optical control: Diamond Optic® LX1 Luminance Optic (Cone A & B) Other: A range of dedicated brackets are available for Akord Cone & Akord Bullet
Distribution optimised for main road lighting. See pages 34 – 35 for details The LX1 Luminance Optic is currently available with 90W/140W CosmoPolis & 100W/150W SON lamp types
See page 280
No Photocell
PD
Bullet
Cone
Example Code = ACB E E 150S 81 C PD *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control † Supplied with remote gear
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
40
10
20
21
81
26
27
DB 703
RAL 9007
RAL 9006
PAN 7621
Dimensions mm RAL 7037
1m
A
RAL 7016
2m
PAN 7621 Metallic Silver
B
RAL 9005
3m
81
A
RAL 9016
4m
Akord Bullet shown on Tubular Steel 5m column with CD column bracket
5m
81
6. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/LX1 Luminance Optic Akord Cone A shown on Tapered Steel 8m column with DA column bracket
6m
81
Canopy: Spun aluminium
Light source: See product codes
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise 100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
400S*
8m
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
100S
Materials
Akord Cone A For mounting at 8 – 12 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 400W
Glazing: Flat toughened glass
3. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E
Options
87
DB
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
Bullet
Weight kg
Windage
A
B
Cone A
600
675
25
0.21m2
Cone B
560
630
20
0.18m2
Cone C
385
420
8
0.09m2
Bullet
310
430
9
0.10m2
Orchard Theatre, Dartford
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Contemporary
Contemporary
Forza
Product Codes Example 1. Model FOR
FOR
2. Height 1
5m
2
7m
3
9m
2
R
Root
F
Flange
R
Installation and Maintenance
Forza 1 5.0m
Access to lamp via flat glass glazing
Forza 2 7.0m
Door for cable entry
Optical Distribution
060W
60W CosmoPolis
090W
90W CosmoPolis
140W
140W CosmoPolis
060W
5. Optional LED Path Light Y
LED Array
N
No Path Light
Y
6. Colour – for alternative colours see below DB 703 – Textured Metallic Dark Grey*
N
No Photocell
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
Forza
Mounting: With root or flange plate mounting
• Contemporary style light stack, with slim profile and integral optics
Gear, switching and control: Miniature photocell available Electronic control gear
• With performance micro road lighting optic • Optional secondary window for LED pathway lighting
Colours: RAL 9016 White RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey
DB
Optical control: Miniature dichroic glass optic
N
Materials:
7. Switching, Dimming and Control
89
IP66 | IK10 | CLASS I
Light source: See product codes
4. Light Source
DB
Options
Forza 3 9.0m
3. Mounting
Column: Galvanised steel Glazing: Flat glass
Example Code = FOR 2 R 060W Y DB N *For an alternative colour, replace DB with the two digit number of the colour you require
Finish: Two-pack acrylic wet spray-paint finish
9m
8m
7m ØB 6m
5m
A
C
4m
3m
40
10
20
21
81
26
Forza 3 27
Dimensions mm DB 703
RAL 9007
RAL 9006
PAN 7621
RAL 7037
RAL 7016
RAL 9005
Forza 1
1m
Forza 2
2m
RAL 9016
88
DB
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
Weight kg
A
B
C
1
5000
245
4500
135
2
7000
245
6400
190
3
9000
245
8500
245
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Classic
Timeless simplicity
Classic
Incorporating the Optima series
Understated design with minimal decorative detail
Stratum
Excel
Dover
92 – 93
94 – 95
96 – 97
Polar
Cradle
98 – 99
98 – 99
Technical Details (Optima Series) 100 – 101
Cradle Grants Quay, London
91
Crieff
Corvus
102 – 103
104 – 105
Contemporary with minimal decorative detail, our simply styled Classic range of luminaires incorporates our popular and established Optima series. Constructed from robust and durable materials, its understated and harmonious design, based around a precision die cast aluminium ring, is complementary to road or car park lighting, in residential, retail, leisure or business developments. Performance can be enhanced with stand-alone or centrally managed dimming and switching systems and the most up to date light sources, including LED, Philips CosmoPolis and GE StreetWise. Control options include our patented Diamond Optic® reflector and newly available LX1 Luminance Optic, for optimal main road lighting.
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Classic
Product Codes 500
450
Example
ST4
ST4
1. Model ST5
2. Mounting D
D
Direct Entry
S
S
Side Entry
E
Top Entry Easy-fit™
T
Top Entry Threaded
P
P
Polycarbonate Bowl
F
F
Flat Toughened Glass
D
3. Glazing F
4. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E
E
Electronic Gear: available for most light sources
M
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
E
5. Light Source 050S 070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
150S
150S
150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
250S
250W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
400S*
400W SON-T+ (gearbox mounted)
150C* 10m
045W
45W CosmoPolis 60W CosmoPolis 90W CosmoPolis
140W
140W
140W CosmoPolis
L230
L230
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L245
L245
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
L330
L330
36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L345
L345
36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
20
20
RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey
04
04
RAL 9005 Black ring with anodised canopy
L245
20
7. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/LX1 Luminance Optic
Suggested column/ bracket options
A
A
5/35
B
B
10/10
C
C
31/35
D
D
5/25
L
L
LX1 Luminance Optic (selected lamps – see opposite)
A
8. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS N
N
No Photocell
C
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
PS
Part Night Switch Off
PD
PD
Part Night Dim
CH
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CM
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
CT
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
CZ
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
Example Code = ST4 D F E L245 20 A U * These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
Ease of maintenance via quickrelease latches which retain glazing
400W supplied with external gearbox for details see page 100
Stratum 450 For mounting at 4 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W Mounting: Direct entry [76mm Ø] Side entry [42mm Ø] Easy-fit™ top entry [42.4mm Ø] Threaded top entry [1¼” BSP] Gearbox has side or direct entry (500 version)
IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I
See page 100 for details
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35
• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions • Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 32 – 33)
B 10/10
• Flat glass option for zero upward light • NEW LX1 Luminance Optic available C 31/35
D 5/25
Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details
Light source: See product codes
LX1 Luminance Optic
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 9005 Black ring with anodised canopy
Stratum
Top entry version available with Easy-fit™ connector for ease of installation and accurate luminaire alignment
Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33
6. Colour – for alternative colours see below
Distribution optimised for main road lighting See pages 34 – 35 for details The LX1 Luminance Optic is currently available with 90W/140W CosmoPolis & 100W/150W SON lamp types
Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution LX1 Luminance Optic Other: Obtrusive light shield(s) for bowl only Zebra crossing version available
U
See pages 298 – 301 for details
Materials Ring: Die cast aluminium Canopy: Spun aluminium Direct/Side Entry: Die cast aluminium
ØB
Top Entry: Corrosion protected steel Access: Body coloured stainless steel latches Seals: Silicone rubber
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
Finish: Polyester powder coated Dimensions mm ØB Stratum A B
10
20
21
81
27
30
RAL 6005
1m
57W PL-T
RAL 5003
2m
42W PL-T
057P*
RAL 9007
3m
150W CDM-T
042P
PAN 7621
4m
150C*
060W
RAL 7037
5m
70W CDM-T
090W
RAL 7016
6m
35W CDM-T
070C*
090W
RAL 9005
7m
Stratum 450 shown on Tubular Steel 5m column
8m
Stratum 500 gearbox version shown on Tubular Steel 10m column with Linear column bracket
9m
035C*
Installation and Maintenance
Stratum 500 For mounting at 8 – 12 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 400W
Glazing: Flat toughened glass Polycarbonate bowl Acrylic bowl
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
100S
Options
93
A
Stratum
Classic
50
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
Weight kg
Flat glass
Windage
500
320
550
14.6
0.13m2
500•
215
550
16.1
0.10m2
450
285
500
13.2
0.11m2
450•
202
500
13.7
0.09m2
A
92
•with flat glass For further dimensional information see page 100
Elmer Approach, Southend
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Classic
Classic
Product Codes 500
450
Example
EX4
EX5
1. Model EX5
2. Mounting D
D
Direct Entry
S
S
Side Entry
E
E
Top Entry Easy-fit™
T
T
Top Entry Threaded
P
P
Polycarbonate Bowl
F
F
Flat Toughened Glass
D
3. Glazing F
4. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E
E
Electronic Gear: available for most light sources
M
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
E
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
100S
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
150S
150S
150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
250S
250W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
400S*
400W SON-T+ (gearbox mounted) 035C*
150C*
10m
9m
8m
42W PL-T
057P*
57W PL-T
045W
45W CosmoPolis
060W
60W CosmoPolis 90W CosmoPolis
140W
140W
140W CosmoPolis
L230
L230
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L245
L245
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
L330
L330
36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L345
L345
36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey
04
04
RAL 9005 Black ring with anodised canopy
A
A
5/35
B
B
10/10
C
C
31/35
D
D
5/25
L
L
LX1 Luminance Optic (selected lamps – see opposite)
Ease of maintenance via quickrelease latches which retain glazing
400W supplied with external gearbox for details see page 100
Excel 450 For mounting at 4 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W Mounting: Direct entry [76mm Ø] Side entry [42mm Ø] Easy-fit™ top entry [42.4mm Ø] Threaded top entry [1¼” BSP] Gearbox has side or direct entry (500 version)
L345 20
A
IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I
See page 100 for details
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35
• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions • Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 32– 33)
B 10/10
• Flat glass option for zero upward light • NEW LX1 Luminance Optic available C 31/35
D 5/25
Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details
Light source: See product codes
LX1 Luminance Optic
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 9005 Black ring with anodised canopy
Excel
Top entry versions available with Easy-fit™ connector for ease of installation and accurate luminaire alignment
Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33
7. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/LX1 Luminance Optic
Distribution optimised for main road lighting See pages 34 – 35 for details The LX1 Luminance Optic is currently available with 90W/140W CosmoPolis & 100W/150W SON lamp types
Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution LX1 Luminance Optic Other: Obtrusive light shield(s) for bowl only Zebra crossing version available
See pages 298 – 301 for details
8. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS N
N
No Photocell
C
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
Materials Ring: Die cast aluminium
U
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
PS
Part Night Switch Off
PD
PD
Part Night Dim
Direct/Side Entry: Die cast aluminium
CH
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
Top Entry: Corrosion protected steel
CM
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
CT
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
Access: Body coloured stainless steel latches
CZ
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
Seals: Silicone rubber
Example Code = EX5 D F E L345 20 A U
U
Canopy: Spun aluminium
ØB
Finish: Polyester powder coated
Flat glass
* These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
Dimensions ØB mm
10
20
21
81
27
30
RAL 6005
RAL 5003
Excel RAL 9007
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
20
PAN 7621
Suggested column/ bracket options
20
RAL 7037
1m
042P
090W
RAL 7016
2m
70W CDM-T 150W CDM-T
090W
RAL 9005
3m
Excel 450 shown on Magna 6m column with Genus column bracket
4m
Excel 500 shown on Tubular Steel 8m column with Maya column bracket
5m
070C*
6. Colour – for alternative colours see below
7m
6m
35W CDM-T
150C*
Installation and Maintenance
Excel 500 For mounting at 8 – 12 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 400W
Glazing: Flat toughened glass Polycarbonate bowl Acrylic bowl
5. Light Source 050S
Options
A
Excel
95
50
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
A
Weight kg
Windage
B
500
388
550
14.6
0.16m2
500•
265
550
16.1
0.11m2
450
354
500
13.2
0.14m2
450•
235
500
13.7
0.10m2
A
94
•with flat glass For further dimensional information see page 100
Christchurch, New Zealand
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Classic
Classic
Product Codes 500
450
Example
DO4
DO5
1. Model DO5
2. Mounting D
D
Direct Entry
S
S
Side Entry
E
Top Entry Easy-fit™
T
Top Entry Threaded
P
P
Polycarbonate Bowl
F
F
Flat Toughened Glass
E
Electronic Gear: available for most light sources
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only 50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
100S
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
150S
150S
150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
250S
F E
Glazing: Flat toughened glass Polycarbonate bowl Acrylic bowl
400W SON-T+ (gearbox mounted) 035C*
150C*
10m
9m
8m
42W PL-T
057P*
57W PL-T
045W
45W CosmoPolis 60W CosmoPolis
090W
90W CosmoPolis
140W
140W
140W CosmoPolis
L230
L230
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L245
L245
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
L330
L330
36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L345
L345
36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
27
27
RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey
04
04
RAL 9005 Black ring with anodised canopy 5/35
B
10/10
C
C
31/35
D
D
5/25
L
L
LX1 Luminance Optic (selected lamps – see opposite)
Light source: See product codes
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33
L330
27
C
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 9005 Black ring with anodised canopy
Dover
Top entry version available with Easy-fit™ connector for ease of installation and accurate luminaire alignment
IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I
See page 100 for details
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35
• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions • Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 32 – 33)
B 10/10
• Flat glass option for zero upward light • NEW LX1 Luminance Optic available C 31/35
D 5/25
Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details
LX1 Luminance Optic
Distribution optimised for main road lighting See pages 34 – 35 for details The LX1 Luminance Optic is currently available with 90W/140W CosmoPolis & 100W/150W SON lamp types
Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution LX1 Luminance Optic Other: Obtrusive light shield(s) for bowl only Zebra crossing version available
See pages 298 – 301 for details
8. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS N
N
No Photocell
C
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
Materials Ring: Die cast aluminium
U
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
PS
Part Night Switch Off
PD
PD
Part Night Dim
Direct/Side Entry: Die cast aluminium
CH
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
Top Entry: Corrosion protected steel
CM
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
CT
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
Access: Body coloured stainless steel latches
CZ
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
Seals: Silicone rubber
Example Code = DO5 S F E L330 27 C U
U
Canopy: Spun aluminium ØB
Finish: Polyester powder coated
With bowl
* These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
Dimensions mm
10
20
21
81
27
30
RAL 6005
RAL 5003
Dover RAL 9007
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
A
B
PAN 7621
Suggested column/ bracket options
A
RAL 7037
1m
042P
060W
RAL 7016
2m
70W CDM-T 150W CDM-T
090W
RAL 9005
3m
070C* 150C*
7. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/LX1 Luminance Optic
Dover 450 shown on Tapered Steel 6m column with double arm Linear column bracket and optional Spike finial
4m
Dover 500 shown on Tubular Steel 8m column with Linear column bracket
5m
35W CDM-T
6. Colour – for alternative colours see below
7m
6m
Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
250W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
400S*
400W supplied with external gearbox for details see page 100
Mounting: Direct entry [76mm Ø] Side entry [42mm Ø] Easy-fit™ top entry [42.4mm Ø] (450 version) Threaded top entry [1¼” BSP] (450 version)
5. Light Source 050S
Ease of maintenance via quickrelease latches which retain glazing
Dover 450 For mounting at 4 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
4. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E
Installation and Maintenance
S
3. Glazing
M
Options Dover 500 For mounting at 8 – 10 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 400W
A
Dover
97
50
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
A
Weight kg
Windage
BØB
500
354
760
16.2
0.17m2
500•
245
760
17.1
0.13m2
A
96
450
318
690
14.7
0.13m2
450•
229
690
15.2
0.10m2
•with flat glass For further dimensional information see page 100
Edge Lane, Liverpool
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Classic
Classic
Product Codes Polar 500
Polar 450
Cradle 450
Example
PO4
CR4
PO4
1. Model PO5
2. Mounting D
D
Direct Entry
S
S
Side Entry
E
E
Top Entry Easy-fit™
T
T
Top Entry Threaded
S
3. Glazing P
P
P
Polycarbonate Bowl
F
F
F
Flat Toughened Glass
4. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources Electronic Gear: E E E available for most light sources M M M Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
F E
5. Light Source 050S
050S
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
100S
100S
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
150S
150S
150S
150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
250S 035C*
35W CDM-T
070C*
070C*
70W CDM-T
150C*
150C*
150W CDM-T
042P
042P
42W PL-T
057P*
057P*
57W PL-T
045W
045W
45W CosmoPolis
060W
060W
60W CosmoPolis
090W
090W
090W
90W CosmoPolis
140W
140W
140W
150C*
140W CosmoPolis 24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – L230 L230 L230 Warm White 3000K 24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – L245 L245 L245 Neutral White 4500K 36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – L330 L330 L330 Warm White 3000K 36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – L345 L345 L345 Neutral White 4500K 6. Colour – for alternative colours see below
8m
04
04
RAL 9005 Black ring with anodised canopy
A
5/35
B
B
10/10
C
C
C
31/35
D
D
D
Mounting: Polar Direct entry [76mm Ø] Side entry [42mm Ø] Easy-fit™ top entry [42.4mm Ø] Threaded top entry [1¼” BSP] Gearbox has side or direct entry (500 version)
L345 20
A
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 9005 Black ring with anodised canopy
Other: Obtrusive light shield(s) for bowl only Zebra crossing version available (Polar) See pages 298 – 301 for details
N
N
No Photocell
C
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
U
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
PS
PS
Part Night Switch Off
Ring: Die cast aluminium
PD
PD
PD
Part Night Dim
Canopy: Spun aluminium
CH
CH
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CM
CM
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
CT
CT
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
Direct/Side Entry (Polar): Die cast aluminium
CZ
CZ
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
10
20
21
81
27
30
50
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options
B 10/10
• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions C 31/35
• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 32 – 33)
D 5/25
• Flat glass option for zero upward light • NEW LX1 Luminance Optic available (Polar) Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details
LX1 Luminance Optic
Polar
U
Distribution optimised for main road lighting See pages 34 –35 for details The LX1 Luminance Optic is currently available with 90W/140W CosmoPolis & 100W/150W SON lamp types
Cradle
Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution LX1 Luminance Optic (Polar)
C
* These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
See page 100 for details
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33
N
Example Code = PO4 S F E L345 20 A U
Top entry versions available with Easy-fit™ connector for ease of installation and accurate luminaire alignment
Light source: See product codes
5/25 LX1 Luminance Optic L L (selected lamps – see opposite) 8. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS
RAL 6005
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
A
B
RAL 5003
Suggested column/ bracket options
A
RAL 9007
1m
04
PAN 7621
2m
RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey
RAL 7037
3m
20
RAL 7016
4m
20
RAL 9005
5m
20
Polar 450 & Cradle 450 For mounting at 4 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
7. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/LX1 Luminance Optic Cradle 450 (Flat glass option) shown on Tubular Steel 6m column with double arm Genus column bracket
6m
Polar 500 shown on Cardiff 8m column with Genus column bracket
7m
400W supplied with external gearbox for details see page 100
Polar & Cradle
ØB
ØB
Materials
A
9m
Ease of maintenance via quickrelease latches which retain glazing
Glazing: Flat toughened glass Polycarbonate bowl Acrylic bowl
400W SON-T+ (gearbox mounted) 035C*
Installation and Maintenance
Polar 500 For mounting at 8 – 12 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 400W
Cradle 76mm Ø
250W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
400S*
Options
99
A
Polar & Cradle
ØB
ØC
Top Entry (Polar): Corrosion protected steel
Dimensions mm
Weight Windage kg
A
98
Entry (Cradle): Metal sprayed steel
A
B
C
Access: Body coloured stainless steel latches
Polar 500
500 550
14.6
0.21m2
Polar 500•
305 550
16.1
0.14m2
Seals: Silicone rubber
Polar 450
450 500
13.2
0.17m2
Finish: Polyester powder coated
Polar 450*
280 500
13.7
0.12m2
Cradle 450
590 590 76
18.0
0.20m2
Cradle 450• 590 590 76
18.9
0.15m2
•with flat glass For further dimensional information see page 100
Polar with bowl
Grants Quay, London
Cradle with flat glass
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
100 Classic
Classic 101
Technical Details
Entry Types These four entry types apply to Stratum, Excel, Dover and Polar. Cradle and Crieff are available as post-mounted products only and Corvus has top entry options.
Optima Series
Direct Entry For luminaires to be fitted directly to columns. B A
A (Dover)
B
450
643
738
336
500
693
798
355
Direct Entry
IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I
B
A
A
B
Side Entry
B
For use with columns and wall brackets.
Dover B A
A (Dover)
B
450
620
715
377
500
670
775
395
Side Entry
A
AB
A
B
B
Direct/Side Entry 400W Gearbox For housing 250W electronic gear or 400W magnetic gear (Dover, Stratum, Excel and Polar). Available as side entry or direct entry.
Direct/Side Entry 400W Gearbox
A
A
A
B
925
650
Stratum
Excel
Polar
Cradle
B
A 500
A
Top Entry For suspension from pendant brackets, canopies and ceilings. Two versions are offered; the Easy-fit™ for ease of installation and luminaire alignment, and the standard BSP threaded.
Easy-fit™ The Easy-fit™entry, which is our own design, both simplifies luminaire alignment and eliminates the problem of twisted cabling associated with threaded entries. This is compatible with most of our wall and column brackets.
Threaded The threaded entry is the conventional method of mounting the luminaire and is compatible with most new and existing bracket types.
Ropetackle, Shoreham-by-Sea
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
102 Classic
Classic 103
Crieff
Product Codes Example 1. Model CRF
Polycarbonate Bowl
Electronic Gear: available for all light sources
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
P
Glazing: Polycarbonate bowl
E
4. Light Source
9m
8m
050S
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
150S
150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
035C*
35W CDM-T
070C*
70W CDM-T
150C*
150W CDM-T
042P
42W PL-T
057P*
57W PL-T
045W
45W CosmoPolis
060W
60W CosmoPolis
090W
90W CosmoPolis
L230
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L245
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
27
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green
5m
27
A
5/35
Canopy: Spun aluminium
B
10/10
C
31/35
D
5/25
Suggested column/ bracket options
B 10/10
• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions • Easy Installation and Maintenance
C 31/35
D 5/25
Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details
Entry: Galvanised steel C
Access: Body coloured stainless steel latches Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated
No Photocell
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
Part Night Switch Off
PD
Part Night Dim
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
C
Example Code = CRF P E 090W 27 C C
ØB
* These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
20
81
27
30
RAL 6005
RAL 5003
RAL 9007
PAN 7621
RAL 7037 21
ØC
50
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
ØB Dimensions mm
ØB Weight Windage kg
A
B
C
690
700
76
16.3
A
10
RAL 7016
A
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
RAL 9005
1m
Crieff shown on Tapered Aluminium 5m column
2m
Crieff shown on Tubular Steel 6m column with double arm Roco column bracket
3m
A 5/35
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options
Materials Ring: Die cast aluminium
N
IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution
Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution
6. Diamond Optic Setting/LED Array Distribution
7. Switching, Dimming & Control 4m
Ease of maintenance via quickrelease latches
Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)
®
6m
Crieff
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33
090W
RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey
Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS) Light source: See product codes
5. Colour – for alternative colours see below 7m
Base has external connector block for ease of installation
Mounting: 76mm Ø
3. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E
Installation and Maintenance
Crieff For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
CRF
2. Glazing P
Options
0.23m2
Lyng Lang Homezone, Birmingham
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
104 Classic
Classic 105
Product Codes B
Example
COB
COA
1. Model COA
2. Mounting E
E
Top Entry Easy-fit™
T
T
Top Entry Threaded
P
P
Polycarbonate Bowl
F
F
Flat Toughened Glass
E
F
4. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E
Electronic Gear: available for all light sources
M
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
E
050S
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
100S
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
035C*
35W CDM-T
070C*
70W CDM-T
150S
150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
070C* 150C*
10m
60W CosmoPolis
090W
090W
90W CosmoPolis
L230
L230
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L245
L245
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green
140W CosmoPolis
L330
36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L345
36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
81
L330
81
PAN 7621 Metallic Silver
81
7. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/LX1 Luminance Optic
Suggested column/ bracket options
Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution LX1 Luminance Optic Other: Obtrusive light shield(s) for bowl only
A
A
5/35
B
B
10/10
C
C
31/35
D
D
5/25
Canopy: Spun aluminium
L
L
LX1 Luminance Optic (selected lamps – see opposite)
Top entry versions available with Easy-fit™ connector for ease of installation and accurate luminaire alignment
IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I
See page 100 for details
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35
B 10/10
C 31/35
D 5/25
• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions • Flat glass option for zero upward light • NEW LX1 Luminance Optic available
Entry: Corrosion protected steel
Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details
LX1 Luminance Optic
Distribution optimised for main road lighting See pages 34 – 35 for details The LX1 Luminance Optic is currently available with 90W/140W CosmoPolis & 100W/150W SON lamp types
Materials C
8. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS N
N
No Photocell
C
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
PS
Part Night Switch Off
PD
PD
Part Night Dim
CH
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CM
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
CT
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
CZ
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
Ring: Die cast aluminium
Access: Body coloured stainless steel latches Seals: Silicone rubber
U
Finish: Polyester powder coated ØB
ØB
Example Code = COA E F E L330 81 C U * These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
Dimensions mm
10
20
21
81
27
30
A A•
RAL 6005
RAL 5003
RAL 9007
Corvus PAN 7621
1m
45W CosmoPolis
060W
RAL 7037
2m
045W 060W
RAL 7016
3m
57W PL-T
RAL 9005
4m
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33
6. Colour – for alternative colours see below
Corvus B (Flat glass option) shown on Amax 6m column with Arc column bracket
5m
Corvus A shown on Tubular Steel 8m column with Inverted Genus column bracket
8m
6m
42W PL-T
057P*
140W
9m
7m
042P
057P*
Glazing: Flat toughened glass Polycarbonate bowl Acrylic bowl
Corvus
Light source: See product codes
150W CDM-T
042P
Corvus B For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 100W
Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
5. Light Source 070S
Ease of maintenance via quickrelease latches
Mounting: Easy-fit™ entry [42.4mm Ø] Threaded entry [1¼” BSP]
3. Glazing
E
Installation and Maintenance
Corvus A For mounting at 6 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
A
A
Options
A
Corvus
50
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
Weight kg
A
B
870
681
17.3
0.24m2
686
681
17.8
0.18m2
B
710
612
13.3
0.17m2
B•
636
612
13.9
0.15m2
•with flat glass
Bowl version
Windage
Ravenswood, Ipswich
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Traditional 107
Traditional Attention to detail
Crafted from copper or aluminium to ensure longevity
LED Light Engine
Windsor
Lancaster
Knightsbridge
Westminster
110 – 111
112 – 113
114 – 115
116 – 117
108 – 109
Period styling is at the heart of this range of luminaires, spanning from traditional heritage lanterns with authentic detailing and ornate brackets to luminaires from more recent times. Crafted from copper or aluminium to ensure longevity and with a selection of harmonious columns and brackets (see page 256), the Traditional range is complementary to a wide range of building styles and environments and thus a popular choice for residential developments and town centres.
Pall Mall
Portland
Berkeley
Strand
Ely
116 – 117
118 – 119
118 – 119
120 – 123
124 – 127
Strand/Ely Technical
Iffley
Hatfield
York
Warwick
130 – 131
132 – 133
134 – 135
134 – 135
Salisbury
Newport
Braemar
Waterford
Henley
136 – 137
136 – 137
138 – 139
138 – 139
140 – 141
Specified for their performance or simply for their timeless design, this collection now benefits from up-to-date technologies, including LED, with energysaving options available through central management system compatibility and our high performance Diamond Optic® or LX1 Luminance Optic.
128 – 129
Ely Ingress Park, Dartford
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
108 Traditional
LED Light Engine
Traditional 109
Whether your driver for specifying LED is energy savings, reducing maintenance costs or simply a desire to employ the very latest technology, your product design choice may, up until now, have been restricted to contemporary style luminaires.
Traditional lanterns
Designed to fit effortlessly within the majority of our exterior lighting luminaires including the Traditional range shown in the following pages, the LED Light Engine is available in new luminaires or as a retrofit option for installation in DW Windsor products up to ten years of age.
Available new only
For full technical details on LED Light Engine, please refer to pages 32 – 33.
Available for new or retrofit Windsor, Strand, Ely, Iffley
Lancaster, Knightsbridge, Pall Mall, Westminster, Hatfield, York, Warwick, Newport, Salisbury, Waterford, Braemar, Henley
LED Light Engine
Other lanterns Available for new or retrofit Rio, Stratum, Excel, Dover, Polar, Cradle, Crieff, Corvus, DW400 Available new only Milano LED, Evora LED
Key advantages • LED Light Engine gives you the option to specify LED as a light source • Now available for Traditional lanterns • Available as retrofit LED solution for existing DW Windsor schemes • Available in brand new products (see opposite for ranges) • Significant energy savings and reduced maintenance costs • Equivalent distribution to Diamond Optic® A, B, C & D • Multi-layer LED Light Engine
Ponsonby Place, London
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
110 Traditional
Windsor
Traditional 111
Product Codes Street
Avenue
Example
WIA
WIS
1. Model WIS
2. Mounting F
F
Frog
C
F
Cast Base
3. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E
E
Electronic Gear: available for most light sources
M
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
E
050S
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
150S
150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
035C*
035C*
35W CDM-T
070C*
070C*
70W CDM-T
150C*
9m
8m
7m
042P
42W PL-T
057P*
057P*
57W PL-T
045W
45W CosmoPolis
060W
60W CosmoPolis
090W
90W CosmoPolis L230
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L245
L245
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K RAL 9005 Black
Suggested column/ bracket options
A
A
5/35
B
B
10/10
C
C
31/35
D
D
5/25
10 A
Mounting: Traditional frog (standard) Cast base (Windsor Street only) [76mm Ø]
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35
Windsor IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I • Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options • Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions
B 10/10
• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109) • Corrosion resistant, copper construction
C 31/35
D 5/25
Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red Natural Copper Finish
NB Natural copper finish will rapidly weather usually giving a rich patina finish
Polished and Lacquered Copper Finish
7. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS N
N
No Photocell
C
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
PS
Part Night Switch Off
PD
PD
Part Night Dim
CH
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CM
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
CT
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
CZ
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)
U
Materials Body: Copper Standard frog: Metal sprayed steel Cast base: Cast aluminium Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated or copper
Example Code = WIS F E L230 10 A U
B
*These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
10
20
21
30
50
70
02
ØC
Polished & lacquered copper
Natural copper
RAL 3005
RAL 6005
RAL 5003
RAL 7037
RAL 7016
D
A
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
RAL 9005
1m
Windsor Avenue shown on Ornate Cast wall box bracket
2m
Windsor Street shown on Oxford 4m column
3m
L230
6. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution
5m
4m
10
Tool-less maintenance via hinged, sealed canopy with retaining stay and slide latches
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109
L230
10
Windsor Avenue For mounting at 2.5 – 5 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 70W
Light source: See product codes
5. Colour – for alternative colours see below
6m
Frog and cast base have external connector blocks for ease of installation
Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
150W CDM-T
042P
Installation and Maintenance
Windsor Street For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
Glazing: Polycarbonate one piece bowl Acrylic one piece bowl (on request) Toughened flat glass (on request)
4. Light Source 050S
Options
03
Dimensions mm Windsor This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
A
B
Weight kg C
D
Street
833 440
76
188 10.3
0.28m2
Avenue
745
76
119 8.3
0.22m2
390
Optional cast base
Windage
Windsor LED St Paul’s Churchyard, London
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
112 Traditional
Lancaster
Traditional 113
Product Codes Example 1. Model LAS
LAS
2. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E
Electronic Gear: available for most light sources
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
E
3. Light Source
9m
8m
7m
050S
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/SteetWise
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
150S
150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
035C*
35W CDM-T
070C*
70W CDM-T
150C*
150W CDM-T
042P
42W PL-T
057P*
57W PL-T
045W
45W CosmoPolis
060W
60W CosmoPolis
090W
90W CosmoPolis
L230
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L245
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
L245 10
Suggested column/ bracket options
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red Natural Copper Finish
NB Natural copper finish will rapidly weather usually giving a rich patina finish
A
5/35
Polished and Lacquered Copper Finish
B
10/10
C
31/35
D
5/25
C
Tool-less maintenance via hinged, sealed canopy with retaining stay and slide latches
IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options • Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions
B 10/10
• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109) • Corrosion resistant, copper construction C 31/35
D 5/25
Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)
No Photocell
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
Part Night Switch Off
Body: Copper
PD
Part Night Dim
Spigot plate: Metal sprayed steel
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
Seals: Silicone rubber
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
Finish: Polyester powder coated or copper
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
U
Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details
Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution
N
Materials
Example Code = LAS E L245 10 C U *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
10
20
21
30
50
70
02
Polished & lacquered copper
Natural copper
RAL 3005
RAL 6005
RAL 5003
A
B
RAL 7037
1m
Glazing: Polycarbonate one piece bowl (standard) Acrylic one piece bowl
Lancaster
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109
RAL 9005 Black
RAL 7016
2m
Mounting: Steel spigot plate [76mm Ø]
5. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution
RAL 9005
3m
Spigot has external connector block for ease of installation
Light source: See product codes
6. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS Lancaster shown on Plain Cast wall bracket
4m
Lancaster shown on Newcastle 5m column with optional ladder bars
5m
Installation and Maintenance
Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
4. Colour – for alternative colours see below 10
6m
Options Lancaster For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
03
ØC Dimensions mm This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
A
B
C
725
410
76
Weight kg
Windage
12.5
0.22m2
Hertford County Hospital
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
114 Traditional
Knightsbridge
Traditional 115
Product Codes Street
Avenue
Example
KNA
KNS
1. Model KNS
2. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E
E
Electronic Gear: available for most light sources
M
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
E
050S
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
100S
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
150S 035C*
35W CDM-T
070C*
070C*
70W CDM-T
042P
42W PL-T
150C*
9m
8m
7m
057P*
57W PL-T
045W
45W CosmoPolis
060W
60W CosmoPolis
090W
90W CosmoPolis
L230
L230
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L245
L245
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
10
RAL 9005 Black
Suggested column/ bracket options
A
A
5/35
B
B
10/10
C
C
31/35
D
10
D
5/25
A
Tool-less maintenance via hinged, sealed canopy with retaining stay and slide latches
IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I
A 5/35
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red Natural Copper Finish
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options • Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions
B 10/10
• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109) • Corrosion resistant, copper construction C 31/35
D 5/25
Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details For Knightsbridge Avenue only: Due to physical restrictions, with 100W SON-T+ or CDO-TT lamps, setting A is not available and setting C can achieve a maximum 25/25 reflector position
NB Natural copper finish will rapidly weather usually giving a rich patina finish
Polished and Lacquered Copper Finish
6. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS
Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution
N
N
No Photocell
C
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
PS
Part Night Switch Off
PD
PD
Part Night Dim
CH
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CM
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
Body: Copper
CT
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
Frog: Metal sprayed steel
CZ
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
Seals: Silicone rubber
N
Example Code = KNS E 090W 10 A N *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)
Materials
Finish: Polyester powder coated or copper
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
10
20
21
30
50
70
02
ØC
Polished & lacquered copper
Natural copper
RAL 3005
RAL 6005
RAL 5003
RAL 7037
RAL 7016
D
A
AC. B
RAL 9005
1m
Knightsbridge Street shown on Ornate Cast wall bracket
2m
Knightsbridge Street shown on Oxford 5m column
3m
10
5. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution
5m
4m
090W
Knightsbridge
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution
Light source: See product codes
4. Colour – for alternative colours see below
6m
Knightsbridge Avenue For mounting at 2.5 – 5 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 100W
Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
150W CDM-T
042P
Frog has external connector block for ease of installation
Glazing: Polycarbonate one piece bowl (standard) Acrylic one piece bowl
150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
035C*
Installation and Maintenance
Knightsbridge Street For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
Mounting: Traditional frog [76mm Ø]
3. Light Source 050S
Options
03
Dimensions mm Knightsbridge This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
Weight Windage kg
A
B
C
Street
890
610
76
105 12.5
D 0.32m2
Avenue
741
510
76
110
0.28m2
10.5
Oamaru, New Zealand
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
116 Traditional
Product Codes Westminster
Pall Mall
Example
PAL
PAL
1. Model WES
2. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E
E
Electronic Gear: available for all light sources
M
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
050S
050S
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
100S
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
035C*
035C*
35W CDM-T
070C*
070C*
70W CDM-T
042P
042P
42W PL-T
045W
045W
45W CosmoPolis
060W
060W
60W CosmoPolis
090W
090W
90W CosmoPolis
L230
L230
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L245
L245
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
M
3. Light Source
9m
8m
7m
10
10
A
A
5/35
B
B
10/10
C
C
31/35
D
D
5/25
A
Suggested column/ bracket options
Westminster & Pall Mall
Access is via the removable canopy
Mounting: Traditional frog [76mm Ø]
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution
Glazing: Polycarbonate one piece glazing cone (standard) Acrylic one piece glazing cone
A 5/35
Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
B 10/10
C 31/35
IP65 | IK07 | CLASS I • Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options
D 5/25
• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions • Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109) • Corrosion resistant, copper construction
Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red Natural Copper Finish
Due to physical restrictions, with 100W SON-T+ or CDO-TT lamps, setting A is not available and setting C can achieve a maximum 25/25 reflector position
NB Natural copper finish will rapidly weather usually giving a rich patina finish
Polished and Lacquered Copper Finish
6. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS Pall Mall shown on Norwich 4m column
N
N
No Photocell
C
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
PS
Part Night Switch Off
PD
PD
Part Night Dim
CH
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CM
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
CT
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
CZ
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
C
Example Code = PAL M 070S 10 A C *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution
Westminster
Pall Mall
Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)
Materials Body: Copper Coronet (Westminster): Aluminium (painted) Frog: Metal sprayed steel Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated or copper
Westminster
Pall Mall
ØB
ØB
10
20
21
30
50
70
02
Polished & lacquered copper
Natural copper
RAL 3005
RAL 6005
RAL 5003
RAL 7037
RAL 7016
D
A
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
RAL 9005
1m
Westminster shown on Cambridge 5m column
2m
RAL 9005 Black
Frog has external connector block for ease of installation
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109
5. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution
5m
3m
10
Installation and Maintenance
Westminster & Pall Mall For mounting at 4 – 5 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 100W
Light source: See product codes
4. Colour – for alternative colours see below
6m
4m
070S
Options
A
Westminster & Pall Mall
Traditional 117
03
ØC
Ø Dimensions mm A This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
B
Weight kg C
Windage
D
Westminster
787 420
76
115 10.5
0.20m2
Pall Mall
787
76
115 10.2
0.20m2
397
Copper – polished & lacquered
Westminster Shepherds Market, London
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
118 Traditional
Portland & Berkeley
Traditional 119
Product Codes Portland
Berkeley
Example
BER
BER
1. Model POR 2. Mounting E
E
Top Entry Easy-fit™
T
T
Top Entry Threaded
T
3. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E
E
Electronic Gear: available for all light sources
M
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
M
4. Light Source
9m
8m
7m
050S
050S
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
100S
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
035C*
035C*
35W CDM-T
070C*
070C*
70W CDM-T
042P
042P
42W PL-T
045W
045W
45W CosmoPolis
060W
060W
60W CosmoPolis
090W
090W
90W CosmoPolis
10
Suggested column/ bracket options
A
5/35
B
10/10
C
C
31/35
D
D
5/25
10 A
Available with Easy-fit™ entry connector for ease of installation and accurate lantern alignment
Mounting: Easy-fit™ entry [42.4mm Ø] Threaded entry [1” BSP] (standard)
See pages 128 – 129 for details
Glazing: Polycarbonate one piece glazing bowl (standard) Acrylic one piece glazing bowl
Portland & Berkeley
Tool-less maintenance via stainless steel quick release latches
Diamond Optic® A 5/35
Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
IP65 | IK07 | CLASS I
B 10/10
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options • Corrosion resistant, copper construction C 31/35
D 5/25
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red Natural Copper Finish
Due to physical restrictions, with 100W SON-T+ or CDO-TT lamps, setting A is not available and setting C can achieve a maximum 25/25 reflector position See pages 28 – 31 for details
NB Natural copper finish will rapidly weather usually giving a rich patina finish
Polished and Lacquered Copper Finish
7. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS N
N
No Photocell
C
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
PS
Part Night Switch Off
PD
PD
Part Night Dim
CH
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CM
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
CT
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
CZ
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
PS
Example Code = BER T M 100S 10 A PS
Optical control: Diamond Optic® Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)
Berkeley
Materials Body: Copper Coronet (Berkeley): Aluminium (painted) Entry: Corrosion protected steel Access: Body coloured, stainless steel latches Seals: Silicone rubber
*These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
Finish: Polyester powder coated or copper
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
Portland
Berkeley
ØB
ØB
10
20
21
30
50
70
02
03
A
Copper – polished and lacquered option
Polished & lacquered copper
Natural copper
RAL 3005
RAL 6005
RAL 5003
RAL 7037
A
Portland
RAL 7016
1m
A B
RAL 9005
2m
Berkeley shown on Chester 5m column with double arm Cast Ornate column bracket
3m
RAL 9005 Black
6. Diamond Optic® Setting Portland shown on Cardiff 6m column with Hoop column bracket
4m
10
Installation and Maintenance
Portland & Berkeley For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 100W
Light source: See product codes
5. Colour – for alternative colours see below
6m
5m
100S
Options
Dimensions mm This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
Weight kg
Windage
A
B
Portland
600
397
7.6
0.17m2
Berkeley
600
428
7.9
0.17m2
Portland New Broad Street, London
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
120 Traditional
Strand A & A Plus
Traditional 121
Product Codes A
A Plus
Example
1. Model STA
STP
Standard model (Tear drop glazing & wide brim)
STA E
2. Mounting E
E
Top Entry Easy-fit™
T
T
Top Entry Threaded
3. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E
E
Electronic Gear: available for most light sources**
M
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
E
4. Light Source 100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
150S
150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
250S 10m
9m
90W CosmoPolis
140W
140W CosmoPolis
L230
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L245
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
Suggested column/ bracket options
36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L345
36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
10
10
RAL 9005 Black
140W
A
5/35
B
B
10/10
C
C
31/35
D
D
5/25
L
L
LX1 Luminance Optic (selected lamps – see opposite)
Available with Easy-fit™ entry connector for ease of installation and accurate lantern alignment
Strand A Plus For mounting at 10 – 12 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 400W
See pages 128 – 129 for details
10 A
7. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS
Mounting: Easy-fit™ entry [42.4mm Ø] (Strand A) Easy-fit™ entry [48mm Ø] (Strand A Plus) Threaded entry [1¼” BSP]
B 10/10
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options • Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions
C 31/35
• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109)
D 5/25
• New LX1 Luminance Optic available
Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
• The Strand is available in four proportionately identical sizes for schemes from high traffic routes to residential developments
Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details
LX1 Luminance Optic
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red
N
No Photocell
C
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
PS
Part Night Switch Off
PD
PD
Part Night Dim
CH
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CM
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
See pages 128 – 129 for details
CT
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
Zebra crossing version (Strand A)
CZ
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
*These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control **400W gear is magnetic only, 250W gear in Strand A is magnetic only
A 5/35
IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I
See pages 128 – 129 for details
N
Example Code = STA E E 140W 10 A CH
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution
Distribution optimised for main road lighting See page 34 for details The LX1 Luminance Optic is only available with 90W/140W CosmoPolis & 100W/150W SON lamp types
Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution LX1 Luminance Optic
CH
Strand A & A Plus
Tool-less maintenance via stainless steel quick release latches
Light source: See product codes
6. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/ LX1 Luminance Optic A
Other: Obtrusive light shield(s) Narrow brim (Strand A)
See pages 298 – 301 for details
Materials Body: Spun aluminium Entry: Corrosion protected steel
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
Access: Body coloured stainless steel quick release latches Seals: Silicone rubber
ØB
A
Finish: Polyester powder coated
10
20
21
30
50
RAL 3005
RAL 6005
Dimensions mm RAL 5003
1m
L330
Installation and Maintenance
Strand A For mounting at 7 – 10 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 250W
Glazing: Polycarbonate tear drop bowl (standard) Polycarbonate round bowl (Strand A only)
5. Colour – for alternative colours see below
RAL 7037
2m
400W SON-T+
090W
RAL 7016
3m
400S*
150W CDM-T
RAL 9005
4m
Strand A shown on Edinburgh 8m column with Traditional Scroll column bracket
5m
Strand A Plus shown on Chester 10m column with special Arc column bracket
6m
250W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
150C*
8m
7m
250S
Options
70
A
B
B•
A
643
670
527
A Plus
870
900
Strand
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
•Narrow Brim (Strand A only)
Weight kg
Windage
11.5
0.19m2
18.0
0.35m2 Knightsbridge, London
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
122 Traditional
Strand B & C
Traditional 123
Product Codes B
C
Example
1. Model STB
STC
Standard model (Tear drop glazing & wide brim)
STB
E
E
Top Entry Easy-fit™
E
T
T
Top Entry Threaded
U
U
Square U Bracket
2. Mounting
3. Control Gear – check compatibility with light source E
E
Electronic Gear: available for most light sources
M
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
E
035C*
35W CDM-T
070C*
70W CDM-T
Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
150C*
150W CDM-T
057P*
57W PL-T 045W
60W CosmoPolis
090W
90W CosmoPolis 12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L145
12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K 24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L245
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
10
Light source: See product codes
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109
L230
10
RAL 9005 Black
10
6. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution
Suggested column/ bracket options
A
A
5/35
B
B
10/10
C
C
31/35
D
D
5/25
N
N
No Photocell
C
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
PS
Part Night Switch Off
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red
D
A 5/35
• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions
B 10/10
C 31/35
• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109) • The Strand is available in four proportionately identical sizes for schemes from high traffic routes to residential developments
D 5/25
Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details Strand C only: Due to physical restrictions, with 100W SON-T+ or CDO-TT lamps, setting A is not available and setting C can achieve a maximum 25/25 reflector position
Narrow brim
See pages 128 – 129 for details
C
Zebra crossing version
See pages 298 – 301 for details
PD
Part Night Dim
Materials
CH
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
Body: Spun aluminium
CM
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
CT
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
Entry: Corrosion protected steel
CZ
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
*These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control **45W CosmoPolis in Strand C is not compatible with Telensa or Mayflower CMS
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution
Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)
PD
Example Code = STB E E L230 10 D C
IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I
Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution
7. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS
Access: Body coloured stainless steel quick release latches Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated ØB
A
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
10
20
21
30
50
RAL 3005
RAL 6005
RAL 5003
Dimensions mm RAL 7037
1m
L130 L230
RAL 7016
2m
45W CosmoPolis**
060W
Strand B & C
Tool-less maintenance via stainless steel quick release latches
See pages 128 – 129 for details
See pages 128 – 129 for details
RAL 9005
3m
Mounting: Easy-fit™ entry [42.4mm Ø] Threaded entry [1” BSP] Post top “U” brackets
150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
5. Colour – for alternative colours see below
Strand B with Square U bracket on Newcastle 5m column with optional ladder bars
4m
Strand B shown on Cardiff 6m column with Traditional Hoop column bracket
5m
See pages 128-129 for details
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
8m
6m
Strand C For mounting at 2.5 – 5 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 100W
150S
045W
7m
50W SON-T+/StreetWise 70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
Available with Easy-fit™ entry connector for ease of installation and accurate lantern alignment
100S
070C*
9m
050S 070S
Installation and Maintenance
Glazing: Polycarbonate tear drop bowl (standard) Polycarbonate round bowl (Strand B only)
4. Light Source 070S
Options Strand B For mounting at 4 – 7 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
70
Windage
A
B
B•
B
575
585
484
8.5
0.15m2
C
498 480
396
5.5
0.11m2
Strand
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
Weight kg
•Narrow Brim
Poundbury, Dorset
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
124 Traditional
Product Codes A
B
C
ELB
ELC
Standard model (Tear drop glazing & wide brim)
E
Top Entry Easy-fit™
T
T
Top Entry Threaded
U
U
Tear Drop U Bracket
Example
1. Model ELA
ELB
2. Mounting E
E
T
T
3. Control Gear – check compatibility with light source E
E
E
M
M
M
Electronic Gear: available for most light sources Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
E
070S
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
100S
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
150S
150S
150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
250S 070C* 150C*
35W CDM-T
070C*
70W CDM-T
150C* 042P 057P* 045W
090W
60W CosmoPolis 90W CosmoPolis
140W
140W CosmoPolis L130
9m
L145 L230
8m
L245
12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K 12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K 24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K 24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
L245
5. Colour – for alternative colours see below
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
B
B
10/10
C
C
31/35
See pages 128 – 129 for details
D
D
D
5/25
Zebra crossing version available
A
No Photocell
C
C
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
U
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
PS
PS
Part Night Switch Off
PD
PD
PD
Part Night Dim
CH
CH
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CM
CM
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
CT
CT
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
CZ
CZ
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details For Ely C only: Due to physical restrictions, with 100W SON-T+ or CDO-TT lamps, setting A is not available and setting C can achieve a maximum 25/25 reflector position
Distribution optimised for main road lighting See page 34 for details The LX1 Luminance Optic is only available with 90W/140W CosmoPolis & 100W/150W SON lamp types
See pages 298 – 301 for details
7. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS N
• The Ely is available in three proportionately identical sizes for schemes from high traffic routes to residential developments
D 5/25
Narrow brim
LX1 Luminance Optic (selected lamps – see opposite) N
C 31/35
Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)
C
Materials Body: Spun aluminium ØB
Entry: Corrosion protected steel PD
Access: Body coloured stainless steel quick release latches Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated
Example Code = ELB T E L245 10 A PD *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control **45W CosmoPolis in Ely is not compatible with Telensa or Mayflower CMS
Dimensions mm Ely
10
20
21
30
50
RAL 3005
Suggested column/ bracket options
10
Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution LX1 Luminance Optic (Ely A only)
B
N
• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109) • New LX1 Luminance Optic available (Ely A only)
Ely A only
5/35
L
• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions
B 10/10
LX1 Luminance Optic
A
RAL 6005
1m
RAL 9005 Black
A 5/35
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red
A
RAL 7037
2m
10
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109
A
RAL 7016
3m
10
6. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/ LX1 Luminance Optic
RAL 9005
4m
Ely C shown on Cardiff 5m column with Swan Neck column bracket
5m
Ely A shown on Edinburgh 8m column with Traditional Hoop column bracket
6m
10
RAL 5003
7m
IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I
Tool-less maintenance via stainless steel quick release latches
Mounting: Easy-fit™ entry [42.4mm Ø]
Light source: See product codes
45W CosmoPolis**
060W
Ely C For mounting at 2.5 – 5 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 100W
Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
42W PL-T
090W
See pages 128 – 129 for details
Ely
Glazing: Polycarbonate tear drop bowl (standard)
57W PL-T 045W
Ely B For mounting at 4 – 7 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
See pages 128 – 129 for details
150W CDM-T 042P
Available with Easy-fit™ entry connector for ease of installation and accurate lantern alignment
Post top “U” brackets
250W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise 035C*
Installation and Maintenance
Ely A For mounting at 7 – 10 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 250W
Threaded entry: Ely A [1¼” BSP] Ely B/C [1” BSP]
4. Light Source 050S
Options
A
Ely
Traditional 125
70
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
Weight kg
Windage
B•
A
B
A
638
670
527
11.5
0.17m2
B
575
585
484
8.5
0.14m2
C
489
480
396
5.5
0.10m2
•Narrow Brim
Ingress Park, Dartford
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
126 Traditional
Ely Ingress Park, Dartford
Traditional 127
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
128 Traditional
Traditional 129
Strand & Ely
Entry Types Top Entry
Square U
Strand Dimensions
Technical Details
The Strand and Ely Ranges are offered with either a threaded entry or our Easy-fit™ entry. Easy-fit™
IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I Tear Drop U
Glazing & Brim Options The Easy-fit™ entry, which is our own design, both simplifies luminaire alignment and eliminates the problem of twisted cabling associated with threaded entries. This is compatible with most of our wall and column brackets.
Dimensions mm
Round U
A
Threaded
Weight kg
Windage
Brim Options
Glazing Options
“U” Bracket Options
Zebra Version
Available
B•
B
Strand A Plus
870 900
18.0
0.35m2
Wide
Tear Drop
Strand A
643 670 527
11.5
0.19m2
Wide/Narrow
Tear Drop/Round
Strand B
575 585 484
8.5
0.15m2
Wide/Narrow
Tear Drop/Round
Square/Tear Drop/Round
Strand C
498 480 396
5.5
0.11m2
Wide/Narrow
Tear Drop
Square/Tear Drop
Available
•Narrow Brim
The threaded entry is the conventional method of mounting the luminaire and is compatible with most new and existing bracket types.
Square U
For the Ely there are two different styles of “U” bracket; a traditional square design and a design that closely follows the shape of the tear drop glazing.
Strand round glazing: narrow brim
Ely tear drop glazing: wide brim
Ely tear drop glazing: narrow brim
A
A
Tear Drop U
ØB
ØB
Dimensions mm
Weight kg
ØB
Windage
Brim Options
Glazing Options
“U” Bracket Options
Zebra Version
Available
A
B
B•
Ely A
638
670
527
11.5
0.17m2
Wide/Narrow
Tear Drop
Ely B
576
585
484
8.5
0.14m2
Wide/Narrow
Tear Drop
Square/Tear Drop
Ely C
489
480
396
5.5
0.10m2
Wide/Narrow
Tear Drop
Square/Tear Drop
Available
•Narrow Brim
The “U” bracket options are unaffected by the brim type i.e. any “U” bracket shape can be used with either brim type.“U” brackets are made in steel, galvanised, polyester powder coated in the colour of the lantern and supplied pre-assembled to the lantern. Wiring is made simple by having a terminal block mounted within the base of the“U” bracket.
Strand round glazing: wide brim
A
“U” Bracket Entry
For the Strand there are three different styles of “U” bracket; a traditional square design (for either the tear drop or round glazing bowl) and two designs that closely follow the shape of either the round or tear drop glazing.
Strand tear drop glazing: narrow brim
Ely Dimensions
“U” Bracket Entry “U” brackets allow the Strand and Ely (B and C sizes) to be mounted as post top luminaires.
Strand tear drop glazing: wide brim
Strand Poundbury, Dorset
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
130 Traditional
Iffley
Traditional 131
Product Codes Example 1. Model IFF
IFF
2. Mounting E
Top Entry Easy-fit™
T
Top Entry Threaded
T
3. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E
Electronic Gear: available for most light sources
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
E
4. Light Source
9m
8m
7m
6m
050S
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
100S**
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
035C*
35W CDM-T
070C*
70W CDM-T
042P
42W PL-T
045W
45W CosmoPolis
060W
60W CosmoPolis
L130
12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L145
12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
5. Colour – for alternative colours see below 10
Suggested column/ bracket options
A
5/35
B
10/10
C
31/35
D
10
5/25
B
7. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS
Installation and Maintenance
Iffley For mounting at 2.5 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 100W
Available with Easy-fit™ entry connector for ease of installation and accurate lantern alignment
Mounting: Easy-fit™ entry [42.4mm Ø] Threaded entry [1” BSP]
See pages 128 – 129 for details
Glazing: Polycarbonate curved glazing bowl (standard) Polycarbonate straight glazing bowl
IP65 | IK07 | CLASS I • Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution
Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
B 10/10
Light source: See product codes
C 31/35
D 5/25
• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions • Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109)
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution
Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details Due to physical restrictions, with 100W SON-T+ or CDO-TT lamps, setting A is not available and setting C can achieve a maximum 25/25 reflector position
Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)
No Photocell
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
Part Night Switch Off
Entry: Corrosion protected steel
PD
Part Night Dim
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
Access: Body coloured stainless steel quick release latches
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
Seals: Silicone rubber
Example Code = IFF T E 042P 10 B U
Iffley
Tool-less maintenance via stainless steel quick release latches
A 5/35
N
Materials U
Body: Spun aluminium
Finish: Polyester powder coated
*Not available with dimming or CMS **Supplied with gear tray for remote mounting
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
10
20
21
30
50
Dimensions mm
RAL 3005
RAL 6005
RAL 5003
RAL 7037
RAL 7016
A
ØB
RAL 9005
1m
Iffley shown on Oxford 4m column with Iffley Swan Neck column bracket
2m
Iffley shown on Tubular Steel 5m column with standard Swan Neck column bracket
3m
RAL 9005 Black
6. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution
5m
4m
042P
Options
70
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
A
A•
B
320
378
324
•Straight glazing
Weight kg
Windage
4.9
0.09m2
Straight glazing bowl
Madley Park, Witney
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
132 Traditional
Hatfield
Traditional 133
Product Codes Example 1. Model HAB
HAB
2. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E
Electronic Gear: available for all light sources
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
E
3. Light Source
9m
8m
7m
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
150S
150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
070C*
70W CDM-T
150C*
150W CDM-T
042P
42W PL-T
057P*
57W PL-T
045W
45W CosmoPolis
060W
60W CosmoPolis
090W
90W CosmoPolis
L230
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L245
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
10
Hatfield shown on Large Plain Cast wall bracket
Suggested column/ bracket options
A
5/35
B
10/10
C
31/35
D
5/25
C
6. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS N
No Photocell
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
Part Night Switch Off
PD
Part Night Dim
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
Tool-less maintenance via stainless steel quick release latches
Mounting: 76mm Ø
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution
Glazing: Polycarbonate glazing cone
C
A 5/35
Hatfield IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I
B 10/10
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options • Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions
C 31/35
• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109)
D 5/25
Light source: See product codes
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red
Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details
Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution
Materials Canopy: Spun aluminium Body: Fabricated aluminium Frog: Metal sprayed steel Access: Body coloured stainless steel quick release latches Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated
Example Code = HAB E 042P 10 C C *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
10
20
21
30
50
ØC
RAL 3005
RAL 6005
RAL 5003
RAL 7037
RAL 7016
A
ØB
RAL 9005
1m
Hatfield shown on Cardiff 6m column
4m
2m
10
5. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution
5m
3m
042P
RAL 9005 Black
Installation and Maintenance
Hatfield For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
4. Colour – for alternative colours see below
6m
Options
70
Dimensions mm This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
A
B
C
1007
585
76
Weight kg
Windage
10.5
0.19m2
Heaton Grange, Bolton
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
134 Traditional
Traditional 135
York & Warwick
Product Codes York
Warwick
Example
WAR
YOK
1. Model YOK
2. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E
E
Electronic Gear: available for all light sources
M
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
E
9m
8m
7m
6m
050S
50W SON-T/StreetWise
070S
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
100S
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
035C*
035C*
35W CDM-T
070C*
070C*
70W CDM-T
150C*
150C*
150W CDM-T
042P
042P
42W PL-T
045W
045W
45W CosmoPolis
060W
060W
60W CosmoPolis
090W
090W
90W CosmoPolis
140W
140W
140W CosmoPolis
L130
L130
12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L145
L145
12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
Suggested column/ bracket options
A
A
5/35
B
B
10/10
C
C
31/35
D
D
5/25
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109
140W
10
C
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red
Tool-free access to luminaire for ease of maintenance via removable canopy
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35
IP65 | IK07 | CLASS I
B 10/10
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options C 31/35
• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions
D 5/25
• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109)
N
N
No Photocell
Coronet painted gold (Warwick only)
C
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
Materials
PS
PS
Part Night Switch Off
Canopy: Spun aluminium
PD
PD
Part Night Dim
CH
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CZ
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
CH
Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details Due to physical restrictions, with 100W SON-T+ or CDO-TT lamps, setting A is not available and setting C can achieve a maximum 25/25 reflector position
York
Warwick
Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)
Example Code = YOK E 140W 10 C CH
York & Warwick
Light source: See product codes
6. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS
Coronet: Aluminium Base: Cast aluminium Seals: Neoprene Finish: Polyester powder coated
*These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
Warwick
ØB
ØB
A
A
York
ØC
10
20
21
30
50
Dimensions mm
RAL 3005
RAL 6005
RAL 5003
RAL 7037
RAL 7016
ØC RAL 9005
1m
York shown on Chester 4m column
2m
Warwick shown on Ornate Cast wall bracket
3m
RAL 9005 Black
Warwick For mounting at 3 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
5. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution
5m
4m
10
Base casting has external connector block for ease of installation
Glazing: Clear polycarbonate glazing cone
4. Colour – for alternative colours see below 10
Installation and Maintenance
York For mounting at 3 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
Mounting: 76mm Ø
3. Light Source 050S
Options
70
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
Weight kg
Windage
A
B
C
York
778
323
76
9.4
0.14m2
Warwick
778
345
76
9.4
0.15m2
York Luss, Banks of Loch Lomond
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
136 Traditional
Traditional 137
Salisbury & Newport
Product Codes Salisbury
Newport
Example
NEW
NEW
1. Model SAL
2. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E
E
Electronic Gear: available for all light sources
M
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
E
9m
8m
7m
6m Newport shown on Cardiff 5m column with optional ladder bars
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
100S
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
035C*
035C*
35W CDM-T
070C*
070C*
70W CDM-T
150C*
150C*
150W CDM-T
042P
042P
42W PL-T
045W
045W
45W CosmoPolis
060W
060W
60W CosmoPolis
090W
090W
90W CosmoPolis
140W
140W
140W CosmoPolis
L130
L130
12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L145
L145
12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
Suggested column/ bracket options
10
10
RAL 9005 Black
A
A
5/35
B
B
10/10
C
C
31/35
D
D
5/25
Base casting has external connector block for ease of installation
Newport For mounting at 3 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
Glazing: Clear polycarbonate glazing cone Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
060W
10
5. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution
C
6. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red
Tool-free access to luminaire for ease of maintenance via removable canopy
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35
IP65 | IK07 | CLASS I
B 10/10
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options C 31/35
• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions
D 5/25
• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109) Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details Due to physical restrictions, with 100W SON-T+ or CDO-TT lamps, setting A is not available and setting C can achieve a maximum 25/25 reflector position
Salisbury
Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution
Newport
Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)
N
No Photocell
C
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
Canopy: Spun aluminium
PS
PS
Part Night Switch Off
Base: Cast aluminium
PD
PD
Part Night Dim
Seals: Neoprene
CH
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CZ
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
C
Salisbury & Newport
Light source: See product codes
N
Materials
Finish: Polyester powder coated
Example Code = NEW E 060W 10 C C *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
Newport
ØB
ØB
A
A
Salisbury
ØC
10
20
21
30
50
Dimensions mm
RAL 3005
RAL 6005
RAL 5003
RAL 7037
RAL 7016
ØC RAL 9005
1m
Salisbury shown on York pedestal
4m
2m
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
4. Colour – for alternative colours see below
5m
3m
050S
070S
Installation and Maintenance
Salisbury For mounting at 3 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
Mounting: 76mm Ø
3. Light Source 050S
Options
70
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
Weight kg
Windage
A
B
C
Salisbury
778
500
76
9.4
0.16m2
Newport
778
365
76
9.4
0.15m2
Salisbury Linlithgow Street, West Lothian
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
138 Traditional
Braemar & Waterford
Traditional 139
Product Codes Braemar
Waterford
Example
WAT
WAT
1. Model BRA
2. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E
E
Electronic Gear: available for all light sources
M
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
E
9m
8m
7m
6m
050S
050S
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
100S
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
035C*
035C*
35W CDM-T
070C*
070C*
70W CDM-T
150C*
150C*
150W CDM-T
042P
042P
42W PL-T
045W
045W
45W CosmoPolis
060W
060W
60W CosmoPolis
090W
090W
90W CosmoPolis
140W
140W
140W CosmoPolis
L130
L130
12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L145
L145
12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
A
Waterford shown on Neva wall bracket
Suggested column/ bracket options
A
B
B
10/10
C
31/35
D
D
5/25
Braemar & Waterford
Tool-free access to luminaire for ease of maintenance via removable canopy
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35
IP65 | IK07 | CLASS I
B 10/10
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options C 31/35
• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions
D 5/25
• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109)
Light source: See product codes 140W
10
5/35
C
C
6. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red
Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details Due to physical restrictions, with 100W SON-T+ or CDO-TT lamps, setting A is not available and setting C can achieve a maximum 25/25 reflector position
Braemar
Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution
Waterford
Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)
N
N
No Photocell
C
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
PS
Part Night Switch Off
Base: Cast aluminium
PD
PD
Part Night Dim
CH
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
Seals: Neoprene
CZ
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
Materials U
Canopy: Spun aluminium
Finish: Polyester powder coated
Example Code = WAT E 140W 10 C U *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
Braemar
Waterford ØB
A
A
ØB
10
20
21
30
50
70
ØC Dimensions mm
RAL 3005
RAL 6005
RAL 5003
RAL 7037
RAL 7016
ØC
RAL 9005
1m
Braemar shown on Chester 5m column
4m
2m
RAL 9005 Black
Waterford For mounting at 3 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
5. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution
5m
3m
10
Base casting has external connector block for ease of installation
Glazing: Medium clear polycarbonate glazing cone
4. Colour– for alternative colours see below 10
Installation and Maintenance
Braemar For mounting at 3 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
Mounting: 76mm Ø
3. Light Source 070S
Options
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
Weight kg
Windage
A
B
C
Braemar
652
365
76
9.4
0.14m2
Waterford
652
450
76
9.4
0.15m2
Braemar Kingsmead, Milton Keynes
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
140 Traditional
Henley
Traditional 141
Product Codes Example 1. Model HEN
HEN
2. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E
Electronic Gear: available for all light sources
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
E
3. Light Source
9m
8m
7m
6m
050S
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
035C*
35W CDM-T
070C*
70W CDM-T
150C*
150W CDM-T
042P
42W PL-T
045W
45W CosmoPolis
060W
60W CosmoPolis
090W
90W CosmoPolis
140W
140W CosmoPolis
L130
12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L145
12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
Suggested column/ bracket options
C
31/35
D
045W
10
5/25
Glazing: Clear polycarbonate glazing cone
Tool-free access to luminaire for ease of maintenance via removable canopy
IP65 | IK07 | CLASS I
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35
• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options
B 10/10
• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions • Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109)
C 31/35
D 5/25
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution
Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details Due to physical restrictions, with 100W SON-T+ or CDO-TT lamps, setting A is not available and setting C can achieve a maximum 25/25 reflector position
Other: Obtrusive light shield(s) D
6. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS N
No Photocell
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
Part Night Switch Off
PD
Part Night Dim
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
C
Materials Canopy: Spun aluminium Base: Cast aluminium Seals: Neoprene Finish: Polyester powder coated
Example Code = HEN E 045W 10 D C *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
A
ØB
10
20
21
30
50
RAL 3005
RAL 6005
RAL 5003
RAL 7037
ØC RAL 7016
1m
10/10
RAL 9005
2m
Henley shown on Linear wall bracket
3m
Henley shown on Cardiff 4m column with optional ladder bars
4m
5/35
B
Mounting: 76mm Ø
Henley
For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109
RAL 9005 Black
A
Base casting has external connector block for ease of installation
Light source: See product codes
5. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution
5m
Installation and Maintenance
Henley For mounting at 3 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
4. Colour– for alternative colours see below 10
Options
70
Dimensions mm This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
A
B
C
645
314
76
Weight kg
Windage
9.4
0.14m2
Royal Clarence Yard, Gosport
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Functional
143
Functional
Reliable, established performance
DW400 Cribbs Causeway, Bristol
Certification to ISO 9001:2008 reflects the integrity of our rigorous quality management systems
Road Lantern
DW400
Meridian
Toro
144 – 145
146 – 147
148 – 149
150 – 151
An established range of products offering a practical lighting solution across a breadth of applications. The performance of each is designed to suit its function, whether lighting residential developments, traffic junctions or pedestrian walkways. Energy efficiency is achieved using photocell switching or electronic controls compatible with most Central Management Systems. Flat glass options and obtrusive light shields prevent unwanted light spill, while options for mounting and on-site adjustment allow flexibility.
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
144
Functional
• New range of luminaires for road lighting • Suitable for lamps ranging from 50W to 400W
Functional
Road Lantern
• Designed to offer great value for money and good performance • Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options
Coming Soon For further information visit www.dwwindsor.com
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
145
Functional
Functional
DW400
Product Codes Example 1. Model DW4
DW4
2. Mounting D
Direct Entry
S
Side Entry
D
P
Polycarbonate Bowl
F
Flat Toughened Glass
F
4. Control gear – check compatibility with light sources E
Electronic Gear: available for all light sources
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
E
5. Light Source 050S
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
035C*
35W CDM-T
070C
70W CDM-T
042P
42W PL-T
057P*
57W PL-T
045W
45W CosmoPolis
060W
60W CosmoPolis
090W
90W CosmoPolis
L230
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K
L245
24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K
10
10/10
C
31/35
D
5/25
L230
Suggested column/ bracket options
Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution
Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)
A 5/35
IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I
B 10/10
• Robust construction – ideal for residential developments • Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options
C 31/35
• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions
D 5/25
• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 32 – 33) • Flat glass option for zero upward light Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details
Other: Obtrusive light shield(s) Zebra crossing version available
See pages 298 – 301 for details
10
Materials A
Ring/entry: Die cast aluminium Canopy: Spun aluminium
N
No Photocell
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
Part Night Switch Off
PD
Part Night Dim
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
CZ
Access: Body coloured stainless steel latches
CMS Zodion Vizion
Seals: Silicone rubber C
Finish: Polyester powder coated
Example Code = DW4 D F E L230 10 A C * These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
For full range of columns and brackets see page 256
A
ØB
10
20
21
30
Dimensions Weight Windage mm kg ØB A B
RAL 6005 50
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
Bowl
265
450
9.8
0.09m2
Flat glass
192
450
10.4
0.07m2
A
RAL 5003
RAL 7037
Flat glass RAL 7016
1m
B
RAL 9005
2m
5/35
Mounting: Direct entry [76mm Ø] Side entry [42mm Ø]
DW400
Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution
8. Switching, dimming & control DW400 shown on Tapered 5m column
3m
A
Ease of maintenance via quickrelease latches
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green
7. Diamond Optic® setting/LED Array Distribution
5m
4m
RAL 9005 Black
Installation and Maintenance
DW400 For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 100W
Light source: See product codes
6. Colour – for alternative colours see below 6m
Options
Glazing: Flat toughened glass Polycarbonate bowl
3. Glazing
DW400 shown on Tubular Steel 6m column
146
Armstrong Road, Maidstone
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
147
Functional
Meridian
Functional
Product Codes
Options Example
1. Model MER
MER
2. Control gear – check compatibility with light sources
10m
E
Electronic Gear: certain light sources only
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
M
150S
4 X 150W SON-T+/CDO-TT
150S
150C*
4 X 150W CDM-T
250C*
4 X 250W CDM-T
250S
4 X 250W SON-T+/CDO-TT
140W
4 X 140W CosmoPolis
3. Light Source
9m
8m
7m
4. Colour – for alternative colours see below 10
6m
Suggested column option
B
10/10
C
31/35
D
5/25
A
6. Switching, dimming & control
Meridian For mounting at 8 – 15 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 4 x 250W Mounting: Post top luminaire to fit 140mm Ø (standard) or 114mm Ø column shaft Glazing: Flat toughened glass Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell (x2) or Nema socket (x2) Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS) Light source: See product codes
Optical control: Diamond Optic®
N
No Photocell Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
PS
Part Night Switch Off
PD
Part Night Dim
Canopy: Spun aluminium
CH
CMS Harvard LeafNut
Entry: Galvanised steel
CM
CMS Mayflower CLC
Access: Stainless steel screws
CT
CMS Telensa PLANet
Seals: Silicone rubber
CZ
CMS Zodion Vizion
Finish: Polyester powder coated
Example Code = MER M 150S 10 A N * These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control
N
Materials
Installation and Maintenance Ease of maintenance via four, quarter turn screws
For full range of columns see page 256
Meridian
Diamond Optic® Two Directions 10/10
Four Directions 10/10
Two Directions 5/35
Four Directions 5/35
IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I • Four sealed optic capsules with independent rotational adjustment facility – allow enhanced fine tuning of optical control • Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options
See pages 28 – 31 for details The four Diamond Optic® capsules can rotate through 360º to allow the Meridian to be used for a number of different applications This can be carried out during installation to fine-tune the lighting distribution
• Flat glass for zero upward light
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green
C
One Direction Ideal for lighting wide areas from one side: e.g. promenades and car parks
Two Directions Ideal for applications such as dual carriageways by mounting the Meridian in the central reservation
Four Directions Ideal for pedestrianised areas, car parks, large roundabouts, market places and junctions
A
ØB
10
20
21
30
RAL 6005
RAL 5003
ØC RAL 7037
1m
5/35
RAL 7016
2m
A
RAL 9005
3m
10
5. Diamond Optic setting
5m
4m
RAL 9005 Black ®
Meridian shown on Tubular Steel 10m column
148
50
Dimensions mm This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
A
B
C
227
1176
127
Weight kg
Windage
65
0.25m2
Upper Thames Street, London
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
149
Functional
Toro
Functional
Product Codes
Options
Installation and Maintenance
Example
Toro For mounting at 6 – 8 metres
Cable termination within base of product via IP66 rated connector
TRO
Mounting: Post top luminaire to fit 76mm Ø column shaft
Lamp and gear module complete with isolating terminal block to interrupt power supply on removal
E
Glazing: Transparent polycarbonate glazing
Tool less access via sealed quarter turn latch
Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic control gear Miniature photocell
Optical Distribution
1. Model TRO 2. Control gear – check compatibility with light sources
8m
E
Electronic Gear: certain light sources only
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
3. Light Source 7m
6m
5m
4m
3m
2m
1m
Toro shown on tapered 8m column
150
050S
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
100S
100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
035C
35W CDM-T
070C
70W CDM-T
150C
150W CDM-T
090W
90W CosmoPolis
140W
140W CosmoPolis
RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey
IP66 | IK09 | CLASS II • Purpose designed for amenity and car park lighting • Flat glazing for zero upward light • Tool-less access to lamp and gear module via quarter turn latch
Light source: See product codes LED option available on request
• LED option available on request
Colours: RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey Optical control: Central area optic 090W
Materials Body: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium
4. Colour 20
Toro
20
Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated
5. Control N
No Photocell
C
Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)
U
Photocell 35lux (1:1)
N
Example Code = TRO E 090W 20 N
Suggested column option For full range of columns see page 256
Dimensions mm A
B
C
534
780
76
Weight kg
WIndage
16
0.16m²
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
151
Solar & Wind 153
WIND ENERGY
NIGHT TIME
SOLAR ENERGY
DAY TIME
Powered by nature
Solar & Wind Powered Lighting
This system has been designed, analysed and honed over time to offer the greatest cost benefit possible
Lighting Powered by Nature
Stand-Alone & Grid-Connected Systems
154 – 155
156 – 157 ELECTRICITY GRID
Whether wholly embracing energy-saving or choosing a solar or wind product for other practical reasons, DW Windsor has a solution to support your ambitions. Most of our column-mounted, LED luminaires may be used with solar/wind technology to offer the required look and performance. The system can feed back into the local electrical grid or act as a stand-alone (off-grid) system for remote areas. Using the efficiencies of LED and maximising the use of nature’s power, this system has been designed, analysed and honed over a period of time to offer the greatest cost benefit possible.
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
154 Solar & Wind
Solar & Wind 155
Solar & Wind
Solar & Wind
Tried and Tested System
Lighting Powered by Nature
DW Windsor can provide complete systems to suit the needs of individual customers, including all of the elements required in a turn-key solution.
Whilst there are many uncertainties in life, we can be sure that the sun will rise and set each day.
The system has been designed to include: • LED light source, for its long life and low maintenance characteristics
With the sun comes the opportunity to harness some of its power to provide energy through photovoltaic cells to afford lighting without mains power or the carbon associated with it.
• Wind turbine, to harness energy from wind • Photovoltaic panel(s) to harness solar energy • Power storage using 12V batteries (not required for grid-connected systems)
DW Windsor has been trialling different technologies for a number of years, but it is only now that the right turbines, photovoltaic cells, batteries and light sources combination have become available to give the performance required to provide a viable, cost-effective solution.
Our system is designed to use just a single photovoltaic panel, multiple panels or in combination with a wind turbine. When deciding on which to choose there are several considerations to take into account: Location: depending on the exposure to sunlight or good quality wind. Time of day the energy can be harnessed and used: the solar panels harvest energy during the hours of sunlight and this is consumed by the luminaire after dark, whereas a wind turbine will potentially generate energy both day and night.
Suitable Lighting Products
Polar Pages 98 – 99
Dover Pages 96 – 97
Excel Pages 94 – 95
Stratum Pages 92 – 93
DW400 Pages 146 – 147
Evora LED Pages 62 – 63
Monaro LED II Pages 54 – 55
The DW Windsor’s range of LED lighting products are suitable for use with this technology. In addition, any DW Windsor column bracket may be used to mount the luminaire and customer’s bespoke designs for mounting the photovoltaic panels and luminaire can also be accommodated.
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
156 Solar & Wind
Stand-Alone System
Grid-Connected System
This type of system is self-contained and does not require connection to a supply of electricity. It contains a means of harvesting natural, renewable energy (either photo-voltaic cells alone or as a combination of cells and a wind turbine), batteries to store this energy until it’s required, a luminaire, a column and brackets on which the cells/turbine and luminaire are mounted and the necessary controls to operate the system.
This type of system is connected to the electricity grid and is less complex than a stand-alone system. It also harvests solar or solar and wind energy but rather than storing this energy in batteries it feeds-in to the electricity grid and revenue is generated from this. When darkness falls, the lights will come on in the same way a conventionally powered street light does and the energy for this comes from the electricity grid.
Advantages
Advantages
• Self-contained: no mains electricity supply required (negating the need for expensive channelling of cables in inaccessible or remote places to connect to the electricity grid)
• Guaranteed supply of electricity whenever required, irrespective of the weather
Solar & Wind Systems The DW Windsor Solar & Wind system can be used as:
• No connection charges
• Can generate income for the user by way of feed-in tariff incentives
• No future electricity costs and independence from future energy cost increases
• Generates considerably more electricity than it consumes for most of the year
• Grid-connected system
• Produces no carbon emissions
• Inexhaustible energy supply
• Inexhaustible energy supply
• No batteries to house or replace
Considerations
Considerations
The amount of energy captured is dependent on sunlight so short winter days with poor quality of sunlight may not generate the amount of energy required to power the lighting for the required duration. To overcome this potential problem an option has been devised combining energy from the sun and wind.
An electrical grid connection is required so this arrangement cannot be located in areas the grid doesn’t cover. Feed-in tariffs are likely to alter over the life-time of the installation which could affect pay-back calculations.
• Stand-alone system Each has its own benefits and considerations which will need to be assessed depending on the needs of different customers and the circumstances under which the technology is to be used.
For advice and guidance or to discuss particular requirements please contact customerservices@dwwindsor.co.uk
Wind turbines can be very effective energy generators in the appropriate location, however not all locations are suitable (e.g. amongst buildings). Energy is stored in batteries which will need to be replaced periodically. The batteries need a suitable place in which to be stored, which could either be in the column base or housed separately in a feeder pillar.
Stand-Alone System Wind Energy
Solar Energy
Wind Energy
DC Energy Provides Power To The Luminaire Night Time
Solar Energy
Grid-Connected System
Day Time
Solar & Wind Systems
Solar & Wind 157
Controls & Batteries Housed In Base
Electricity Grid
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Architectural 159
Architectural Vaio LED
Anello LED
Light Point
Portea LED
Renza LED
160 – 165
166 – 167
168 – 171
172 – 173
174 – 175
Petra
Capra-Mini
Capra
Capra-Compact
Cassia LED
176 – 177
178 – 181
178 – 183
178 – 185
186 – 187
A variety of options are available to highlight architectural and landscaping features. From subtle colour washing and defining paths or building outlines, to punching light up columns and floodlighting façades, this range offers a solution for lighting all urban landscapes. LED and lamped versions are available, allowing powerful and colour changing possibilities with DMX control. The ranges offer useful floodlighting for washing linear surfaces or focused spots of light, controlled by beam angles or asymmetric reflectors. Stainless steel or aluminium bezels offer a choice of looks to suit all environments. For help in lighting different situations see our ‘How-to Guides’ section, page 292.
Defining landscape features
Vaio LED Wimbledon
Colour wash, define outlines, illuminate columns or floodlight building façades
Lyra
Mano LED
Monza
Malo LED
Luca
188 – 189
190 – 191
192 – 193
194 – 195
196 – 197
Reno
Pharola-Wall
Kona
Vertica LED
Vertica
198 – 199
200 – 201
202 – 203
204 – 205
206 – 207
Tatra
Aventis
210 – 211
212 – 213
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Architectural 161
Vaio LED
Vaio LED Linear illumination
IP67 | IK10 | CLASS III
Features • Linear LED light
Highlighting linear features or making modular patterns in paving, accentuating structures and marking the way for pedestrians are all achievable with Vaio LED. In addition, any RGB colour can be added, with sequencing if required, to give a truly bespoke look to any urban landscape.
• Minimal daytime appearance • Available in five different lengths • Full range of RGB or monochrome colours • Full advice service
Individual modules can be simply aligned to give continuous runs of light. A DMX controller programs the individually addressable modules for accentuated effect. Advice and help with design and on-site programming and installation is offered to ensure the scheme fulfils all specification requirements.
Available in a range of colours including RGB
Market Street, Rotherham
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
162 Architectural
Vaio LED Wimbledon
Architectural 163
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
164 Architectural
Product Codes Mono Colour
RGB
Example
VAI
VAI
1. Model VAI 2. Light Source WW
Warm White LED 2500K
NW
Neutral White 4600K
CW
Cool White LED 7000K
B
Blue LED
A
Amber LED
R
Red LED
G
Green LED RGB
RGB
RGB
500
750 1000
1250
• Warm White – 2500K • Neutral White – 4600K • Cool White – 7000K • Red • Blue • Amber • Green
Option 1 – DMX-CS-001 Standalone Controller
DMX controlled colour changing with individually addressable on board LED drivers
The following options are available to order in multiples of 250mm up to a maximum of 2500mm
500mm 750mm
1000
To allow colour changing sequences, a DMX controller is required to provide the signal to each Vaio
Mounting
250mm
500
DMX Controllers
Mono Colour Available in 250/500/750/1000/ 1250mm lengths
RGB Available in 500/1000mm lengths
3. Size 250
Options
1000mm
1000
1250mm
Option 1 – VAI-SS-F-XXXX Galvanised steel section • Suitable for an in-ground “frameless” look
Example Code = VAI RGB 1000
Power Supply Enclosures A range of power supply enclosures are available designed specifically to work with the Vaio LED system. Each is supplied in an IP66 enclosure complete with power supply and wiring ready for installation. Mono Colour Vaio
RGB Vaio
VAI-75W-ENC 75W Power Supply
10m max Vaio 1 circuit
5m max Vaio 1 circuit
VAI-150W-ENC 150W Power Supply
20m max Vaio 2 circuit
10m max Vaio 2 circuit
VAI-320W-ENC 320W Power Supply
40m max Vaio 4 circuit
20m max Vaio 4 circuit
• Various mounting heights for different paving depths Option 2 – VAI-AL-F-XXXX Aluminium frame section • More suitable for DMX Vaio system • Dedicated cable channel beneath Vaio for easy wiring and access Option 3 – VAI-DR-F-XXXX ACO drainage section • Mounts directly on top of standard ACO drainage sections • Allows combination of lighting and drainage applications Note – Replace XXXX with length required
Wattages
Power supply to Mono Colour Vaio
Mono Colour 7.5W per metre RGB 15W per metre
The following cables have been sized for usage with the power supply enclosures to supply a maximum of 10m of Mono Vaio per circuit.
Other
Cabling Options
<30m to first Vaio
>30m to first Vaio
1 outgoing way
VAI-PSC-MON-251-XX 2.5mm2 Cable
VAI-PSC-MON-401-XX 4.0mm2 Cable
2 outgoing ways
VAI-PSC-MON-252-XX 2.5mm2 Cable
VAI-PSC-MON-402-XX 4.0mm2 Cable
Full technical support available on request Vaio design guide available online
Note – Power cables are available in multiples of 5m lengths, replace XX with required length
<30m to first Vaio
>30m to first Vaio
VAI-PSC-RGB-251-XX 2.5mm2 Cable
VAI-PSC-RGB-401-XX 4.0mm2 Cable
Note – Power cables are available in multiples of 5m lengths, replace XX with required length
• Available in five different lengths for individual or continuous lines of light
• Capable of running one single pre-set sequence at any one time
• Choice of RGB or monochrome, including white, blue and red
Option 2 – DMX-CS-003 Interactive Controller
• DMX controlled colour changing option with individually addressable modules
• Programmable via LCD screen and scroll wheel user control • Can be pre-set to allow various sequences to operate on a calendar basis • Allows modules to be addressed individually to allow a wide range of lighting effects
Extension Cables and Cable Termination Extension cables are required for use between each Vaio within a circuit and are available in standard lengths. The last Vaio on each circuit will require a cable termination plug Mono 1 Metre – VAI-EL-01M 2 Metre – VAI-EL-02M 3 Metre – VAI-EL-03M 5 Metre – VAI-EL-05M 10 Metre – VAI-EL-10M IP68 End Cap – VAI-ECC-M8 RGB 3 Metre – VAI-EL-03M-RGB DMX 120Ω Resistor – VAI-DMX-RESIST (Required for last RGB driver in each circuit) IP68 Cable Termination Plug– VAI-ECC-M8
Installation and Maintenance Continuous lit effect can be achieved by removing supplied end caps Easy to use IP68 plug and socket connector system Vaio LED simply snaps into a ‘U’ Section mounting extrusion for quick & easy installation B
Technical Data Dimensions mm
Can withstand the load of: 15000kg vehicle travelling at 18mph
• Linear LED light for defining or highlighting architecture
• Allows user edited colour changing sequences, inputted via laptop interface and programming software
A
Cables are combined power and DMX signal in order to limit the number of cables required within the scheme.
1 outgoing way
IP67 | IK10 | CLASS III
• Basic pre-programmable DMX controller
Power supply to RGB Vaio The following cables have been sized for usage with the power supply enclosures to supply a maximum of 5m of RGB Vaio per circuit.
Vaio LED
C
Vaio LED
Architectural 165
Weight kg
A
B
C
250/500•/750 1000•/1250
30
40
1.7kg (max)
•RGB 500 & 1000mm lengths only
Unite Building, Liverpool
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
166 Architectural
Product Codes
Options Example
Anello LED 220mm diameter
ANE
Glazing: Toughened glass
1. Model ANE 2. Size 220
220mm outer diameter
220
3. Light Source W
White LED
B
Blue LED
Example Code = ANE 220 W
W
Light source: LED Array Colours: White Blue Other colours available on request
Anello LED
Installation and Maintenance
IP67 | IK10 | CLASS III It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 25cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation
• Circular ring, in-ground LED feature light • Ideal for creating interesting patterns on pathways
Power supply: Requires 24V power supply
Materials Body: UV resistant nylon Glazing: Opaque toughened glass Sump: Galvanised Steel
• For flush mounting into paved areas or walls
Must not be installed in a recess
Product comes with 25cm prewired flexible cable and M12 metal gland Supplied with galvanised steel sub-frame
Technical Data Walkover only Maximum static load of 1500kg
ØA
ØB
D
Anello LED
Architectural 167
C Dimensions mm
Royal Terrace Gardens, Torquay
Weight kg
A
B
C
D
220
152
100
53
2.5
Royal Terrace Gardens, Torquay
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
168 Architectural
Light Point
Architectural 169
Product Codes Mono Colour
Options
RGB
Example
ILP
ILP
1. Model ILP 2. Light Source W
White LED
B
Blue LED RGB
W
001 002
Single Lead 002
Glazing: Integral opaque non-slip surface Light source: White LED Blue LED RGB
IP67 | IK09 | CLASS III To install the Light Point, a 60mmØ hole cut into the paved area is required. Sufficient drainage should be provided below the Light Point to avoid water stagnation
Materials
RGB
3. Number of Leads 001
Twin Leads
Example Code = ILP W 001
Light Point
Installation and Maintenance
Light Point
Body/Glazing: Structural Polyurethane
• Marker LED light for flush-mounting into paved areas, walls or steps • Choice of RGB or Mono Colour white or blue
Cable: Abrasion resistant flexible cable
• Gives rimless, even illumination across the opaque lens
Lead Options
• Durable, drive-over construction, with non-slip surface
Option 1 – Single lead connection for Mono Colour Light Point
Must not be installed in a recess
Easy to use tool-less IP68 plug and socket connector system
Option 2 – Twin lead connection for Mono Colour and RGB Light Point
Power Supplies Mono Colour Light Point: 15W IP66 Power Supply Dimensions – 130 x 130 x 75mm ILPPS002 RGB Light Point: 85W IP66 Power Supply Dimensions – 54 x 180 x 90mm ILPPSRGB RGB Control: IP20 RGB sequencer Dimensions – 80 x 80 x 50mm ILPSERGB
Extension Cables
A range of extension cables are available Product Code
Technical Data Monochrome Light Point Average power consumption 0.6W Up to 18 Light Point per power supply Up to 30m between power supply and furthest Light Point Light Points may be reduced in brightness by 50% via a switch in the power supply RGB Light Point Pre-set colour change sequencing available (x2) in a choice of 3 speeds each Light Points can change individually (max 16) or together (max 24) Up to 80m between power supply and furthest Light Point May be DMX controlled To operate up to 16 RGB Light Points 1 x ILPPSRGB, 1 x ILPSERGB and up to 16 x ILPRGB are required To increase spacing between RGB Light Points, RGB extension leads are required
Can withstand the load of a 20000kg vehicle travelling at 30mph
Length
Mono Colour
RGB
1m
ILPP1001
ILPP1RGB
2m
ILPP2001
ILPP2RGB
5m
ILPP5001
ILPP5RGB
To ensure plug and socket connections are permanently secured, a lead connector clamp should be used at every connection Lead Connector Clamp – ILPSS001
Mounting Whilst the Light Point can be mounted directly into a paved area as standard, a range of ground sockets have been designed for ease of installation and future maintenance. Option 1 – A plain ground socket without bezel is available for setting into concrete or where the depth of the paved area in which Light Point is being installed is shallow. Plain Ground Socket – ILPGS001 Option 2 – For situations where a clean edged hole may be difficult to cut, a stainless steel ground socket with 5mm bezel is available. Ground Socket with Bezel – ILPGS002
Dimensions mm
Weight kg
A
B
62
60
0.2
St. Martin's Quarter, Worcester
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
170 Architectural
Light Point & Lyra St. Martin's Quarter, Worcester
Architectural 171
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
172 Architectural
Portea LED
Architectural 173
Product Codes Example 1. Model PLD
PLD
PLD
High Power Uplight
U
Uplight
S
Single Window
T
Triple Window
T
W
W
White LED
B
B
Blue LED
R
Red LED
A
Amber LED
(1 LED) (9 LEDs) (3 LEDs) (9 LEDs)
Light source: White LEDs Blue LEDs Red LEDs Amber LEDs RGB LEDs available on request
3. Light Source W
High power uplight Uplight Single window Triple window
Glazing: Polycarbonate (Single & Triple window) Toughened glass with prismatic diffuser (Uplight)
2. Style N
Portea LED
Options
Example Code = PLD T W
IP67 | IK07 | CLASS III Must not be installed in a recess
• Decorative in-ground LED light
Cable entry via two PG9 gland for Ø4 – 8mm round cable
• Single or triple window or uplighter versions
Supplied with an IP68 gel filled connector with loop in/loop out capability for flexible cables
• Choice of monochrome LEDs: white, blue, red and amber
Optional accessories
• High Power Uplight (3.2W) in narrow or wide beam
Colour: RAL 9006 Aluminium
15W 700mA constant current electronic driver
• RGB version also available to order
Materials
DRI CC 15W700MA-GT (on tray) DRI CC 15W700MA-RD (in IP67 ground box)
(4 luminaires max – High Power Uplight only)
Body: Technopolymer Bezel: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium Sump: Technopolymer
10W 24V constant voltage electronic driver 6 luminaires max: 9 LED variant 18 luminaires max: 3 LED variant
DRI CV 10W24V-GT
Seals: Silicone rubber
Installation and Maintenance Access via Allen screws
40W 24V constant voltage electronic driver
24 luminaires max: 9 LED variant 60 luminaires max: 3 LED variant
DRI CV 40W24V-GT 10W 24V constant voltage electronic driver with IP67 ground recessed box
6 luminaires max: 9 LED variant 18 luminaires max: 3 LED variant
DRI CV 10W24V-RD 40W 24V constant voltage electronic driver with IP67 ground recessed box 24 luminaires max: 9 LED variant 60 luminaires max: 3 LED variant
DRI CV 40W24V-RD It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 22cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation
Technical Data
Uplight
High power uplight Current: 700mA Power: 3.2W Average luminous flux 65 lumens (white) 14 lumens (blue) The High Power Portea requires a constant current driver All other Portea variants require a constant voltage driver High power uplight
Single window
Triple window
Optical Distribution High power uplight
Can withstand a load of: 7500kg vehicle travelling at 18mph 2000kg static Glass Temperature
6°Narrow beam
Max – All versions
35°
Dimensions mm
Weight kg
A•
B
C
D
Window
157
108
125
140
0.51
Uplight
157
88
125
140
0.51
•includes ground box
Aspen Court, Cottisford, Northants
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
174 Architectural
Renza LED
Architectural 175
Product Codes Example 1. Model REN
REN
2. Style 1
Single Window
2
Double Window
4
Four Window
2
3. Light Source WW
Warm White 3000K
NW
Neutral White 4000K
CW
Cool White 6000K
WW
RAL 9005 Black
26
RAL 9006 Aluminium
20
RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey
Example Code = REN 2 WW 20
Installation and Maintenance
Single window Double window Four window
Access via Allen screws
20
Renza LED
Glazing: Internally structured toughened glass
IP67 | IK10 | CLASS I
Light source: Warm White 3000K Neutral White 4000K Cool White 6000K
• LED Window marker light, offers different lit effects for pedestrian or trafficked areas
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 9006 Aluminium RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey Optical control: 1, 2 or 4 x 1W LED Internal prismatic lens
4. Colour 10
Options
• Three window apertures options • Available in a choice of white LEDs It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 30cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation
Materials Body: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium
Must not be installed in a recess
Bezel: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium
Driver is integral to the luminaire
Sump: Nylon Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated
Comes complete with M16 plastic cable gland and 25cm of cable pre-wired Supplied with an IP68 gel filled connector with loop in/loop out capability for flexible cables Optional accessories IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01
Optical Distribution Single window
Double window
Technical Data Single window
Double window
Four window
Four window
Can withstand a load of: 2000kg vehicle travelling at 12mph 2000kg static
Dimensions mm
Weight kg
A
B
C
D
113
180
160
33
1.4
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
176 Architectural
Product Codes
Options
Installation and Maintenance
Example
Single window Double window
Access via Allen screws
PET
Glazing: Curved etched toughened glass
S
Light source: 35W CDM-T 18, 26W PL-C
035C
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 9006 Aluminium RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey
1. Model PET 2. Style S
Single Window
D
Double Window
3. Light Source 035C
35W CDM-T
018P
18W PL-C
026P
26W PL-C
Materials
4. Colour 10
RAL 9005 Black
26
RAL 9006 Aluminium
20
RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey
Example Code = PET S 035C 10
10
Body: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium
Petra IP67 | IK10 | CLASS I • Performance windowed light, for defining the borders of paths or trafficked areas • Choice of single or double apertures • Convex etched glass gives diffuse lit effect
It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 40cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation
Bezel: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium Sump: Nylon Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated
Must not be installed in a recess
Comes complete with M16 plastic cable gland and 25cm of cable pre-wired Supplied with an IP68 gel filled connector with loop in/loop out capability for flexible cables Optional accessories IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01
ØA
Optical Distribution
B
Single window
D
Petra
Architectural 177
Plan view
Technical Data Single window
Double window
Double window
ØC
Plan view
Can withstand a load of: 2500kg vehicle travelling at 6mph 2000kg static
Dimensions mm
Weight kg
A
B
C
D
225
260
150
215
3.8
Bengeworth School, Evesham
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Architectural 179
Capra Range
Capra Range Enhance visual characteristics Features
• Choice of light sources including LED
The Capra range of in-ground up-lighters allows a wide range of effects to be achieved from the glow of a marker light to floodlighting a building façade or highlighting architectural features. Capra’s breadth encompasses three different versions: Capra-Mini, for low level lighting; Capra and Capra-Compact for more impactful up-lighting. Capra-Compact allows equivalent outputs to Capra, for where the installation depth is limited.
• Asymmetric and symmetric distributions • Fixed and adjustable reflectors • Small, large and compact versions • Stainless steel or painted bezel options
A choice of light sources, including performance LEDs, combined with an array of beam distributions, gives total design freedom. Static or adjustable reflectors and beam focussing offers additional flexibility, for on-site finetuning for maximum impact.
Capra range available with LED and conventional light sources
Bengeworth School, Evesham
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
180 Architectural
Product Codes
Options
Installation and Maintenance
Example
Metal Halide Maximum lamp wattage – 20W
Access via Allen screws
CPM
Compact Fluorescent Maximum lamp wattage – 10W
1. Model CPM
CPM
CPM
2. Light Source 020C
10W PL-C WW
Warm White LED 3000K
CW
Cool White LED 6000K
CW
N
Narrow Beam – 6°
N
E
Elliptical Beam – 50 x 10°
3. Optical Control N
W
Asymmetric Beam
4. Colour 7
7
7
Stainless Steel
AX
AX
AX
RAL 7039 Quartz Grey
Example Code = CPM CW N AX
Optical Distribution Narrow beam 20W CDM-TM
Narrow beam LED
±7º Adjustable
6º beam
LED Maximum wattage – 6.6W
• Mini version of Capra for lighting small features or way marking
Glazing: Clear toughened glass Frosted toughened glass available on request
• Available in LED, metal halide and compact fluorescent
Gear, switching and control: Electronic gear as standard – Lamped version Complete with mains voltage power supply – LED version
Wide Beam – 115°
A
IP67 | IK09 | CLASS II
Asymmetric Maximum lamp wattage – 20W
20W CDM-TM 010P
Capra-Mini
AX
Light source: 20W CDM-T 10W PL-T 6 x 1.1W LED
• Choice of white LED colour temperatures
It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 30cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation
• Adjustable optic for accurate focussing
Must not be installed in a recess
Colours: RAL 7039 Quartz Grey Grade 316 Stainless Steel
Supplied with an IP68 gel filled connector with loop in/loop out capability for flexible cables
Optical control: Narrow beam Elliptical beam Wide beam Asymmetric reflector
Comes complete with M20 plastic cable gland and 25cm of cable pre-wired Optional accessories IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01
Materials Body: Techno Polymer Bezel: Painted aluminium or stainless steel bezel Sump: Techno Polymer Seals: Anti-ageing silicone gasket
±7º Adjustable
10º beam
±7º Adjustable
50º x 10º Elliptical beam
Elliptical beam LED
LED
Wide beam 10W PL-C ØA
Technical Data
B
Capra-Mini
Architectural 181
115º beam
Asymmetric reflector 20W CDM-TM
Metal Halide
Can withstand a load of: 6000kg vehicle travelling at 18mph 2000kg static
±7º Adjustable
100º beam Imax 8º
80°
Compact Fluorescent
52°
6 LED
40°
Asymmetric
C
Glass Temperature 20W CDM-TM
Compact Fluorescent
Dimensions mm
All Versions
Weight kg
A
B
190
275
2.8
Capra Bentley Showroom, Leicester
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
182 Architectural
Product Codes Capra 1
Access via Allen screws
Capra 2
Capra 3
Example
CA2
CA3
CA1
Capra 2 – Compact Fluorescent Maximum lamp wattage: 42W
2. Light Source 035C
35W CDM-T
070C
70W CDM-T 018P
18W PL-C
042P
42W PL-T 070TD
035C
70W HQI-TS
3. Optical Control N
Narrow Beam – 6°
M
Medium Beam – 50° x 10°
W
Installation and Maintenance
Capra 1 – Metal Halide Maximum lamp wattage: 70W
1. Model CA1
Options
W
M
Wide Beam – 115° A
Asymmetric Beam
4. Colour 7
7
7
Stainless Steel
AX
AX
AX
RAL 7039 Quartz Grey
Example Code = CA1 035C M 7
7
Capra IP67 | IK10 | CLASS II
Capra 3 – Asymmetric Maximum lamp wattage: 70W Glazing: Clear toughened glass
• In-ground up-light for low level marker or high powered accent lighting
Frosted toughened glass available on request
• Range of beam distributions and adjustable optics, allowing on-site focussing
Gear, switching and control: Magnetic gear Electronic control gear available on request
• Available in metal halide or compact fluorescent versions
It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 30cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation
• Choice of stainless steel or painted aluminium bezels
Light source: 35, 70W CDM-T 18W PL-C 42W PL-T Colours: RAL 7039 Quartz Grey Grade 316 Stainless Steel
Must not be installed in a recess
Comes complete with PG16 plastic cable gland and 25cm of cable pre-wired
Optical control: Narrow beam Medium beam Wide beam Asymmetric reflector
Optical Distribution
Materials
Capra 1 – Metal halide 35W, 70W CDM-T
Body: Extruded aluminium
Supplied with an IP68 gel filled connector with loop in/loop out capability for flexible cables Optional accessories IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01
Bezel: Painted aluminium or stainless steel bezel Sump: PVC Seals: Silicone rubber
Adjustable optic ±10° Narrow beam 10°
Adjustable optic ±10° Medium beam 30°
Capra 1 Adjustable optic ±10° Wide beam 50°
Capra 2 – Compact fluorescent 18W PL-C, 42W PL-T
Metal Halide
Technical Data ØA
Fixed lamp position
Wide beam 115°
Capra 3 – Asymmetric 70W HQI-TS
Adjustable optic ±10° Imax 30° Wide beam 70°
Can withstand a load of: 7500kg vehicle travelling at 18mph 2500kg static
B
Capra
Architectural 183
Capra 2
Capra 3
Compact Fluorescent
Asymmetric
Glass Temperature 35W CDM-T
83°
70W CDM-T
106°
18W PL-C
51°
42W PL-T
87°
70W HQI-TS
107°
C Dimensions mm
All Versions
Weight kg
A
B
C
270
354
250
7.7 (max)
Bengeworth School, Evesham
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
184 Architectural
Product Codes
Options
Installation and Maintenance
Example
Metal Halide Maximum lamp wattage: 70W
Access via Allen screws
CPC
LED Maximum wattage: 16.5W
1. Model CPC
CPC
CPC
2. Light Source 035C
35W CDM-T
070C
70W CDM-T 070TD
035C
Warm White LED 3000K
CW
Cool White LED 6000K
N
N
Narrow Beam – 10°
M
M
Medium Beam – 30°
M
7
7
Stainless Steel
AX
AX
AX
RAL 7039 Quartz Grey
• Available in LED and Metal Halide • Choice of white LED colour temperatures
7
Optical Control: Narrow beam Medium beam Elliptical beam Asymmetric reflector
Example Code = CPC 035C M 7
Optical Distribution
Must not be installed in a recess
Product can be loop in/out cabled (using flexible cable) directly into an IP68 rated gear housing, located in the sump
Materials
Narrow beam 35W, 70W CDM-T
Supplied with mains voltage power supply
Body: Die cast aluminium Bezel: Painted aluminium or stainless steel bezel
Supplied with an IP68 gel filled connector with loop in/loop out capability for flexible cables
Sump: Techno polymer Adjustable optic ±10°
• Wide range of beam angles, adjustable optic or asymmetric distributions
It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 30cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation
Colours: RAL 7039 Quartz Grey Grade 316 Stainless Steel Bezel
Asymmetric Beam
4. Colour 7
• Compact version of the Capra range, suitable for installations with confined depth
LED: 15 x 1.1W Warm White 3000K Cool White 6000K
Wide Beam – 50° x 10° A
Compact sump allows shallow installation
Light source: 35W CDM-T 70W CDM-T 70W HQI-TS
3. Optical Control
W
IP67 | IK10 | CLASS I
Glazing: Clear toughened glass Frosted toughened glass available on request
70W HQI-TS WW
Capra-Compact
Seals: Silicone rubber
10° Beam
Optional accessories IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01
Narrow beam LED
10°Beam
Medium beam 35W, 70W CDM-T
C
30° Beam
B
Adjustable optic ±10°
E
D
ØA
Elliptical beam LED
Technical Data
F
Asymmetric reflector HQI-TS
B
50º x 10º Beam
Can withstand a load of: 7500kg vehicle travelling at 18mph 2500kg static Glass Temperature
Adjustable optic ±10°
70° Beam Imax 30°
E
D
ØA
C
Capra-Compact
Architectural 185
LED
45°
35W CDM-T
80°
70W HQI-TS
119°
Shallow, 165mm installation depth F Dimensions mm
Weight kg
A
B
C
D
E
F
274
114
165
346
500
661
11.7 max
Capra City of Sunderland College & St. Peter's Sixth Form
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
186 Architectural
Product Codes Version 1
Access via Allen screws
Version 2
Example
CAS
CAS
Version 2 220mm Ø – 7 x 1W LEDs
2. Light Source 3 7
7 LEDs – 220mmØ
7
NB
Narrow Beam – 10°
NB
MB
Medium Beam – 35°
WB
Wide Beam – 50°
4. LED Type WW
WW
Warm White 3000K
NW
NW
Neutral White 4000K
CW
CW
Cool White 6000K
Example Code = CAS 7 NB NW
NW
Cassia LED IP67 | IK09 | CLASS I | CLASS II
Glazing: Clear toughened glass
3 LEDs – 130mmØ
3. Optical Control NB
Installation and Maintenance
Version 1 130mm Ø – 3 x 1W LEDs
1. Model CAS
Options
220mm Version
130mm Version
Gear, switching and control: 24V Power supply required for 130mm Ø
• Circular in-ground LED feature up-lighting
Complete with mains voltage driver for 220mm Ø
• Choice of narrow, medium or wide beam distributions
Light source: Warm White 3000K Neutral White 4000K Cool White 6000K
• Durable construction to withstand vehicular traffic
It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 40cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation
• Robust stainless steel body ideal for harsh environments
Colour: Stainless Steel Optical control: Narrow beam Medium beam Wide beam Adjustable reflector (220mmØ)
Must not be installed in a recess
Supplied with an IP68 gel filled connector with loop in/loop out capability for flexible cables
Materials Body: Stainless steel
Product is supplied with 25cm of cable to allow easy installation
Bezel: Stainless steel Sump: Nylon
Optional accessories
Seals: Silicone rubber
20W 24V constant voltage electronic driver with IP67 ground recessed box (6 luminaires max) DRI CV 40W24V-RD IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01
Optical Distribution Version 1 – 130mm Ø
Narrow beam 10°
ØB Wide beam 50°
Technical Data
A
Version 2 – 220mm Ø
Narrow beam 10°
Adjustable optic ±10°
Can withstand a load of: 6000kg vehicle travelling at 9mph 2000kg static Glass Temperature Medium beam 35°
Version 2 220mmØ
C
Cassia LED
Architectural 187
Adjustable optic ±10°
Max – All versions
45°
Dimensions mm
Weight kg
A
B
C
1
130
88
120
1
2
220
185
150
3
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
188 Architectural
Product Codes Lyra 1 Symmetric & asymmetric
Lyra 1 Adjustable
Example
1. Model LYR1
LYR1
LYR1
2. Optical Control S
Symmetric
A
S
Asymmetric V
Adjustable
3. Colour 070HD
70W HQI-TS 070C
070C
Lyra 2 Asymmetric
Example
LYR2
LYR2
1. Model LYR2
Installation and Maintenance
Lyra 1 Maximum lamp wattage: 70W
Access via Allen screws
2. Optical Control
IP67 | IK10 | CLASS I
Glazing: Clear toughened glass Light source: 70W HQI-TS 35, 70W CDM-T 18, 26W PL-C
• In-ground up-light for wall-washing or highlighting trees
Colour: Stainless Steel Bezel
• Robust stainless steel bezel for improved daytime appearance
• Choice of symmetric, asymmetric or adjustable optics
Symmetric A
S
Asymmetric
Materials Body: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium Must not be installed in a recess
Sump: Nylon
Comes complete with two M20 plastic cable glands and 25cm of cable pre-wired
Seals: Silicone rubber
3. Light Source 035C
035C
35W CDM-T
018P
18W PL-C
026P
26W PL-C
• Durable construction to withstand vehicular traffic
It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 45cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation
Bezel: Stainless steel
S
Lyra
Lyra 2 Maximum lamp wattage: 35W
Optical control: Symmetric reflector Asymmetric reflector Adjustable reflector (+/-15°)
70W CDM-T
Example Code = LYR1 S 070C
Lyra 2 Symmetric
Options
Supplied with an IP68 gel filled connector with loop in/loop out capability for flexible cables
035C
Optional accessories
Example Code = LYR2 S 035C
IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01
Lyra 2
Optical Distribution
ØB
Lyra 1
A
Technical Data
C
Lyra
Architectural 189
Symmetric optic
Asymmetric optic
Adjustable optic ±15°
Can withstand the load of: 2500kg vehicle travelling at 12mph
Lyra 2
Lyra 1
Glass Temperature
Symmetric optic
Asymmetric optic
Dimensions mm
Weight kg
35W CDM-T
105°
70W CDM-T
115°
A
B
C
18W PL-C
50°
1
320
302
400
11.3
26W PL-C
62°
2
219
220
270
3.5
Orchard Theatre, Dartford
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
190 Architectural
Product Codes
Options
Installation and Maintenance
Example
Circular version 310mm Ø 117mm in depth
Access via Allen screws
MAN
Square version 310mm 117mm in depth
1. Model MAN 2. Style C
Circular Version
S
Square Version
C
3. Optical Control N
Narrow Beam – 10°
M
Medium Beam – 30°
N
4. Light Source WW
Warm White 3000K
NW
Neutral White 4000K
CW
Cool White 6000K
Example Code = MAN C N NW
NW
Mano LED IP67 | IK09 | CLASS I
Glazing: Clear toughened glass
• Performance, in-ground LED light, ideal for lighting walls or columns
Gear, switching and control: Complete with mains voltage power supply
• Choice of square or circular versions with stainless steel bezel
Dimmable versions available upon request Light source: Warm White 3000K Neutral White 4000K Cool White 6000K
It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 30cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation
• Durable construction to withstand light vehicular traffic
Colour: Stainless Steel Optical control: Narrow beam Medium beam
Must not be installed in a recess
Materials
Product comes with 25cm prewired flexible cable and M20 plastic cable gland
Body: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium
LED Driver is integral to the luminaire
Bezel: Stainless steel
Supplied with an IP68 gel filled connector with loop in/loop out capability for flexible cables
Sump: Nylon Seals: Silicone rubber
Optional Accessories IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01
Optical Distribution Both versions
Technical Data B A
C
Mano LED
Architectural 191
D
Narrow beam 10°
Can withstand a load of: 6000kg vehicle travelling at 9mph 2000kg static Glass Temperature Medium beam 30°
Max – All versions
45°
Dimensions mm
Weight kg
A
B
C
Circular
117
310
120
D
Square
117
310
120 405
405 5.0 5.2
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
192 Architectural
Monza
Architectural 193
Product Codes Asymmetric
Narrow beam
Example
MON
MON
1. Model MON 2. Light Source 070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT
070T
070S
70W CDM-TD / SON-TD 035C
35W CDM-T
070C
70W CDM-T
042P 2. Frame F
F
With glazing frame
N
N
Without glazing frame
N
Asymmetric
A
3. Reflector N
Narrow Beam – 15°
Example Code = MON 070S N A
Installation and Maintenance
Monza with frame For surface mounting Maximum lamp wattage: 70W
Access via Allen screws
Monza
Monza without frame For flush mounting Maximum lamp wattage: 70W
IP67 | IK10 | CLASS II
Glazing: Toughened glass Low temperature glass fitted as standard to all version except 42W PL-T option
42W PL-T
A
Options
• In-ground up-light for washing light up vertical architectural features • Choice of narrow or medium beam
Light source: 70W SON-T+, CDO-TT 70W CDM-TD, SON-TD 35W CDM-T 70W CDM-T 42W PL-T
• User adjustable narrow beam reflector allows 0 to -10° adjustment for accurate focusing
It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 30cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation
• Available frameless for mounting flush with the ground or with marine grade stainless steel frame • Durable construction to withstand vehicular traffic
Colour: Stainless Steel Optical control: Asymmetric wide beam
Must not be installed in a recess
Narrow beam with adjustable reflector
Cable Entry via two M20 glands for Ø10 – 14mm round cable Supplied with an IP68 gel filled connector with loop in/loop out capability for flexible cables
Materials Body: Technopolymer Bezel: Grade 316 Stainless Steel Sump: Technopolymer
Optional accessories IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01
Seals: Silicone rubber
Optical Distribution Asymmetric reflector 42W PL-T 70W SON-T+/CDO-TT 70W CDM-TD/SON-TD
Technical Data
Without frame Medium beam 60°
Imax 10°
Narrow beam reflector 35, 70W CDM-T
Adjustable optic +10º – 0º
Can withstand a load of: 12000kg vehicle travelling at 18mph 3000kg static Glass Temperature
Narrow beam 15°
42W PL-T
55°
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT
70°
70W CDM-TD/SON-TD
80°
35W CDM-T
64°
A
B
70W CDM-T
110°
305
255
Dimensions mm
Weight kg
8.0
Luton Hoo Hotel, Bedfordshire
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
194 Architectural
Product Codes
Options
Installation and Maintenance
Example
Version 1 645mm – 12 LED
Access via Allen screws
MAL
Version 2 1245mm – 24 LED
1. Model MAL 2. No of LEDs 12 (645mm)
24
24 (1245mm)
24
N
Narrow Beam – 10°
N
M
Medium Beam – 30°
3. Optical Control
4. LED Type WW
Warm White 3000K
NW
Neutral White 4000K
CW
Cool White 6000K
Example Code = MAL 24 N NW
NW
Malo LED IP67 | IK09 | CLASS II
Glazing: Clear toughened glass
12
• Linear LED in-ground light, for wall washing in pedestrian areas
Gear, switching and control: Complete with mains voltage power supply
• Two lengths available, each offering narrow or medium beam angles for different lit effects
Light source: LED: 12 or 24 x 1W Warm White 3000K Neutral White 4000K Cool White 6000K
• Fixed symmetric or asymmetric distribution • Available in a choice of white LEDs
Colours: RAL 9006 Aluminium Optical control: Adjustable symmetric distribution It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 25cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation
Materials Body: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium Bezel: Aluminium Sump: Nylon Seals: Silicone rubber
Must not be installed in a recess
Cable entry via PG13.5 gland for Ø9 – 12mm round cable Supplied with two cable glands to allow loop-in, loop-out wiring
Optical Distribution Version 1 – 645mm
Adjustable optic ±12° Narrow beam 10°
B A
Adjustable optic ±12° Medium beam 30° C
Malo LED
Architectural 195
Version 2 – 1245mm D E
Adjustable optic ±12° Narrow beam 10°
Technical Data Dimensions mm
Walkover only: Maximum static load of 1500kg Glass Temperature Adjustable optic ±12° Medium beam 30°
All versions
45°
Weight kg
A
B
C
D
E
1
79
645
95
835
95
3.9
2
79 1245 95 1435 95
6.9
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
196 Architectural
Luca
Architectural 197
Product Codes
Options
Installation and Maintenance
Example
Luca Maximum lamp wattage: 24W
Access via Allen screws
LUC
Glazing: Toughened glass
1. Model LUC 2. Optical Control A
Asymmetric
S
Symmetric
14W T5 HE
024T
24W T5 HO
7
Stainless Steel
• For individual use or creating continuous lines of light for walk or drive over applications
Colours: RAL 9006 Aluminium Grade 316 Stainless Steel
4. Colour RAL 9006 Aluminium
• Linear fluorescent up-light for subtle wall washing
Light source: 14W T5 High efficiency 28W T5 High output
014T
26
IP67 | IK09 | CLASS II
Gear, Switching and Control: Electronic gear
A
3. Light Source 014T
Luca • Choice of asymmetric or symmetric distribution
Optical control: Asymmetric reflector Symmetric reflector
26
Example Code = LUC A 014T 26
Materials Body: Technopolymer Frame: Die cast aluminium or stainless steel 316
• Symmetrical version provides non-slip glazing and low surface temperature, making it ideal for pedestrian areas • Durable construction to withstand vehicular traffic
It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 25cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation
Sump: Technopolymer Seals: Silicone rubber
Must not be installed in a recess
Cable entry via PG13 gland for Ø9 – 12mm round cable Supplied with an IP68 gel filled connector with loop in/loop out capability for flexible cables Optional accessories IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01
Technical Data Up to five Luca with the aluminium frame, or ten with the stainless steel frame, can be installed in a continuous line by using the Joining Accessory. This number is restricted only by the effects of thermal expansion outdoors. In an interior application, up to 50 can be joined together over a distance of 200m. Due to electrical limitations the following is a guide to the maximum number of products per circuit:
Joining accessories: Aluminium: LUC-JA-26 Stainless Steel: LUC-JA-07
Up to 90 14W Luca may be connected over a distance of 75m Up to 70 24W Luca may be connected over a distance of 60m
Optical Distribution Can withstand a load of: 12000kg vehicle travelling at 18mph 3000kg static Glass Temperature Symmetric
Asymmetric
All versions
47°
Dimensions mm
Weight kg
A
B
C
D
670
630
150
130
4.5
Luton Hoo Hotel, Bedfordshire
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
198 Architectural
Reno
Architectural 199
Product Codes Example 1. Model REN
REN
2. Light Source 014T
14W T5 HE
021T
21W T5 HO
028T
28W T5 HE
035T
35W T5 HE
024T
24W T5 HO
039T
39W T5 HO
049T
49W T5 HO
054T
54W T5 HO
080T
80W T5 HO
Example Code = REN 014T
014T
Options
Installation and Maintenance
Reno Maximum lamp wattage: 80W
Access via quick release latches
Glazing: Toughened glass Gear, Switching and Control: Electronic gear Light source: 14, 21, 28, 35W T5 High efficiency 24, 39, 49, 54, 80W T5 High output Mounting: Bracket mounted Colour: Anodised/RAL 9006 Aluminium Optical control: Two position reflector allows for narrow (62 – 64º) or wide (70 – 78º) distributions
Materials Body: Anodised extruded aluminium with die cast aluminium ends finished RAL 9006 Aluminium Brackets: Die cast aluminium finished RAL 9006 Aluminium Seals: Silicone rubber
Reno
Cable entry via two M18 glands for Ø8 – 10.5mm round cable Supplied with two cable glands to allow loop-in, loop-out wiring
IP66 | IK07 | CLASS II
Supplied with a pair of cast aluminium supports which provide adjustment of ±12º either side of vertical
• Surface mounted linear fluorescent luminaire • Wide range of T5 lamps from 14W – 80W
May be wall mounted on adjustable brackets, which are available as 100mm or 300mm projection. Reno can be tilted on these brackets to any setting on an arc of 240º for the 100mm bracket or 260º for the 300mm bracket. This allows the Reno to be directed at the wall to illuminate signage, the mounting surface etc
• Reflector adjusts on-site to narrow or wide beam distribution • Adjustable wall or ceiling mounting brackets allow adjustment of light through an arc of 240º
A number of Reno can be connected over a maximum distance of 60m from the mains supply to the final product Optional accessories Adjustable wall brackets 100mm RNO-WBA-100 Adjustable wall brackets 300mm RNO-WBA-300
Optical Distribution Dimensions mm
Side view
End view
Weight kg
A
B
C
700, 1000, 1300 & 1600
90
105
4.9 (max)
Salonika Church, St. Dimitar, Veliko Tarnovo, Bulgaria
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
200 Architectural
Product Codes Example
Options
Installation and Maintenance
Angled
For ease of installation product comes pre-wired with 1m of flexible cable
Flat
1. Model PHW
PHW
Glazing: Diffused Acrylic
A
Gear, switching and control: Integral LED driver
2. Height A
Angled
F
Flat
3. Colour DB
DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey
DB
B
With 180°back shield
B
N
Without 180°back shield
4. Back Shield
Example Code = PHW A DB B
Pharola-Wall IP65 | IK10 | CLASS I • Wall mounted luminaire using high efficiency, side emitting LEDs
Light source: LED Neutral White – 4100K
• Angled or flat mounted versions • Consistent scheme design can be achieved using Pharola bollards (see pages 228 – 229)
Colour: DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9005 Textured Black RAL 9016 Textured White Optical control: 5 x 2.4W LED High Efficiency Side Emitting Lens
Materials Head: Corrosion protected aluminium Glazing: Acrylic Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated
B
A
Optical Distribution C
Angled
A
B
Flat
DB
27
26
10
Dimensions mm
RAL 9016
RAL 9005
RAL 9006
RAL 9007
ØC
DB 703
Pharola-Wall
Architectural 201
40
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
Weight kg
A
B
C
Angled
300
600
178
8.0
Flat
210
275
89
7.3
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
202 Architectural
Kona
Architectural 203
Product Codes Example 1. Model KON
KON
2. Optical Control N
Narrow Beam – 10°
M
Medium Beam – 30°
W
Wide Beam – 70°
35W CDM-T
070C
70W CDM-T
150C
150W CDM-T
M
070C
4. Colour 10
RAL 9005 Black
26
RAL 9006 Aluminium
Installation and Maintenance
Kona Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
Access via Allen screws
Glazing: Toughened glass Gear: Electronic gear, some models
3. Light Source 035C
Options
10
Example Code = KON M 070C 10
Kona
Product is supplied with M16 gland for Ø5 – 10mm round cable Control gear is integral to the luminaire
IP66 | IK08 | CLASS I | CLASS II Electronic Gear
Light source: 35W CDM-T (Electronic Gear) 70W CDM-T (Electronic Gear) 150W CDM-T (Magnetic Gear)
Magnetic Gear
• Wall mounted spot light with three beam angled versions to create different lit effects
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 9006 Aluminium
• The head adjusts in two planes: 90º vertical and 180º horizontal • Optional light hood offers additional control
Optical control: Narrow beam Medium beam Wide beam
• Pole mounting can be achieved using additional bracket
Materials Body: Die cast aluminium Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated Optional accessories Light Hood Black: KLH-10 Aluminium: KLH-26 Pole Mounting Bracket (to fit pole Ø60 – Ø76) Black: KPB-10 Aluminium: KPB-26
Optional Light Hood
Optical Distribution
Dimensions mm Narrow beam 10º
Medium beam 30º
Wide beam 70º
Weight kg
A
B
C
D
480
165
255
125
5.8
Bergamo, Italy
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
204 Architectural
Vertica LED
Architectural 205
Product Codes Example 1. Model VERL
VERL 70mm Ø 2
070
Glazing: Clear toughened glass
110mm Ø
01
01
1 Way
02
02
2 Way
02
NB
Narrow Beam – 10°
NB
MB
Medium Beam – 30°
4. Optical Control
WB
Wide Beam – 50°
5. Light Source WW
WW
Warm White 3000K
NW
NW
Neutral White 4000K
CW
CW
Cool White 6000K
10
10
RAL 9005 Black
26
26
RAL 9006 Aluminium
20
20
RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey
40
40
RAL 9016 White
Access via Allen screws
Vertica LED 2 110mm Ø
3. Light Emission
NB
Installation and Maintenance
Vertica LED 1 70mm Ø
VERL
2. Style 1
Options
WW
6. Colour 10
Vertica LED
Cable entry via rubber cable gland Driver is integral to the luminaire
IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I | CLASS II (110mm Ø)
(70mm Ø)
Gear, switching and control: Complete with mains voltage power supply
• Wall mounted for wall washing or accent lighting
Light source: LED Array
• Choice of single or dual emission for different lighting effects
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 9006 Aluminium RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 9106 White
• Available with three beam angles • Available in two sizes • See pages 206 – 207 for lamped versions
Optical control: Narrow beam Medium beam Wide beam Vertica LED 1 3 x 1W LED per window Vertica LED 2 5 x 1W LED per window
Example Code = VERL 070 02 NB WW 10
Materials Body: Die cast aluminium Seals: Silicone rubber gaskets Finish: Polyester powder coated
Optical Distribution Vertica LED 1 – 70mm Ø
Narrow beam 10°
Wide beam 50°
Vertica LED 2 – 100mm Ø
Narrow beam 10° Dimensions mm
Medium beam 30°
Weight kg
A
B
C
Vertica LED 1
220
120
70
1.5
Vertica LED 2
400
170
110
2.1
Lamped Vertica Clivedon Road, Buckinghamshire
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
206 Architectural
Vertica
Architectural 207
Product Codes Tall
Short
Example
1. Model VERT
VERS
VERT
2. Light Source 035C
035C
070C
35W CDM-T
035C
70W CDM-T
3. Light Output 01
01
1 Way
02
02
2 Way
02
Narrow Beam – 16°
NB
4. Beam Angle NB MB WB
Medium Beam – 30° Wide Beam – 100°
5. Colour 10
10
RAL 9005 Black
26
26
RAL 9006 Aluminium
20
20
RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey
40
40
RAL 9016 White
Example Code = VERT 035C 02 NB 10
10
Options
Installation and Maintenance
Vertica Tall Maximum lamp wattage – 2 x 70W CDM-T
Access via stainless steel screws
Vertica Short Maximum lamp wattage – 1 x 35W CDM-T
Vertica
Wiring via two rubber glands for flexible cable
IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I
Glazing: Clear toughened glass
• Wall mounted for wall washing or accent lighting
Light source: Vertica Tall 1 x or 2 x 35W, 70W CDM-T
• Choice of single or dual emission for different lighting effects
Vertica Short 1 x 35W CDM-T
• Two height options
• Available with three beam angles • See pages 204 – 205 for LED versions
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 9006 Aluminium RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 9106 White Optical control: Vertica Tall Wide beam Narrow beam
Vertica Tall
Vertica Short Medium beam
Materials Body: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium Seals: Silicone rubber gaskets Finish: Polyester powder coated
Optical Distribution Vertica short
Medium beam 30°
Vertica tall
Vertica Short Narrow beam 16º Dimensions mm
Wide beam 100°
Weight kg
A
B
C
Short
280
265
180
4.8
Tall
500
265
180
8.8
Vertica Short St. Martin’s Quarter, Worcester
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
208 Architectural
Vertica Talbot Green Retail Park, Wales
Architectural 209
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
210 Architectural
Tatra
Architectural 211
Product Codes Example 1. Model TAR
TAR
2. Light Source 018P
18W PL-T
W
White LED
W
3. Colour 10
RAL 9005 Black
26
RAL 9006 Aluminium
20
RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey
40
RAL 9016 White
Example Code = TAR W 20
20
Options
Installation and Maintenance
Tatra Tatra LED
Access via Allen screws
Glazing: Sandblasted glass Light source: 18W PL-T White LED
Tatra
LED version: driver is integral to the luminaire Cable entry via M20 gland for Ø10 – 14mm round cable
IP65 | IK07 | CLASS I • Surface mounted low level marker, to define the borders of paths or buildings
Mounting: Flange plate
• For mounting directly on the ground or on walls
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 9006 Aluminium RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 9016 White
• Subtle lit effect created by diffusing light through sandblasted glass • Choice of compact fluorescent or LED light source
Materials Body: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated
Aluminium finish
Optical Distribution Tatra
Tatra LED Dimensions mm
Weight kg
A
B
210
200
2.4 (max)
Stanhope Road, St Albans
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
212 Architectural
Aventis
Architectural 213
Product Codes Large
Small
Example
1. Model AVL
AVS
P
Plain
E
E
Eyelid
1 x 28W 2D
038D
1 x 38W 2D
028DE
1 x 28W 2D EMR
038DE
P
Glazing: UV stabilised opal polycarbonate diffuser
1 x 10W PL-C
013P
1 x 13W PL-C
018P
1 x 18W PL-C
218P
LED
LED Array
LEDE
LEDE
LED Array EMR
10
10
Black
82
82
Aluminium
LED
• Tough polycarbonate diffuser for protection against vandalism • Now available in LED as well as compact fluorescent • Motion detection sensors for further energy savings • Emergency versions available
Materials Body: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium
4. Colour
Example Code = AVL P LED 10
• Surface mounted luminaire to light the exterior of buildings
Other: Motion detection version for LED option available on request
2 x 26W PL-C
LED
IP65 | IK10 | CLASS I
LED version: driver is integral to the luminaire
Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 9006 Aluminium
2 x 18W PL-C
226P
Aventis
Supplied with two M16 glands to allow loop-in, loop-out wiring for flexible cable only
Light source: LED Array LED Array EMR (integral emergency) 28, 38W 2D EMR (integral emergency) 1 x 10, 1 x 13, 1 x 18W PL-C 2 x 18, 2 x 26W PL-C
1 x 38W 2D EMR 010P
Access for relamping via Allen screws
Aventis Small Maximum lamp wattage: 1 x 18W
3. Light Source 028D
Installation and Maintenance
Aventis Large Maximum lamp wattage: 2 x 26W
AVL
2. Style P
Options
10
Diffuser: UV stabilised opal polycarbonate Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated Control Gear: High frequency electronic
Aventis Eyelid
Optical Distribution Plain
Dimensions mm
Eyelid
Weight kg
Large
A
Plain
360
145
3.7
Eyelid
360
155
4.5
Dimensions mm
B
•with emergency gear
Weight kg
Small
A
B
4.7•
Plain
265
100
1.5
5.5•
Eyelid
265
105
1.9
Plain
Kingshill Retail Centre, Kent
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Illuminated LED Handrail 215
Illuminated LED Handrail Market-leading performance
Providing a bespoke concept to completion solution
Design Philosophy
Garda LED Handrail
216 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 217
218 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 219
How to Illuminate Areas using Garda LED Handrail 220 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 221
Bespoke LED handrail and balustrade system engineered to provide a choice of asymmetric or symmetric lighting distributions. Garda LED is manufactured in a durable grade 316 stainless steel and offers specifiers an innovative task-lighting solution with market-leading photometric performance and uniformity. Suitable for a wide range of interior and exterior applications, with an emergency option available, Garda particularly comes into its own where access for maintenance is restricted such as stairways. Providing glare-free lighting, with a downward facing lightsource to eliminate upward light, Garda has an intelligent design that manages voltage drop over distances up to 40m, meaning constant light levels through a single power feed, low energy consumption and negligible maintenance through high-power LEDs. Available in straight, curved or arched sections, with round or square stanchions, a wide selection of in-fill options and finishing details such as a warm-to-touch coating, Garda offers a total solution from concept to completion that includes a full site survey, project management and installation.
Garda with staged dimming to 25% of full output, illuminated both sides with an asymmetric distribution Hyde Park Corner, London
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
216 Illuminated LED Handrail
Illuminated LED Handrail 217
Garda
Award-winning design
Handrail Handrails are typically used to provide guidance, stability or support to pedestrians. Garda is available with an asymmetric or symmetric distribution to best suit your application – whether affixing to a wall or from a more central location through the support of stanchions.
Award for Urban Lighting: Essex Street Steps Hyde Park Corner, London
Essex Street Steps, London
design philosophy
Exterior Luminaire of the Year
Garda key advantages Style • Bespoke welded construction with no visible joints
Balustrade Balustrade is the term used to describe the entire handrail system, including stanchions and infill. As a general rule, any unprotected edge of a walkway, platform, staircase or other raised area from which a person may fall more than 0.5m must be fitted with such a system. Garda’s asymmetric beam angle is ideally suited to such applications and complies with Building Regulations Part K. Light is directed where it is needed, enabling excellent facial recognition whilst minimising light spill into sensitive areas such as waterways, thus reducing any potential impact on wildlife.
Performance • Market-leading photometric performance, with unparalleled uniformity: Garda illuminates pathways in excess of two metres wide • Extremely high strength mechanical design, with a 3mm wall thickness Control • Symmetric distribution with purpose designed high performance prismatic lens
Leominster Station
Lea Bridge Underpass, Hackney
Crayford Waterside, Kent
SCRM Building, Edinburgh
• Genuine asymmetric distribution achieved through purpose-designed micro-reflector and high performance asymmetric prismatic lens
Typical applications Garda provides an excellent solution across a wide range of both internal and external applications. From lighting internal staircases, balconies and ramps to exterior spaces such as bridges, walkways and parks, the Garda LED Illuminated Handrail has the ability to adapt to every setting.
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
218 Illuminated LED Handrail
Garda Working with you
Illuminated LED Handrail 219
Standard Infill Options
From concept to completion, DW Windsor provides a comprehensive service including: • Full site survey • Lighting and structural design • Custom manufacture • Installation by our specialist stainless steel contractors • Full project management and technical guidance
Glass
Please contact us on 01992 474600 for further information on the full range of services provided for Garda or see dww-garda.com/dwwindsor.com
Options
Materials
Linear and flexible modular lengths available: 300mm 600mm 900mm 1200mm
LED Module
Light source: 300mm: 3 LED (3.6W) 600mm: 6 LED (7.2W) 900mm: 9 LED (10.8W) 1200mm: 12 LED (14.4W)
Railing System
L70 lifetime prediction: In excess of 60,000 hours
Installation and Maintenance
Solid Bar
End Caps: Injection moulded polycarbonate
IP66 | IK10 | CLASS III
Glazing: Extruded polycarbonate
• Bespoke LED handrail and balustrade system
Rail and Stanchions: Grade 316 stainless steel with a wall thickness of 3mm
Colour rendering index: 75 / 85Ra
Garda LED illuminated handrail is an integrated, seamlessly welded, bespoke solution and as such requires a high level of expertise and knowledge in its design, fabrication and installation
Optical control: Symmetric distribution – 112º beam angle Asymmetric distribution – 56º beam angle
DW Windsor provides a complete survey, design and installation service as standard to ensure we support your project from concept through to completion
Colour temperature: Neutral White 4000K Warm White 3000K
Garda
Body: Anodised extruded aluminium
• Grade 316 stainless steel • Choice of genuine asymmetric or symmetric distributions providing market-leading uniformity • Straight or flexible modules for straight, curved or arched rails • Available in Warm White 3000K or Neutral White 4000K to suit internal and external applications • Dimmable • Emergency option available
Balusters: Circular stanchions as standard Square and other shapes on request Power supply options: 24V to 48V AC or DC, Class III SELV, 350mA Range of power supplies available Emergency option available (3 hour duration) Other: Anti-tamper screws fitted as standard Warm-to-touch coating available
Tension Wire
A wide selection of infill options and materials are available Please contact us to discuss any special infill requirements
Optical Distribution Asymmetric distribution 56° beam angle
Symmetric distribution 112° beam angle
Please note information shown is not exhaustive and may be subject to change as technology continually evolves or to best suit project requirements
Handrail Dimensions Ø50
3
Hyde Park Corner, London
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
220 Illuminated LED Handrail
Illuminated LED Handrail 221
How to illuminate areas using Garda LED Handrail Essex Street Steps case study
Stair cases
Open footbridges
General information
Wide stair cases with centre handrails should utilise the symmetric distribution modules to provide an even spread of lighting up the centre of a walkway. If required asymmetric modules can be positioned at the sides to increase the coverage further. On narrow flights single sided asymmetric modules will be sufficient to achieve levels in excess of 100lux at ground level.
Footbridges with open side railings such as road or rail bridges should be lit in such a way that modules are facing away from users below the level of the bridge to avoid any unnecessary glare, this practice should also be considered for the users of the bridge itself so as they ascend light sources are directed away from their field of vision as much as practically possible.
Light levels at ground level can be expected at the following distances from the modules:
Stairs with central symmetric and peripheral asymmetric modules provide required levels of light
Ramps & walkways
Before installation – Essex Street Steps, London
Before (see image above) • Uninviting cut-through from Temple tube station to the Royal Courts of Justice • Difficulty with maintaining high level luminaire and short life of lamp used (70W CDO-TT) After (see image left) Single sided asymmetric Garda LED Handrail providing; • Improved public and workforce safety • Reduced carbon footprint through decreased maintenance cycles • Central Management System operated for greater control
Garda LED Handrail, illuminated from one side with an asymmetric distribution Essex Street Steps, London
Generally lighting levels as laid out in the British Standards and the Disability Discrimination Act 2005 can be met from a single sided arrangement on areas up to two metres wide, asymmetric distribution modules should be spaced suitably apart either as wall or balustrade mounted to ensure good ground uniformity between modules. If a walkway is next to a river or area of environmental sensitivity then use of the asymmetric distribution module will ensure light is only placed where it is required, limiting back spill.
0 – 1.25m: 100lux 1.25 – 1.5m: 50lux 1.5 – 1.75m: 25lux
100lux@1.25m 100 – 50lux@1.5m 50 – 25lux@1.75m
Footbridge over rail track. Asymmetric modules face away from the track to avoid drivers experiencing glare from the steps
Continuous lighting In order to provide a good level of uniformity required for the above task areas, the lighting should be as continuous as possible throughout the handrail. Illuminating small sections and curved handrail ensure that there are no dark patches or un-lit areas which lead to reduced uniformity levels and patchy looking lighting.
Control of glare An important factor to consider when lighting open staircases, ramps and walkways is minimalising any glare which may affect the usage of the area. Various methods can be introduced in order to block unwanted light from escaping to areas adjacent to the lighting scheme, but best practice would be to not generate glare in the first instance. Ensuring that any light is focused towards the task areas without having to incline the light source will further reduce the possibilities of creating glare.
Type
Day Eav lux
Night Emin lux
Eav lux
Emin lux
Subways Open
-
-
50
25
Enclosed
350
150
100
50
Footbridges Open
-
-
30
15
Enclosed
350
150
100
50
Stairways / Ramps Open
-
-
30
15
Enclosed
350
150
100
50
NB. Extract taken from BS 5489-1:2003 Table 4
The Garda LED modules provide a genuine asymmetric light output which allows a wide area of footpath or stairway to be illuminated with zero inclination to the LED module. This will provide a glare free lighting solution without having to inline the LED module and expose the bright light emitted from the product.
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Illuminated Bollards 223
Illuminated Bollards Trebem
Lago
Pharola
Pharola-Max
224 – 225
226 – 227
228 – 229
230 – 231
The contrasting styles of our contemporary LED bollards and timeless classics demonstrates the wide scope of this range of illuminated bollards. They offer a solution on their own or in conjunction with our wide range of complementary column-mounted or in-ground products, to define pedestrian entrances and paths or highlight walkways through urban areas. Made to withstand the test of time, these bollards are manufactured from vandal resistant, durable materials with LED options, to ensure longevity of the installation. Designed to complement their surroundings by day they provide good optical control by night.
Precise, timeless engineering Silka-Max Royal Terrace Gardens, Torquay
Silka
Silka-Max
Rona
Nexus & Riga
232 – 235
236 – 237
238 – 239
240 – 241
Polar & Vector
Cannon & Eton
242 – 243
244 – 245
Using LEDs in classic designs demonstrates the wide scope of this range
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
224 Illuminated Bollards
Trebem
Illuminated Bollards 225
Product Codes Example 1. Model TRE
TRE
2. Height
Options
Materials
Trebem 1000mm and 2200mm installation heights Twin LED option lighting both ways
Body: Steel
Trebem
Cover Plate: Steel Finish: Two-pack acrylic wet spray paint
IP65 | IK10 | CLASS I
010
1000mm
022
2200mm
Gear, switching and control: Complete with mains voltage power supply
R
Root
Mounting: With root or flange plate mounting
Supplied with 1 metre of flexible cable for ease of installation
F
Flange Plate
Light source: 3 x 3W LEDs Warm white 3000K Neutral white 4500K Cool white 6000K
Base compartment: Cable access compartment with space for electrical termination available on request
010
3. Mounting R
4. Light Source WW
Warm White LED – 3000K
NW
Neutral White LED – 4500K
CW
Cool White LED – 6000K
WW
5. Colour – for alternative colours see below DB
DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey
Example Code = TRE 010 R WW DB
DB
Colours: DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9005 Textured Black RAL 9016 Textured White Optical control: Performance LED Array
Installation and Maintenance
• Robust steel i-beam with LED array • Base compartment option to allow installation of electrical cut out if required • Two mounting height options
Optional accessories IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01
Optical Distribution
Other: Double sided arrangement available for two-way illumination
2250mm
2000mm
1750mm
1500mm
1250mm
1000mm
750mm
500mm
DB
27
26
10
RAL 9016
RAL 9005
RAL 9006
RAL 9007
DB 703
250mm
40
Dimensions mm This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
Weight kg
A
B
C
260
1000
150
35
260
2200
150
75
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
226 Illuminated Bollards
Lago
Illuminated Bollards 227
Product Codes Example 1. Model LAG
LAG
2. Height
Options
Materials
Lago 1000mm and 1300mm installation heights
Body: Aluminium
Mounting: Flange plate only
010
1000mm
013
1300mm
Glazing: Polycarbonate lens LED module
20
RAL 7016 Antracite Grey
AY
Golden Oak
Gear, switching and control: Low voltage IP67 Driver
010
3. Colour
Example Code = LAG 010 20
20
Light source: 4 LEDs – 9W total Neutral white – 4500K Colours: RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey Golden Oak Optical control: Performance LED Array
Finish: Polyester powder coated
Lago
Glazing: Polycarbonate lens
IP66 | IK10 | CLASS II
Seals: Silicone rubber
Installation and Maintenance Product is supplied with single outgoing flexible cable for easy installation
• Contemporary design with slim vertical elements supporting the light source • 1000mm and 1300mm versions available
Optional accessories
• Low profile head
IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01
• Low energy consumption
Optical Distribution
2000mm
1750mm
1500mm
1250mm
1000mm
750mm
500mm Wood effect front panel 250mm
Dimensions mm
Weight kg
A
B
C
200
1000
130
7
200
1300
130
8.5
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
228 Illuminated Bollards
Pharola
Illuminated Bollards 229
Product Codes Example 1. Model PHA
PHA
2. Height 060
600mm Bollard
010
1000mm Bollard
022
2200mm Light Post
W
Wall Mount Root
F
Flange Plate
Materials
Bollards 600mm 1000mm 2200mm
Head: Corrosion protected aluminium
Wall mounted version
See pages 200 – 201 for details
010
3. Mounting R
Options
R
4. Light Source
Mounting: Integral root Flange plate First-fix root system for simple steel wire armour cable termination available on request Wall mounted
NW
Glazing: Diffused acrylic
DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey
DB
Gear, switching and control: Complete with mains voltage LED driver
B
With 180°back shield
B
N
Without 180°back shield
NW
Neutral White LED – 4100K
5. Colour – for alternative colours see below DB 6. Back Shield
Example Code = PHA 010 R NW DB B
Light source: 5 x 2.4W LED Neutral white – 4100K
Pharola
Glazing: Acrylic Body: Galvanised steel
IP65 | IK10 | CLASS I
Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated
• Slim, elegant, styling
Installation and Maintenance
• Uniform 360º lighting distribution
Product is supplied with single outgoing flexible cable for easy installation
• Three bollard heights and complimentary wall mounted versions (see pages 200 – 201) for cohesive project design
Optional accessories
• Excellent thermal management of LEDs for high lumen output and long LED life
IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01
Optical Distribution
Colours: DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9005 Textured Black RAL 9016 Textured White
2500mm
Optical control: Performance LED Array Other: 180º light shield Custom heights available to order Body in stainless steel or aluminium to order
2250mm
2000mm
1750mm
1500mm
1250mm
1000mm
Pharola-Wall Angled
750mm
500mm
DB
27
26
10
Dimensions mm
RAL 9016
RAL 9005
RAL 9006
RAL 9007
DB 703
250mm
40
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
Pharola-Wall Flat
Weight kg
A
B
C
600
89
300
9
1000
89
500
13
2200
89
500
21
Royal Terrace Gardens, Torquay
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
230 Illuminated Bollards
Pharola-Max
Illuminated Bollards 231
Product Codes Example 1. Model PM1
150mm Head PM2
PM1
250mm Head
2. Height 009
900mm Bollard
030
Materials
PM1 Head height: 150mm Overall height: 900mm/3000mm
Head: Corrosion protected aluminium
PM2 Head height: 250mm Overall height: 1000mm/3000mm
010
1000mm Bollard
030
3000mm Bollard
Mounting: Integral root (standard) Flange plate Glazing: Diffused polycarbonate
010
3. Mounting R
R
Root
F
F
Flange Plate
WW
WW
Warm White LED – 3000K
NW
NW
Neutral White LED – 4100K
R
Gear, switching and control: Integral LED driver
4. Light Source NW
5. Colour – for alternative colours see below 27
Options
27
RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey
27
B
B
With 180°back shield
B
N
N
Without 180°back shield
6. Back Shield
Example Code = PM1 010 R NW 27 B
Pharola-Max
Glazing: Polycarbonate Post: Galvanised steel
IP65 | IK10 | CLASS I
Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated
Installation and Maintenance
• Increased diameter version of the Pharola
Cabling and product access through door
• Complete with door for cable termination access • Choice of two head options
Optical Distribution
Light source: 12 x 2.4W LEDs Warm White – 3000K Neutral White – 4100K Colours: DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9005 Textured Black RAL 9016 Textured White Optical control: Performance LED Array Other: 180º light shield Custom heights available to order
2250mm
2000mm
1750mm
1500mm
1250mm
1000mm
750mm
500mm
PM2
PM1
250mm
DB
27
26
10
RAL 9016
RAL 9005
RAL 9006
RAL 9007
DB 703
Dimensions mm
40
PM1 This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
PM2
Weight kg
A
B
C
D
152
900
150
300
17
152
3000
150
300
32
152
1000
250
300
18
152
3000
250
300
33
PM2
Pharola-Max PM2
PM1
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
232 Illuminated Bollards
Silka
Illuminated Bollards 233
Product Codes Example 1. Model SI
SI
SI
SI
2. Height 1
2.0m 2
2.7m
3
3.5m 4
1
4.0m
3. Mounting R
R
R
Root
F
F
F
Flange
R
4. Light Source 224L
2 x 24W PL-L 236L
224L
2 x 36W PL-L 255L
2 x 55W PL-L
WLED
WLED
WLED
White LED Array
RLED
RLED
RLED
RGB LED Array
5. Colour – for alternative colours see below 26
26
26
RAL 9006 Aluminium
Example Code = SI 1 R 224L 26
26
Options
Installation and Maintenance
Silka 1 2.0m Silka 2 2.7m Silka 3 3.5m Silka 4 4.0m Custom heights available to order
Simple wiring via a mains connection within the base of the luminaire head
Silka
Optional accessories Bolt-on root SIL-R (all versions)
IP55 | IK10 | CLASS I • Robust and corrosion resistant construction • Available in brushed stainless steel or painted galvanised steel
Mounting: With root or flange plate mounting Bolt-on root also available
• Choice of lamps or LEDs including RGB
Glazing: Opal polycarbonate Gear, switching and control: Electronic gear Light source: LED: White or RGB 2 x 24W, 2 x 36W, 2 x 54W PL-L RGB colour change available on request
Model
A
All versions
240mm 800mm 114mm
B
C
Optical Distribution
Colours: RAL 9007 Metallic Grey RAL 9006 Aluminium Stainless steel (brushed) Other RAL colours available on request
Materials
5.0m
Glazing tube: UV stabilised opal polycarbonate glazing
4.5m
Body: Galvanised steel (standard) Stainless steel Finish: Polyester powder coated (standard) Brushed and passivated (stainless steel only)
4.0m
3.5m
Bolt on root: Galvanised steel 3.0m
2.5m
B
2.0m
1.5m
A
1.0m
Silka 4
Silka 3
Silka 2
Silka 1
0.5m
27
26
Dimensions mm
Stainless Steel
RAL 9006
RAL 9007
ØC
7
A Silka 1 This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
B
2000 450
Weight kg C 170
with flange
with root
23
30
Silka 2
2700 560
170
31
37
Silka 3
3500 560
170
41
49
Silka 4
4000 660
170
46
55
Bengeworth School, Evesham
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
234 Illuminated Bollards
Silka Bengeworth School, Evesham
Illuminated Bollards 235
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
236 Illuminated Bollards
Silka-Max
Illuminated Bollards 237
Product Codes
Options
Installation and Maintenance
Example
Silka-Max 4 4.0m
Simple wiring via a mains connection within the base of the luminaire head
SIM
Silka-Max 5 5.0m Custom heights available to order
1. Model SIM
SIM
2. Height 4
4.0m
4
Mounting: With root or flange plate mounting Bolt-on root also available
5
5.0m
R
R
Root
F
F
Flange Plate
Glazing: Opal polycarbonate Gear, switching and control: Electronic gear
3. Mounting R
4. Light Source 236T
236T
2 x 36W T8
WLED
WLED
White LED Array
RLED
RLED
RGB LED Array
236T
5. Colour – for alternative colours see below 26
26
RAL 9006 Aluminium
Example Code = SIM 4 R 236T 26
5.0m
26
Silka-Max
Optional accessories Bolt-on root SIL4-R (Silka-Max 4) SIL5-R (Silka-Max 5)
IP55 | IK10 | CLASS I • Increased height version of Silka • Available in brushed stainless steel or painted galvanised steel • Available in stainless steel, aluminium or galvanised steel • Choice of lamps or LEDs including RGB
Light source: LED: white or RGB 2 x 36W T8 RGB colour change available on request
Model
Colours: RAL 9007 Metallic Grey RAL 9006 Aluminium Stainless steel (brushed) Other RAL colours available on request
A
B
Silka-Max 4 240mm 800mm
C 114mm
Silka-Max 5 240mm 1200mm 114mm
Optical Distribution
Materials Glazing tube: UV stabilised opal polycarbonate glazing
4.5m
Body: Galvanised steel (standard) Stainless steel
4.0m
Finish: Polyester powder coated (standard) Brushed and passivated (stainless steel only)
3.5m
Bolt on root: Galvanised steel 3.0m
2.5m
2.0m
B
1.5m
A
0.5m
Silka-Max 5
Silka-Max 4
1.0m
27
26
Stainless Steel
RAL 9006
RAL 9007
ØC
7
Dimensions mm A This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
B
Weight kg C
with flange with root
Silka-Max 4 4000 1280
170
32
39
Silka-Max 5 5000 1280
170
40
48
Royal Terrace Gardens, Torquay
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
238 Illuminated Bollards
Rona
Illuminated Bollards 239
Product Codes Example 1. Model RON
RON
RON
2. Height 1
4.5m
R
Root
F
F
Flange
070C
070C
70W CDM-T
150C
150C
150W CDM-T
R
070C
Light source: 70W, 150W CDM-T 35W CDM-R optional spotlight
5. Optional Spot Light Y
35W CDM-T Spot Light
N
N
No Spot Light
Y
6 . Colour – for alternative colours see below 26
26
RAL 9006 Aluminium
Example Code = RON 2 R 070C Y 26
Simple wiring via a mains connection within the base of the luminaire head
Glazing: Clear Polycarbonate
4. Light Source
Y
Rona 1 4.0m Rona 2 4.5m
2
3. Mounting R
Installation and Maintenance
Mounting: With root or flange plate mounting Bolt-on root also available
4.0m 2
Options
26
Optional accessories Bolt-on root RON-R (all versions)
Rona IP55 | IK10 | CLASS I • Clear glazing • Robust construction • Area lighting main optic with optional spot light for highlighting architectural features
Colours: RAL 9007 Metallic Grey RAL 9006 Aluminium Other RAL colours available on request
Materials Body: Aluminium Finish: Polyester powder coated
Model
A
B
All versions
300mm
1000mm 114mm
C
Optical Distribution
Bolt-on root: Galvanised steel 5.0m
4.5m
4.0m
3.5m
3.0m
2.5m
2.0m
1.5m
ØA
C
1.0m
27
Dimensions mm
RAL 9006
RAL 9007
B
0.5m
26
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
Weight kg
A
B
C
200
4000
800
46•
200
4500
1300
52•
•add 5kg for additional spot light
Optional spot light
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
240 Illuminated Bollards
Nexus & Riga
Illuminated Bollards 241
Product Codes Nexus
Example
Nexus or Riga Maximum lamp wattage: 70W
Head: Corrosion protected cast aluminium
RIB
NEB
Mounting: Integral root (standard) Flange plate
Glazing: Clear polycarbonate
2. Optic C
C
Cone Optic™
A
A
Anodised Louvre
C
3. Control Gear E
E
Electronic Gear: available in all light sources
M
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
E
4. Light Source 050S
050S
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
035C
035C
35W CDM-T
070C
070C
70W CDM-T
042P
042P
42W PL-T
045W
045W
45W CosmoPolis
060W
060W
60W CosmoPolis
L130
L130
Warm White LED – 3000K
L141
L141
Neutral White LED – 4100K
045W
5. Colour – for alternative colours see below 10
Materials
Riga
1. Model NEB
Options
10
RAL 9005 Black
10 B
6. Back Shield B
B
With 180°back shield (max 50W lamps)
N
N
Without 180°back shield
Example Code = NEB C E 045W 10 B
Glazing: Clear polycarbonate Light source: 12 x 2.4W LEDs Warm White – 3000K Neutral White – 4100K 45W, 60W CosmoPolis 50W, 70W StreetWise 50, 70W SON-T+ 35, 70W CDM-T 70W CDO-TT 42W PL-T Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green
Nexus & Riga
Cone Optic: Anodised aluminium
IP65 | IK10 | CLASS I
Body: Galvanised steel tube Seals: Silicone rubber
• Styled to complement the Classic range of luminaires and lighting columns (See pages 90 & 256)
Finish: Polyester powder coated
Installation and Maintenance
• Available in lamped or LED versions • Cone Optic™ allows for extended spacings of bollards with excellent uniformity
Access via Allen screws
Optical Distributions
• Improved vandal resistance with tough polycarbonate glazing • Optional specular back shield projects unwanted light forwards
Cone Optic™
Cone Optic™ with 180º Back shield
Optical control: LED Array Cone Optic™ reflector (standard) Anodised aluminium louvre Other: Electronic gear, some models Specular back shield (180º cut-off) up to 50W lamp maximum
2000mm
1750mm
1500mm
1250mm
1000mm
750mm
Nexus
Riga
ØB
500mm
ØB
A
A
250mm
ØC
10
20
21
81
27
30
50
D
Nexus Dimensions mm
RAL 6005
RAL 5003
RAL 9007
PAN 7621
RAL 7037
RAL 7016
RAL 9005
D
ØC
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
Riga
Nexus
Weight kg
A
B
C
D
Nexus
1000
186
152
300
21
Riga
1000
197
152
300
22
Riga Windsor & Maidenhead Town Hall
Riga
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
242 Illuminated Bollards
Polar & Vector
Illuminated Bollards 243
Product Codes Polar
Example
Polar or Vector Maximum lamp wattage: 70W
Head: Corrosion protected cast aluminium
VEB
VEB
Mounting: Integral root (standard) Flange plate
Glazing: Clear polycarbonate
2. Optic C
C
Cone Optic™
A
A
Anodised Louvre
C
3. Control Gear E
E
Electronic Gear: available in all light sources
M
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
E
4. Light Source 050S
050S
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
035C
035C
35W CDM-T
070C
070C
70W CDM-T
042P
042P
42W PL-T
045W
045W
45W CosmoPolis
060W
060W
60W CosmoPolis
L130
L130
Warm White LED – 3000K
L141
L141
Neutral White LED – 4100K
L130
5. Colour – for alternative colours see below 10
Materials
Vector
1. Model POB
Options
10
RAL 9005 Black
B
B
With 180°back shield (max 50W lamps)
N
N
Without 180°back shield
10
6. Back Shield
Example Code = VEB C E L130 10 N
N
Glazing: Clear polycarbonate Light source: 12 x 2.4W LEDs Warm White – 3000K Neutral White – 4100K 45W, 60W CosmoPolis 50W, 70W StreetWise 50, 70W SON-T+ 35, 70W CDM-T 70W CDO-TT 42W PL-T Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green
Polar & Vector
Cone Optic: Anodised aluminium Body: Galvanised steel tube Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated
IP65 | IK10 | CLASS I
Installation and Maintenance
• Styled to complement the Classic range of luminaires and lighting columns (See pages 90 & 256)
Access via Allen screws
Optical Distributions
• Available in lamped or LED versions • Cone Optic™ allows for extended spacings of bollards with excellent uniformity
Cone Optic™
• Improved vandal resistance with tough polycarbonate glazing
Cone Optic™ with 180º Back shield
• Optional specular back shield projects unwanted light forwards
Optical control: LED Array Cone Optic™ reflector (standard) Anodised aluminium louvre Other: Electronic gear, some models Specular back shield (180º cut-off) up to 50W lamp maximum
2250mm
2000mm
1750mm
1500mm
1250mm
1000mm
750mm
Polar
Vector
ØB
ØB
A
250mm
A
500mm
ØC
10
20
21
81
27
30
50
D
Polar Dimensions mm
RAL 6005
RAL 5003
RAL 9007
PAN 7621
RAL 7037
RAL 7016
RAL 9005
D
ØC
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
Vector
Polar
Vector
Weight kg
A
B
C
D
Polar
1000
186
152
300
21
Vector
1000
186
152
300
21
Polar Stanhope Road, St Albans
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
244 Illuminated Bollards
Cannon & Eton
Illuminated Bollards 245
Product Codes Cannon
Eton
Example
1. Model CAN
ETN C
Cone Optic™
L
L
Louvre
E
E
Electronic Gear: available
M
Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only
050S
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
035C
035C
35W CDM-T
070C
070C
70W CDM-T
042P
042P
42W PL-T
Glazing: Clear polycarbonate
E
50
RAL 6005 Light Moss Green
50
N
Optical control: Cone Optic™ (standard) Polished aluminium louvre set
042P
6. Back Shield B
B
With 180°back shield (max 50W lamps)
N
N
Without 180°back shield
Example Code = CAN C E 042P 50 N
Light source: 50W, 70W Streetwise 50W, 70W SON-T+ 35W, 70W CDM-T 70W CDO-TT 42W PL-T Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red
5. Colour – for alternative colours see below 50
Body: Cast iron
C
4. Light Source 050S
Cannon or Eton Maximum lamp wattage: 70W Mounting: Integral 300mm root
3. Control Gear M
Materials
CAN
2. Optic C
Options
Cannon & Eton
Finish: Two pack acrylic
Installation and Maintenance Access via Allen screws Lockable base compartment available for cable termination
IP55 | IK07 | CLASS I
Optical Distribution Cone Optic™
• Styled to complement the Traditional range of luminaires and lighting columns (See pages 106 & 256)
Back shield
• Cone Optic™ allows for extended spacings of bollards with excellent uniformity
Louvre
• Optional specular back shield projects unwanted light forwards • Lockable base compartment available for cable termination
Other: Specular back shield (180° cut off), up to 50W lamp maximum Details painted Gold
2250mm
2000mm
1750mm
1500mm
1250mm
1000mm
750mm
Cannon
Eton
ØB
ØB
500mm
D
ØC D
C
A
A
250mm
10
20
21
30
50
RAL 3005
RAL 6005
RAL 5003
RAL 7037
RAL 7016
RAL 9005
Cannon Cannon Dimensions mm
70
A This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details
Eton
Weight kg
B
C
D
Cannon 1005
120
210
300
66
1000
160
200
300
57
Eton
Eton
Cannon Belfry Hotel, Cambridge
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Floodlighting 247
Floodlighting Colada LED
Colada
Tizona
248 – 249
248 – 249
250 – 251
Sabre 252 – 253
Floodlight Brackets 254 – 255
Flexibility built in Tizona Ashkelon Train Station, Israel
A comprehensive aesthetically pleasing range of functional floodlights providing performance illumination for a variety of applications: from accurate feature lighting of building façades, through road lighting, to floodlighting large areas such as sports pitches. A variety of light sources and distributions provide additional flexibility of scheme design, including asymmetric, narrow beam and our patented Diamond Optic®. Complementary brackets, with distinct styling, match the floodlights and offer column or wall mounting options. Baffles reduce unwanted light spill to surrounding areas.
A variety of light sources and distributions provides additional flexibility of scheme design
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
248 Floodlighting
Product Codes
Options
Installation and Maintenance
Example
Colada 1 Maximum LED wattage: 39.6W
Lamp access via 4 captive socket head screws
CO2
Colada 2 Maximum lamp wattage: 400W
Cable entry via PG11 gland for Ø5 – 10mm round cable (Colada 1)
A
Mounting: Bracket mounted
Cable entry via M20 gland for Ø10 – 14mm round cable (Colada 2)
Glazing: Toughened glass
Optional Accessories
1. Model CO1
CO2
CO2
2. Reflector A
A
Asymmetric
N
N
Narrow Beam
3. Light Source 070TD
70W CDM-TD/SON-TD
150TD
150W CDM-TD/SON-TD 250TD
250W HQI-TS
150S
150W SON-T+/CDO-TT
250S
250W SON-T+/CDO-TT
400S
400W SON-T+/HQI-BT/D
WW
Light source: See product codes
Optical control: Asymmetric reflector Narrow beam
Warm White LED 3000K
CW
Cool White LED 6000K
• Choice of asymmetric or narrow beam reflectors to provide alternative lighting effects • Available in two sizes: 70W – 150W and 150W – 400W • Now available in LED • Stylish 500mm projection wall and column brackets available
Double post top bracket Colada 2 CO2-DB
Other: A full range of wall and column brackets is available
Example Code = CO2 A 150S
IP66 | IK08 | CLASS I
Single post top bracket Colada 2 CO2-SB
Colour: RAL 9006 Aluminium
150S
Colada
See pages 254 – 255 for details
Anti-dazzle external louvre Colada 1 CO1-EL Colada 2 CO2-EL
Materials Body: Die cast aluminium Mounting: Steel bracket finished RAL 9006 Aluminium
Light hood Colada 1 CO1-LH Colada 2 CO2-LH
Access: Captive socket head screws Seals: Silicone rubber
Optical Distribution Colada 1 Asymmetric
72°
15°-20° 32°-36° 15°-20°
30°-36°
76-80°
32°-36°
ax
30°-36° 62°
76-80° 72° 72°
ax
Im
HQI-TS/CDM-TD/SON-TD HQI-TS/CDM-TD/SON-TD
Im
70W 150W
72°
62° 62°
62° 8°-12°
72°
62°
6°
39.6W LED
72°
Im
ax Imax
ax ax Im
Im
15°-20° 140° 8°-12° 32°-36° 15°-20° 30°-36° 32°-36° 30°-36° 72° 62° 15°-20° 15°-20° 74-80° 36°-50° 32°-36° 32°-36° 76-80° 30°-36° 30°-36°
140° 76-80° 76-80° 76-80°
ax 15°-20° 32°-36° 38°-40° 30°-36° 12-16° 8°-12° 62° 17°-21° 8°-12°
76-80°
ax Imax
Im
HQI-TS/CDM-TD/SON-TD HQI-TS/CDM-TD/SON-TD
ax
70W 150W
Im
Im
Colada 1 Narrow beam
Colada
6°
62°
8°-12°
36°-50°
72° 84-92°
74-80°
8°-12°
15°-20° 8°-12° 32°-36°
39.6W LED
76-80°
ax Im
30°-36°
10°-12°
12°
74-80°
74-80°
84-92° 74-80° 74-80°
84-92°
74-80°
Im
12° 36°-50° 38°-40° 12-16° 17°-21° 36°-50° 8°-12° 36°-50° 36°-50°
ax
38°-40° 12-16° 38°-40°
84-92° 74-80°
17°-21° 36°-50°
12-16° 38°-40° 17°-21°10°-12° 12-16° 10°-12° 17°-21° 38°-40° 12-16° 38°-40° 17°-21° ax Im
x
a Im
ax
Im
SON-T+/CDO-TT SON-T+/CDO-TT SON-T+/HQI-BT/D
ax
150W 250W 400W
38°-40° 12-16° 17°-21° 36°-50°
Im
Colada 2 Asymmetric
B
Colada
Floodlighting 249
Colada LED
84-92°
A
84-92°
C
ax
Im
ax
Im
12-16° 17°-21°10°-12°
84-92° 84-92°
Colada 2 Narrow beam 250W
HQI-TS
Dimensions mm
10°-12° 10°-12°
Windage
A
B
C
Colada 1
268
340
105
5.1
0.08m2
Colada 2
410
540
153
13.2
0.18m2
10°-12°
10°-12°
Weight kg
Bergamo, Italy
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
250 Floodlighting
Product Codes Asymmetric
Narrow Beam
Diamond Optic®
TIZ N
TIZ D
Tizona
Example
1. Model TIZ A
TIZ D
2. Light Source 070S
050S
50W SON-T+/StreetWise
070S
70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise
042P
42W PL-T
057P
57W PL-T
070TD
70W CDM-TD/SON-TD
150TD
150W CDM-TD/SONTD 035C
35W CDM-T
070C
070C
70W CDM-T
150C
150C
150W CDM-T
A
5/35
B
10/10
C
31/35
D
5/25
Options
Installation and Maintenance
Tizona Maximum lamp wattage: 150W
Lamp access via 4 captive socket head screws
Mounting: Bracket mounted
Cable entry via M16 gland for Ø5 – 10mm round cable
Glazing: Toughened glass
Optional Accessories
Light source: See product codes
Optical control: Diamond Optic® Asymmetric reflector Narrow beam 150C
• Range of reflectors including Diamond Optic® to suit many applications including road lighting
Double post top bracket TIZ-DB Anti-dazzle external louvre TIZ-EL
See pages 254 – 255 for details
Materials Body: Die cast aluminium
Example Code = TIZ D 150C B
• Choice of mounting options
• Timed ignitor fitted as standard
Other: A full range of wall and column brackets is available
B
IP66 | IK08 | CLASS I
Single post top bracket TIZ-SB
Colour: RAL 9006 Aluminium
3. Diamond Optic® Setting
Tizona
Light hood TIZ-LH
Mounting: Steel bracket finished RAL 9006 Aluminium Seals: Silicone rubber
Optical Distribution Tizona Diamond Optic®
A 5/35
B 10/10
50W SON-T+/StreetWise 70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise 35W, 70W, 150W CDM-T 15-45° 15-45° 8°-52° 8°-52°
C 31/35
D 5/25 56-94° 56-94°
ax
Im
ax
Im
8°-26° 8°-26°
15-45° 8°-52°
15° 28 15° See 8°-26° pages – 31 for details 27°-52° 27°-52° ax
Im
56-94°
15° 17°-25°
27°-52° 74-76°
15°-20° 15-45° 8°-52° 32°-36° 15-45° 30°-36° 8°-52° 76-80° 45° 45° 8°-26° 10°-12°10°-12° 8°-26° I Im ma ax 45° x 12°-22°12°-22° 10°-12° ax
Im
ax
12°-22°
Im
ax x Im Ima
SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise PL-T CDM-TD/SON-TD
74-76° 74-76°
72°
ax
Tizona Asymmetric 70W 42W, 57W 70W, 150W
Im
ax
Im
17°-25°17°-25° 62°
B
Tizona
Floodlighting 251
Im
ax
56-94° 56-94° 60-68° 60-68°
60-68°
A
8°-12°
Tizona Narrow Beam 70W, 150W
CDM-T
15°
27°-52° 15° 27°-52° 6°
36°-50°
45° 45° 10°-12°
74-76° 74-76° 6°
ax
ax
Im
Im
17°-25° 6-7° 17°-25° 6-7° 6-7°
74-80°
6°
C
Dimensions mm A
B
C
310
385
160
Weight kg
Windage
8.0
0.1m2
Royal Terrace Gardens, Torquay
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
252 Floodlighting
Product Codes Narrow Beam
Example
SAB
SAB
1. Model SAB 2. Reflector A
Asymmetric N
Narrow Beam 250W SON-T+/CDO-TT/HQI-T/D
400S
400W SON-T+/HQI-T/D
600S
600W SON-T+
001S
1000W SON-T
001H
1000W HPI-T 250SD
250W SON-TD
400SD
400W SON-TD
250HD
250W HQI-TS
400HD
400W HQI-TS
Installation and Maintenance
Sabre 250W – 400W: integral control gear
Ease of maintenance via large quick release latches
Sabre Plus 600W – 1000W: remote control gear Ignitor separately housed on luminaire
600W and 1000W options have remote control gear Gear box:
Mounting: Bracket mounted
N
3. Light Source 250S
Options
Glazing: Toughened glass Light source: See product codes Colour: RAL 9006 Aluminium Optical control: Asymmetric reflector Narrow beam
250SD
354
315
328
160
Body: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium
Double post top bracket To fit column shaft Ø60 – Ø76 SAB-DB
Mounting: Steel bracket finished 82-84º Aluminium RAL 9006 Access: Extruded aluminium latches 14 -15 º
Seals: Silicone rubber
Anti-dazzle external louvre SAB-EL
86-92º
ax
Im 10 -1
2º
Light hood SAB-LH
ax 82-84º
24-30º 72°
14 -15 º
62°
82-84º 2º
24-30º
15°-20° 32°-36° 30°-36°5º
10 -1
SON-T+/CDO-TT/HQI-T/D SON-T+/HQI-T/D
8°-12°
5 º -41 18
76-80°
84-90º
ax
Im
250W 400W
18-24º 86-92º
72°
62°
Sabre Asymmetric
76-80°
ax
Im
30°-36°
ax Im
5º10-14º 415°-20° º32°-36° -42 22
Optical Distribution
Sabre
84-90º
Im
º 55 º -41 18
• Tool-less maintenance via quick release latches
Single post top bracket To fit column shaft Ø60 – Ø76 SAB-SB
Materials
45º º -42 22
• Timed ignitor fitted as standard
Optional Accessories
See pages 254 – 255 for details
24-30º
IP66 | IK08 | CLASS I
• Range of light spill reducing accessories to suit most applications
Cable entry via M20 gland for Ø10 – 14mm round cable
Other: A full range of wall and column brackets is available
Example Code = SAB N 250SD
Sabre • Choice of reflectors including narrow beam for accurate illumination of architectural detail
195
Asymmetric
14 -15 º
ax
Im
22-26º
36°-50°
45º º 8°-12° -42 22 62°
74-80º 74-80°
Im
72°
86-92º
84-92°
ax
74-80°
10 -1
5º
5
ax
2º
Im
Im
-3 2010-14º 36°-50°
76-80°
º -41 18 10°-12°
B
38°-40° 12-16° 17°-21°15°-20° 45º 32°-36° 30°-36° 8º
ax
SON-T+ SON-T HPI-T
Im
600W 1000W 1000W
14 -15 º
ax
Sabre Plus Asymmetric
90-100º 18-24º
Sabre Plus
ax
Im
84-90º
8°-12° 38°-40° 12-16°
250W, 400W 250W, 400W
SON-TD HQI-TS
A
C
84-92°
ax
Sabre Narrow Beam
Im
17°-21°
Dimensions mm 36°-50° 10°-12° 22-26º
74-80°
ax
Im
38°-40° 12-16° 17°-21°
5º
84-92°
Weight kg
Windage
A
B
C
250 – 400W
293
663
485
15
0.2m2
600 – 1000W
293
663
556
11.2
0.2m2
74-80º 18-24º
10-14º
14 -15 º
Sabre
Floodlighting 253
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
254 Floodlighting
Floodlighting 255
Floodlight Brackets
Floodlight Brackets Product Codes Colada 1 Wall Bracket
Colada 1 Column Bracket
Colada 2 Wall Bracket
Colada 2 Column Bracket
Tizona Wall Bracket
Tizona Column Bracket
Sabre Wall Bracket
Sabre Column Bracket
CO1
CO2
CO2
TIZ
TIZ
SAB
SAB
CB1
WB
CB1
WB
CB1
WB
CB1
Colada 1, 2, Tizona & Sabre Brackets
Example
1. Model CO1
CB2-90
CB2-90
CB2-90
CB2-90
Double arm 90º
CB2-180
CB2-180
CB2-180
Double arm 180º
CB3-90
CB3-90
CB3-90
CB3-90
Three arm 90º
CB3-120
CB3-120
CB3-120
CB3-120
Three arm 120º
CB4
CB4
CB4
CB4
Four arm
Mounting: Wall bracket Column bracket: to fit 76mm Ø column top
Bracket: Wall bracket: steel Column bracket: aluminium/steel
Our range of wall and column brackets for the Colada, Colada LED, Tizona and Sabre floodlights offers a distinctive style that perfectly complements these luminaires
Other: Optional single arm and 3 arm at 120º also available on request
Single
CB2-180
Materials
Colour: RAL 9006 Aluminium
CO1
2. Bracket WB
Options
CB2-180
Example Code = CO1 CB2-180
Sabre Column Brackets
Tizona Column Brackets
1200
1200 820 max
Colada/Colada LED Column Brackets
820 max
930
820 max
930
400
400
800
600
Colada 1: 1710
2500
1850
Colada 1: 1710
1850
2500
370
370
400
76 Ø
76 Ø
76 Ø
Sabre Wall Bracket
400
Colada/Colada LED Wall Brackets Colada 1: 805
Colada 1: 805 Colada 2: 1450
Colada 2: 1450
1200
Colada 2: 1450
1200
76 Ø
76 Ø
76 Ø
Tizona Wall Bracket
Colada 1: 805
Colada 1: 1710 Colada 2: 2640
Colada 2: 2640
Colada 2: 2640
76 Ø
800
600
930
930
400 400 Colada 1: 500
Colada 1: 500
600
800
Colada 2: 1000
600
800
Colada 1: 500 Colada 2: 1000
Colada 2: 1000
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Enriching lighting installations
257
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
We design all of our columns to sound engineering principles
Special Structures
Standard Columns
Special Columns
Painting Columns & Brackets
258 – 259
260 – 265
266 – 269
270 – 271
D
A
B
E
C
Projection
Columns Technical Details
Raise & Lower Columns
Column Enhancements
272 – 273
274 – 275
276 – 277
Pedestals 278
Providing a comprehensive lighting solution, DW Windsor offer a combined package of lanterns and columns. We design all of our columns according to sound engineering principles, taking into account structural weight and windage factors, with brackets and additional embellishments, including hanging baskets and banner arms, to add further interest. In addition to our standard products we also offer a bespoke column design service, with unique details or finishes for a truly special solution (see our Special Columns pages 266 – 269).
Projection
Column Brackets
Columns and brackets play an important role in creating a desirable day-time lighting scheme, with column height and bracket projection significant factors in establishing scale. By day, decorative brackets enhance the appearance of both traditional and contemporary lighting schemes and by night, illuminated finials can provide dramatic impact.
Finials
Wall Brackets
Feeder Pillars
284 – 285
286 – 287
288 – 289
279 – 283
EN40 EN 40 Column Standard 290 – 291
Sorento Westfield, Stratford City
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
258
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
259
Special Structures Images courtesy of Robe Lighting
There are times when a touch of extraordinary is required in a streetscape; a wow-factor or visual tour de force during daylight hours and when darkness falls, the scheme comes to life. Whatever your dream, with our technological expertise and design experience, DW Windsor are the lighting partners of choice for challenging projects and an ambitious vision. From vertical steel structures that have a strong industrial feel, making a greater statement than conventional columns ever could, or a suite of 9m high arches carrying a moving light and sound show, we have a wealth of experience in the design, manufacture and, where required, installation of extremely special projects such as these.
Bespoke conical, inclined and curved column carrying special luminaire and projector housing. Blackpool
Six bespoke 9m high arches, each spanning 18.7m and weighing more than 8 tonnes. Brilliance, Blackpool
For more information contact our customer service team: customerservices@dwwindsor.co.uk
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
260
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
261
Columns
Columns for Every Environment Lighting columns are available in a wide range of styles and sizes to suit just about any application. Whether itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s a 5m tubular column carrying a utility luminaire or a bespoke column carrying multiple light sources, unique brackets and a host of additional loads, at DW Windsor weâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;re able to supply columns to meet your needs and vision. Our expert team are on hand to offer guidance and advice, ensuring your project meets both aesthetic requirement and perhaps more importantly, relevant standards: all of our lighting columns are manufactured using the latest techniques and machinery, designed and manufactured in strict accordance with EN 40.
Rio on 8m tapered column St. Martins Quarter, Worcester
Ely on 5m Chester column Ingress Park Dartford
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
262
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
263
Standard Columns
Standard Columns We have illustrated a selection of columns from our standard range. Variant and special versions can also be supplied to your particular requirements. The most common material used in the manufacture of lighting columns is steel. Tubular, tapered, embellished-tubular, hinged and curved columns are available in this material. Aluminium is increasing in popularity as a column material and poles are available as tubular, tapered, hinged and curved profiles in this light-weight substrate. Tapered stainless steel columns are available to special order and tubular versions are offered as well in a range of sizes.
Large Cardiff 10m, 8m
Tapered Steel/Tapered Aluminium 10m, 8m, 6m, 5m, 4m, various tapers
Amax 10m, 8m, 6m, 5m, 4m
Edinburgh 10m, 8m
Tubular Steel/Tubular Aluminium 12m, 10m, 8m
Cannon 10m, 8m, 6m, 5m, 4m
Large Chester 10m, 8m
Large Oxford 10m, 8m
Large Cambridge 10m, 8m
If you have the need for something special, please contact Customer Services on 01992 474600 or email customerservices@dwwindsor.co.uk
For the relevant root and flange installation details for the columns illustrated on this page please see page 273
Milano LED on 5m tapered aluminium column Heron Tower, London
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Norwich 5m, 4m, 3.3m
Cambridge 6m, 5m, 4m
Tubular Steel/ Tubular Aluminium 6m, 5m, 4m
Cardiff 6m, 5m, 4m
Magna 6m, 5m, 4m
Chester 6m, 5m, 4m
Newcastle 6m, 5m, 4m
Tapered Steel/Tapered Aluminium 10m, 8m, 6m, 5m, 4m, various tapers
Volac 6m, 5m, 4m
265
Standard Columns
Standard Columns
Oxford 6m, 5m, 4m
264
Please note our Cambridge, Oxford and Norwich column heights are to light source, actual column height does differ. Please refer to page 272 for further information. All Norwich, Oxford and Cambridge columns up to 6m mounting height have cast bases with flange plate as standard. Fabricated roots are available for these columns.
Please note that ladder bars are actually fitted at 90Âş to the door but are shown as above for illustrative purposes. For the relevant root and flange installation details for the columns illustrated please see page 273
Windsor LED on 4m Oxford column St Paulâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Churchyard, London
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Special Columns
267
Special Columns
On this and the following page we show a number of columns in different materials that may inspire you to choose something really distinctive for your next project. Our Special collection of timber and curved aluminium and steel columns are available in a range of shapes and profiles: tapered conical, parallel circular, square, even curved columns, the possibilities are almost endless. The sustainable choice; the timber used in the production of our wooden columns comes from forests that are PEFC certified (Programme for the Endorsement of Forest Certification) which promotes sustainable forest management. For each tree cut down for the manufacture of our columns, two more are planted. Please visit pefc.org for more information. Furthermore, any treatments and finishes applied to the timber are environmentally assured to ensure the products can be recycled at the end of their life. The load the column must withstand, your material preference and the project budget may influence which material we ultimately recommend to meet your requirements.
5m Parallel round wooden column with Strand B
4m Square taper wooden column with Windsor Street (with spigot plate)
4m Inverted taper wooden column with Milano straight arm
5m Tapered wooden column with Milano curved arm
Our timber columns are available in a range of colours:
Light Grey
Dark Grey
Dark Brown
Patina
Black
Antique Mahogany
Light Grey
Light Brown
Steel elements (powder coated)
Grey
Dark Grey
Wood finishes Dark Brown
6m Curved square wooden column with Evora
Please contact Customer Services on 01992 474600 or email customerservices@dwwindsor.co.uk to discuss your requirements or for further information.
Brown
266
Manhattan on 5m tapered wooden column Chester Station
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Special Columns
6m Leaning column with Monaro
5m Curved top column with Evora
Please contact Customer Services on 01992 474600 or email customerservices@dwwindsor.co.uk to discuss your requirements or for further information.
6m Large curved column with Evora
269
Special Columns
Our aluminium columns are made from 95% recycled material, are 100% recyclable and are carbon neutral through highly efficient manufacturing and a compensation scheme that funds a third-world sustainable project.
6m Leaning column with Monaro
268
Bespoke 11m steel column Bankside, London
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Columns, Brackets Columns, Brackets
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
270 270 Pedestals & Feeder Pillars Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
271
Painting Columns & Brackets
At DW Windsor we pride ourselves on finishing columns and brackets to the highest possible standards. The combination of our skilled workforce, state-of-the-art painting facilities and many years of experience allow us to achieve a paint finish that is unsurpassed in the industry. Painting on site may be affected by the weather, temperature, humidity and inclusions in the paint before it dries (dust, insects etc). Any combination of these can cause problems with paint adhesion and thickness, giving a very poor finish and possible significant delays to the project.
The benefits of painting columns and brackets in a professional facility, where conditions are controlled and constant, are well known and more important today than ever. All of our steel columns and brackets are galvanised to EN 1461 to ensure an extremely robust, protective coating of the material both inside and out. As a result of its application process, surface irregularities and â&#x20AC;&#x153;spikesâ&#x20AC;? or drips of zinc may be present post-galvanising which our skilled engineers carefully address to remove or reduce without interfering with the integrity of the protection afforded by the galvanising.
The roots of our steel columns are finished in a glass-flake paint system which is both extremely hard and durable, ensuring the column root, the area most susceptible to corrosion, is given the best possible protection.
Ensuring quality to the last, all DW Windsor finished columns are protectively packaged prior to your delivery.
We offer two standard paint finishes in a wide range of colours: an acrylic system and a polysiloxane system. The former is a good balance between cost and robustness which will suit many applications, the polysiloxane is an incredibly hard wearing and tough paint that will retain its gloss level and colour for up to twenty-five years.
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
272
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
273
Columns
Technical Details Specifying Light Source and Column Heights
Flange Plate Details
• Tubular columns are generally manufactured in steel or aluminium
Tubular Steel columns
Oxford and Cambridge columns up to 6m and all Norwich columns
For other materials contact us
When specifying a column, you only need to advise us of the height at which you require the light source for the desired lighting distribution and not the actual column height.
A
• All columns are available with root or flange plate
B
• Raising and lowering columns are available, including Oxford, plain and embellished columns See pages 274 – 275
25
D
We will ensure that the chosen column and/or bracket are accurately configured to position the light source where it needs to be. This means that in most cases the actual column height will be different to the chosen height of the light source.
• Tapered columns are available in aluminium as well as steel
E
• Columns with double door bases are available to order • All Newcastle and Norwich columns and Chester, Cardiff, Oxford and Cambridge columns up to 6m mounting height are available with or without ladder bars
250
C
Ø22
10m
Nominal Column Height
Dimensions (mm) A
B
C
D
E
4m
139
260
200
15
22 x 38 283pcd
5m
139
260
200
15
22 x 38 283pcd
6m
139
260
200
15
22 x 38 283pcd
8m
193
420
300
20
29 x 64 424pcd
10m
193
420
300
25
29 x 64 424pcd
• Column brackets are manufactured with a male spigot as standard for mounting onto plain top columns. Other spigot arrangements available on request
208
• Columns and brackets are hot dip galvanised to EN ISO 1461. Please note that galvanising is an extremely robust industrial protective coating which, as a result of its application process, may leave some visible surface irregularities • Columns can be supplied fully painted in any standard RAL colour and are offered in a choice of paint systems suited to standard applications or more aggressive environments such as industrial or coastal areas • Column roots (steel columns) are treated with a glass flake paint system. See pages 270 – 271 for full information on painting columns and brackets
Root Details Tubular Steel columns
9m
Oxford and Cambridge columns up to 6m and all Norwich columns
For other materials contact us
3m
2m
1m
Actual column height
4m
Windsor Street shown on Oxford 4m column
5m
Actual column height
Monaro LED on 5m tapered aluminium column
75
75
75
75
ØB
ØB
Ø139
Ø139
Nominal Column Height
Dimensions (mm) A
B
5m
800
139
6m
1000
139
8m
1200
193
10m
1500
193
800
350 150
800
350 150
A
350 150
A
350
6m
Evora shown on Tubular Steel 10m column with Linear column bracket
7m
150
8m
Where underground obstructions cause a problem in positioning a column in the required location, bespoke, cranked and off-set roots are available which bolt to the column flange-plate
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
274
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Raise & Lower Columns
Raise & Lower Columns A Simple Solution to Difficult Access Raising & lowering columns enable maintenance to be carried out on luminaires used in areas where access to vehicles is not possible or allowable. They are available in a range of loading capacities and designs to suit the weight of the luminaire or luminaire and bracket being carried as well as a wide range of styles from plain tubular columns through tapered columns and to embellished columns in a style appropriate to the lantern being carried. We can even offer our cast-based Oxford column; the only raising and lowering column of this type on the market. We can offer essentially two types of hinged column: a base-hinged, winch operated version which has significant carrying capacity and a mid-hinged, rope operated version suitable for light loads and with the advantage that no winch-tool is required. Generally, steel is used for raise and lower columns but we can also offer beautiful aluminium columns with almost invisible hinge mechanisms.
Options
Materials
Mounting heights: Tubular & tapered: 5m, 6m & 8m Oxford: 4m, 5m & 6m Embellished columns: 5m & 6m
Column: Tubular & tapered: Galvanised steel
Embellished column styles: Amax Magna Volac Cannon Newcastle Chester Cardiff See pages 262 – 265 for illustrations of these columns
Embellished columns: Galvanised steel
Mounting: Tubular & tapered: Root Oxford: Flange plate Embellished columns: Root
275
Oxford & Cambridge: Ductile iron base with galvanised steel shaft Aluminium columns available on request
Mid-hinged columns
Finish: Tubular, tapered and embellished columns: Hot dip galvanised to EN ISO 1461 or to customer specification
• Simple operation. No winch required • Offset hinge means the column cannot tip accidentally • Column door allows access to base compartment without the need to lower the column
Oxford & Cambridge: To customer specification
• Tamper resistant external access to release the hinge mechanism • Oxford column – the only heritage-style hingedcolumn on the market
Colour: See Painting Columns & Brackets, pages 270 – 271 Other: Tubular & tapered: Flange plate available Oxford & Cambridge: Fabricated root available
Please contact our Customer Services team on: 01992 474600 for further information.
Embellished columns: Flange plate available
Technical Data Mid-hinged columns can carry a maximum head load of 20kg with a maximum wind area of 0.3m2
9m
8m
7m
Mid-hinged Raise and Lower Columns 6m
2m
1m
Oxford hinged 5m column shown with Windsor Street luminaire
3m
Newcastle hinged 5m column shown with Strand B luminaire
4m
Mid-hinged 6m column shown with DW400 luminaire
5m
Evora on mid-hinged columns Archer Road, Stevenage
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
276
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Column Enhancements
Column Enhancements Festive Decorations and Festoon Lighting We are able to supply lighting columns purpose designed to incorporate festive decorations, with integrated electrical sockets for power supply. Our columns can also be engineered to support catenary wires for festoon lighting.
Hanging Baskets
CCTV
Banners
Basket arms are available permanently fixed to the column or as clamp-on attachments for seasonal or periodic use. They can be supplied with minimal detail or styled to blend with the luminaire bracket, and are suitable for both tubular and tapered columns. Our clamp-on brackets enable baskets to be fitted to a range of tubular columns with ease. As with our clamp-on banner arms, these are available as single or double units and are manufactured from galvanised steel and malleable iron for strength and longevity.
We can supply heavy-duty lighting columns, both embellished and unkitted, suitable for camera mounting. We also offer specially adapted luminaires for housing CCTV cameras. Our luminaires offer high uniformity and low glare, making them exceptionally well suited to projects involving CCTV.
The arms may easily be removed when not required (during the winter months, for example) leaving the columns free of unnecessary clutter.
277
Our columns can be designed to carry a variety of custom-made or standard banner arms. Banners can be successfully incorporated into scheme designs to promote corporate branding, tourist attractions and high profile events.
Banners, festive decorations, baskets and CCTV
Our clamp-on banner brackets enable banners to be fitted with ease to a range of tubular columns. Available as single or double units, these subtly-styled products are manufactured from galvanised steel and malleable iron for strength and longevity.
Clamp-on Banner Arms
The flexibility of the design allows the arms to be removed when not required (during the winter months, for example) leaving the columns free of unnecessary clutter.
• Three sizes available, to fit 76mm, 114mm and 139mm Ø shafts
We can also supply banner-arms for tapered or curved columns or where large banners are required, using an alternative system to our clamp-on arms.
• Can be transferred to a different column if required (e.g. if the column has been damaged)
• Clamp-on, clean design and simple installation • Single and double arm versions available
• The length of the arms is customisable • Can be removed when not in use
• Supplied with fixing eyes as standard
Please contact Customer Services for more information on any of these products 01992 474600 or customerservices@dwwindsor.co.uk
B
ØA
ØC Dimensions (mm) A
B
C
48
Customisable
76, 114 & 139
Rio with Gina bracket and banner arms on tapered column
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
278
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Pedestals
279
Column Brackets
For locations where the luminaire needs to be positioned close to the mounting surface, we offer a range of decorative cast and fabricated pedestals. Used to best effect when mounting luminaires along walls, on gateposts or plinths, pedestals are available in a range of sizes and designs to complement most products.
At DW Windsor we design, manufacture and paint our column and wall brackets in-house. This gives us complete control of the entire process and ensures the products, whether standard or bespoke, are made to the high standards expected of DW Windsor.
All pedestals have a mounting diameter of 76mm.
Column Brackets Our range of column brackets fully complement our luminaire styles. • Column brackets are manufactured with a male spigot as standard for mounting onto plain top columns. Other spigot arrangements available on request • Virtually all brackets are available for column and wall mounting • Column brackets are available in 1, 2, 3 or 4 arm configurations • Bracket projection dimensions are to the nearest 50mm
Projection Explained
Projection
The projection of a bracket is the horizontal distance between the centre of the column shaft or wall bracket mounting surface and the point at which the bracket enters the luminaire. As can be seen from the diagrams below, the distance from the centre of the column to the centre of the luminaire is quite different for side and top entry luminaires.
Ø22 250 Ø208 Ø18 201
250
Ø22
Ø165
Ø208 Ø18
Projection
Ø170
Ø12.5
Luminaire to Bracket Mounting
Ø10
Brackets are available in the following mounting sizes:
200
215
250
215
201
Ø12.5
Ø165
Ø22 250
Ø22
Projection
Projection
Side entry:
Norwich 150 1570mm Ø165
Ø165
York 200mm Ø150
Top entry:
Easy-fit™ (see page 100) provided as standard 1¼” or 1” BSP (dependent on product)
Pier 80mm
Ø170
215
Ø12.5 215
Ø12.5
Norwich 975mm
Ø10 200
201
Heights of pedestals
42mm Ø
Post top entry: 76mm Ø
Ø150
Ø170
Ø208 Ø18 201
Ø208 Ø18
Ø170
00
Ø10 00
Ø10
Cradle on Pier pedestal
Evora shown on 5m mid-hinged column and C1 column bracket Archers Road, Stevenage
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
280
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Column Brackets
Column Brackets
Evora C1 Side Entry
Evora C8 Side Entry
Evora C9 Side Entry
Evora C10 Side Entry
Neva
Neva
Side Entry
Neva Post Top
Top Entry
Rio
Maximum 2 arms only Side Entry
Post Top Entry
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
76
670
76
850
76
1000
76
700
76
600, 850
76
600, 900
76
600, 900
76
650
114
670
114
850
114
1000
114
700
89
600, 850
89
600, 900
89
600, 900
89
650
114
600, 850
114
600, 900
114
600, 900
114
650
139
600, 850
139
600, 900
139
600, 900
Akord CD
Angled Entry: 30º or 45º
Chatham Top Entry
Tuscan
Gina
Side Entry
Linear (up to 150mm Projection)
Side Entry
Side Entry
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
76
600
76
1000
76
600
76
600
114
600
114
1500
114
1100
89
600, 850, 1100
114
600, 850, 1100
Akord DA Angled Entry: 30º
Akord SA Side Entry
Akord CC Top Entry
Akord CB
Angled Entry: 30º or 45º
Linear (over 150mm Projection) Side Entry
Linear
Linear
Top Entry
Post Top Entry
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
76
50, 150
76
400, 650
76
500, 750, 1000
76
500, 750, 1000
89
50, 150
89
400, 650
89
500, 750, 1000
89
500, 750, 1000
114
50, 150
114
400, 650, 900
114
750, 1000, 1250
114
750, 1000, 1250
139
50, 150
139
400, 650, 900
139
750, 1000, 1250
139
750, 1000, 1250
Linear Traditional Top Entry
Linear Traditional Braced Top Entry
Maya
Elegance
Side Entry
Post Top Entry
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
76
500 500•
76
750
76
1000
76
750
76
500, 750, 1000
76
500, 750, 1000
76
600
76
550
114
750
114
1000
114
750
89
500, 750, 1000
89
500, 750, 1000
89
600
89
550
114
750, 1000, 1250
114
750, 1000, 1250
114
600, 850
139
750, 1000, 1250
139
750, 1000, 1250
139
600, 850
114
281
•for Akord Cone C, 600 for Akord Cone A & B
Not available as multi-arm column bracket
Available as column bracket only
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
282
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Column Brackets
Column Brackets
Genus
Genus
Side Entry
Genus Traditional
Top Entry
Top Entry
Genus
Teca
Post Top Entry
Teca
Side Entry
Teca Traditional
Top Entry
Top Entry
Arc Plain
Top Entry
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
76
600
76
650
76
650
76
650
76
400
76
500
76
500
76
650, 850
89
600
89
650
89
650
89
650
89
400
89
500
89
500
89
650, 850, 1000
114
600, 850
114
650, 900
114
650, 900
114
650, 900
114
400, 650
114
500, 750
114
500, 750
114
850, 1000, 1250
139
600, 850, 1100
139
650, 900
139
650, 900
139
400, 650
139
500, 750
139
500, 750
139
850, 1000, 1250
Inverted Genus
Side Entry
Inverted Genus
Top Entry
Inverted Genus Traditional Top Entry
Inverted Genus
Post Top Entry
Arc Scroll Top Entry
Arc Ornate Top Entry
Swan Neck Standard Top Entry
Swan Neck Iffley Top Entry
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Shaft Size (Ø)
76
600
76
650
76
650
76
650
76
650, 850
76
650, 850
76
76
89
600
89
650
89
650
89
650
89
650, 850, 1000
89
650, 850, 1000
114
600, 850
114
650, 900
114
650, 900
114
650, 900
114
850, 1000, 1250
114
850, 1000, 1250
139
600, 850, 1100
139
650, 900
139
650, 900
139
850, 1000, 1250
139
850, 1000, 1250
Roco
Roco
Side Entry
283
Roco Traditional
Top Entry
Top Entry
Roco
Ornate
Post Top Entry
Hoop Traditional
Post Top Entry
Top Entry
Scroll Traditional Top Entry
Inverted Hoop Traditional Top Entry
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
Shaft Size (Ø)
Available Projection (mm)
76
900
76
1000
76
1000
76
1000
76
388
76
750, 1000
76
750, 1000
76
750, 1000
89
900
89
1000
89
1000
89
1000
89
418
89
750, 1000, 1250
89
750, 1000, 1250
89
750, 1000, 1250
114
900
114
1000
114
1000
114
1000
114
1000, 1250, 1500
114
1000, 1250, 1500
114
1000, 1250, 1500
139
900
139
1000
139
1000
139
1000
139
1000, 1250, 1500
139
1000, 1250, 1500
139
1000, 1250, 1500
Not available as multi-arm column bracket
Available as column bracket only
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
284
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
285
Finials • Spike or drum finials to enhance many standard bracket and column arrangements • Choice of illuminated or non-illuminated spike • Illuminated finial available in a choice of colours: blue, white or RGB
In order to provide you with more freedom in selecting the ideal bracket design for your scheme, we offer a number of optional finials.
Options Illuminated spike Illuminated drum Non-illuminated spike Light source (illuminated) 3 x 1W LED; White Blue RGB Gear: Integral driver
Materials Body: Illuminated spike finial: GRP Non-illuminated spike finial: Cast aluminium Drum finial: Acryl satine Dimensions: Illuminated spike finial: 1000mm tall x 76mm Ø Non-illuminated spike finial: 1000mm tall x 76mm Ø or 89mm Ø
Spike
Illuminated Drum
Illuminated Spike
Suitable for use with most column brackets
Drum finial: 100mm tall x 90mm Ø
Edge Lane, Liverpool
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
286
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Wall Brackets
Wall Brackets
Cast Wall Brackets
Wall Box Bracket™
Wall Channel Brackets
Cast brackets have the facility for a terminal block and are finished polyester powder coated as standard.
DW Windsor’s Wall Box Bracket™ is designed to bring practicality and flexibility to wall mounted luminaires. Its deep box design can accommodate a wide range of electrical components to enhance the function of the luminaire, whilst making installation and maintenance exceptionally easy.
The popular DW Windsor Wall Channel Bracket provides an attractive, low-profile and extremely stable solution where mounting a luminaire to a wall is required. Its twopart channel allows the rear element to be mechanically secured to the wall and electrical connection made before the more substantial front element and luminaire is attached, securely held by multiple fasteners.
Large Ornate 450
Ø76
The Wall Box Bracket™ can accommodate standard cut-outs and other electrical components such as control gear and time clocks. Batteries and electronic modules which may not be suited to mounting in the luminaire can also be housed, making the Wall Box eminently suited to luminaires used for emergency lighting. It is especially valuable where aesthetics or conservation criteria restrict the mounting of separate terminal boxes.
310
450
Ø76
Ø8.5
310
275
70 450
Ø8.5 1
2
B P
450
The Wall Channel Bracket is supplied galvanised and finished in any of our standard RAL colours. Ø12 A
B
310
1
2
B P 400
310
275
275
Ø8.5 70
This versatile bracket can be mounted on flat walls or, when specified, on external right-angle corners of buildings or onto circular surfaces such as telegraph poles.
Sealed to IP55, the interior of the Wall Box Bracket™ is accessed via tri-head screw fixings. A retaining strap prevents the front plate from swinging open too far, thus avoiding damage to the luminaire against the wall, whilst allowing full access to the box for maintenance.
450
310
275
Large Ornate Pendant
Constructed from steel, the Wall Box Bracket™ design is extremely versatile, with top and bottom cable entry facilities and compatibility with all bracket styles and entry types. We also offer alternative fixings for telegraph poles or wall corners. Galvanised and painted as standard, the Wall Box Bracket™ can be supplied in any of our standard RAL colours.
Cabling enters the bracket through a gland to the underside or via a rear cable-hole.
D
275
Ø8.5
70 Ø8.5
Ø76
450
Ø8.5 70
1
152
Ø12
/2” BSP
70
C A
Ø76
450
B
345
Large Plain Cast
313
287
Ø8.5
A
B
C
D
Medium
300
380
150
500
Large
400
640
210
760
313
345
70
300 438
Ø76 Maximum Internal depth 85mm
Ø8.5
A
B
Standard Unit
505
340
Long Unit•
605
440
445
400
70
438
Ø76
Cable entry may be effected from top or bottom and offers loop-in loop-out facility
•required for certain bracket styles
Ø8.5
445
400
70 Strand on Hoop Traditional wall channel bracket
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
288
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
289
Feeder Pillars
Feeder Pillars Product Codes Material & Finish Brushed stainless steel
Stainless steel painted RAL 9017
Galvanised steel painted RAL 9017
Juno Feeder pillars may be supplied complete with electrical equipment or empty (without backboard).
Juno 1 FP J1H B462
Non-standard versions (eg different heights or door sizes) are available to special order.
o
FP J1H B310
o
Please contact Customer Services with your requirements or enquiry on 01992 474600 or email customerservices@dwwindsor.co.uk
Juno 2 FP J2H B462
o
FP J2H B310
o
Kora Feeder Pillar
Juno 3 FP J3H B462
Juno Feeder Pillars
o
FP J3H B310
o
Juno 1
Juno 4 FP J4H B462
o
FP J4H B310
Juno 3
Kora
o
Ø170
Juno 5 FP J5H B462
Juno 2
Ø170
o
FP J5H B310
Ø220
150
o
Juno 6 FP J6H B462
o
FP J6H B310
1000
o
FP KOR B410
o
1000
FP KOR B462
1000
1000
o
Kora
* For other finishes, replace 10 with the appropriate finish code
Juno Feeder Pillar St Martins Quarter, Worcester
Juno 3 feeder pillar fabricated root, galvanised finish
FP JU4 FR
Juno 4 feeder pillar fabricated root, galvanised finish
FP JU5 FR
Juno 5 feeder pillar fabricated root, galvanised finish
FP JU6 FR
Juno 6 feeder pillar fabricated root, galvanised finish
FP KOR FR
Kora feeder pillar fabricated root
Juno Supplied with hinged door(s) and flange plate
Juno: Stainless steel (in a brushed and passivated finish)
Kora Supplied with removable door and flange plate
Galvanised steel (finished in any standard RAL)
Colours: Stainless steel (brushed, grade 304) See standard colours below Other RAL colours available on request Other: Stainless steel grade 316 available on request Bolt-on roots are available, made from galvanised steel Available with electrical accessories. Please contact Customer Services for more information
Juno 4
Juno 6
Juno 5
Ø325 Ø325
Ø325
Kora: Stainless steel (grade 304)
600
Juno 2 feeder pillar fabricated root, galvanised finish
FP JU3 FR
Materials
Weight Juno 1 & 2: 20kg Juno 3: 31kg Juno 4 & 5: 64kg Juno 6: 81kg Kora: 16kg
400
FP JU2 FR
Options
1300
Juno 1 feeder pillar fabricated root, galvanised finish
Ø300
1000
FP JU1 FR
Ø240
1000
Accessories
Ø240
250
Ø420
Ø420
40
10
20
21
Equipment shown in the feeder pillars is for illustration purposes only and not supplied as standard
DB 703
RAL 7037
RAL 7016
RAL 9005
RAL 9016
Ø420
DB
This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order. See inside front cover flap for further details.
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
290
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars
291
EN 40 Column Standard
EN 40 Column Standard
The requirements of lighting column design have always been complex and many have found it a challenge to fully understand them. To help specifiers gain a little understanding of EN 40, we have taken the opportunity to explain the main points of this standard and also offer a simple guide to the information required from the specifier to ensure lighting columns can be manufactured to a structurally sound design.
A Guide to Lighting Column Design Background and References
Site Data
BS EN 40: Parts 1 to 7 is the harmonised European standard for lighting columns which superseded BS 5649: Parts 1 to 9, the British Standard that was previously used. BS EN 40 is a more complicated design standard than BS 5649 and so BSI have produced a document – PD 6547: 2004 + A1:2009 ‘Guidance notes on the use of BS EN 40-3-1 and BS EN 40-3-3’ also termed the National Application Document (NAD). This gives guidance on the information the specifier is required to give to the manufacturer to allow a suitable lighting column to be designed. BD94/07, Design of Minor Structures, incorporates the provisions of BS EN 40 and BS EN 12899 and is required for reference in certain circumstances. It is recommended reading.
a) To design a column for a specific site: (when appropriate this will give the most economical column design). This information allows the highest wind pressure to be calculated which the column is likely to experience in a specified period – usually 25 years.
Information Required
Site altitude (Above sea level) – altitude affects the wind velocity (see above).
To design a lighting column to be structurally satisfactory requires the following information from the specifier:
PD 6547 Standard Road Sign Classifications Table 3 – Road sign class
• The equipment the column must carry
Sign class
Area of sign
Height to centre of sign
Sign shape
Offset
The acceptable performance of the column and its materials •
A
2
0.3m
2.5m
Square
0.3m
B
0.6m2
2.5m
Square
0.3m
• Site data to determine the maximum wind force the column is likely to experience
C
1.0m2
2.5m
Square
0.3m
Equipment
Notes: The most onerous orientation of the sign should be assumed. Unless stated the sign is assumed to have a mass of 5kg
The weight, windage area (i.e. the maximum area in the vertical plane) and position on the column – both height and offset – of all the equipment the column has to carry including luminaires, brackets, and for example signs, banners, hanging baskets, festive decorations etc.
BS EN 40-3-1: 2000 Terrain Categories
Standard road signs are classified as A, B and C, as indicated in the table reproduced from PD 6547.
Category
Description
I
Rough open sea, lakeshore with at least 5km fetch upwind. Smooth flat country without obstacles
II
Farmland with boundary hedges, occasional small farm structures, houses or trees
III
Suburban or industrial areas and permanent forests
IV
Urban areas in which at least 15% of the surface is covered with buildings and their average height exceeds 15m
Performance
Notes: Unless specified, use category III for columns below 8m, and category II for columns of 8m and above
Partial load factors: Of the two classes in EN 40, PD 6547 recommends Class B.
Ground Factor G and Soil Impact Factor ksi Quality of soil
G (kN/m2 per m)
Good: Compact, well-graded sand and gravel, hard clay, well-graded fine and course sand, decomposed granite rock and soil. Good soils drain well.
630
Average: Compact fine sand, medium clay, compact well drained sandy loam, loose coarse sand and gravels. Average soils drain sufficiently well that water does not stand on the surface.
390
Poor: Soft clay, clay loam, poorly compacted sand, clays containing a large amount of silt and vegetable matter, and made-up ground.
230
Horizontal deflection: EN 40 gives three allowable limits – classes 1 – 3. PD 6547 proposes only Class 3 for the UK unless otherwise specified. Class 3 = 0.10 (h+w) where h = column height and w = bracket projection.
Soil Impact Factor ksi 0.2 0.3
0.5
Foundation: If data is required, specify the soil type (good/ average/poor). Table 2 of PD 6547 relates and covers aspects such as compaction and drainage. See table below. Fatigue: Requirements not covered by EN 40 but may be considered for metal columns above 9m in height. See also BD 94/07.
b) To design a column for use across an Administrative Area: (When standard column designs are appropriate for use with specified maximum luminaire, bracket and signage sizes and weights) – Administrative Authorities can select a single wind velocity, maximum altitude, terrain category etc. to be used in specifications that cover the majority of lighting column locations within their boundaries. The combination of these leads to a single maximum wind pressure for the particular administrative area. PD 6547 – Annex A Table A.1 – lists these wind velocities and maximum altitudes together with factors representing the pressure – the Rationalised Wind Loading Factor (in N/m2). There are five of these also classified as “Rationalised wind loading regions” – Extra Heavy, Heavy, Medium, Light and Extra Light.
Maximum wind velocity at the site – 10 minute mean wind velocity – this is the reference wind velocity that is likely to occur in the specified period (e.g. 25 years). This can be derived from the mean hourly wind speed at sea level published in BS EN 1991 for the area in which the site is located. As it is referenced to sea level it requires adjustment to the altitude at which the column will be installed.
Authorities that border the coast are likely to adopt columns for the costal terrain category at the limiting site altitude for the whole authority.
Topography factor – This should be taken as ‘1’ except in cases where, for example, a road is carried on an embankment of height greater than 5 metres above the surrounding area or columns on a slope greater than 1 in 20. In these cases specialist advice must be sought as the resultant wind load can be considerably increased.
Topography factor and Terrain category are still required – see Ground Factor G table opposite. c) Unusual locations: The above applies to normal locations. If columns are in unusual locations – e.g. mounted on bridges or tall structures, at an altitude above 250m, on a coastal or exposed site, then this needs to be notified since specialist advice will be required.
Terrain category – Categorises the degree to which the ground around the site is open or obstructed, as hedges, buildings etc. reduce the wind speed. The table below is reproduced from BS EN 40-3-1: 2000.
Specification Checklist Information required
Suggestion
Equipment Weight, wind area and position of: Luminaire, bracket
Source Supplier
Banner, baskets, festive decorations etc.
Supplier
Signs
Class A, B or C
PD 6547 Table 3
Performance Deflection
Class 3
PD 6547 cl 5.3
Partial safety factors on loads
Class B
PD 6547 cl 5.2
Foundation soil conditions
Good/Average/Poor
PD 6547 Table 2 & Site assessment
Fatigue – only if specified
If over 9m
EN 40-3-3 cl 8 Annex A BD 26/04
Site data – For site-specific design Wind speed – mean hourly or 10 minute
25 year return
BS 6399: Part 2
Altitude
Map
Alternatively for Administrative Area Rationalised wind loading factor
PD 6547 Table A1
Topography factor unless otherwise specified
1
PD 6547 3.1
Terrain category unless otherwise specified
II > 8m, III <8m
PD 6547 3.3.1
Special site location or conditions
Specify
Specifier
Where the quality is unknown, it shall be taken as Poor. Extract from BD 94/07
Milano straight arms Derby Train Station
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
How-to Guides 293
How-to Guides Sharing our knowledge
How to create an effect without compromising the environment
Lighting Landscapes, the Vertical and using In-ground Luminaires
Lighting Car Parks
294 – 295
302 – 303
Lighting Façades, Statues and Monuments
Minimising Light Spill
296 – 297
304 – 305
Through the following pages we have brought together some inspiration and considerations required when lighting various external environments: how to achieve the desired effect, what areas need particular attention and any regulations that have to be taken into account. There are many ways to create an effect or provide lighting that is efficient and effective without compromise to the environment being lit. Particular emphasis has been given to road and car park lighting, where high demands are made of the lighting in order to offer safe, well-lit areas. We also offer a wealth of experience on working with heritage sites and wildlife. Whilst every care has been taken to present the most up-to-date information, latest updates are available via our website: www.dwwindsor.com
Lighting Pedestrian Crossings
Wildlife Considerations
298 – 301
306 – 307
Other helpful guides White Light
Refurbishment & Replicas
18 – 23
38 – 39
Control & Dim
Solar & Wind Powered Lighting
24 – 25
152 – 157
LED Light Engine
How to Illuminate Areas using Garda LED Handrail
32 – 33
220 – 221
LX1 Luminance Optic 34 – 35
EN 40 Column Standard 290 – 291
Unique Solutions 36 – 37
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
294 How-to Guides
How-to Guides 295
Lighting Landscapes, the Vertical and using In-ground Luminaires
Crayford Waterside, Kent
Lighting the Vertical
Lighting Landscapes
When lighting our roads, streets and other exterior areas we generally consider how much light we put on the horizontal plane and its uniformity. In areas where there are pedestrians, the vertical surfaces – buildings, monuments and trees are often a major part of the visual scene.
Gardens and landscaped areas are increasingly being illuminated, both for personal safety and as a visual amenity.
General lighting will often need supplementing to ensure these surfaces are well lit to create an interesting night time scene. This can take a number of forms, including floodlights, ground recessed luminaires or wall mounted lighting. Care should be taken to control this light, avoiding glare and light spill into the sky.
The key to successful landscape lighting is subtlety and selectivity. In most cases there will be little competing light, so fairly low light levels will have considerable visual impact. Consider light pollution and unnecessary energy usage. Can elements of the lighting scheme be switched off at certain times of night or year? For example, deciduous trees may not benefit from up-lighting in the winter.
Vertica, Lyra and Light Point, St Martin’s Quarter, Worcester
Using Ground Recessed Luminaires With smaller landscaped spaces, gentle lighting of the visible boundaries, such as walls or fences, can help create a greater sense of intimacy and comfort. Mounting luminaires in close offset positions with the light grazing the surface will help to bring out the interesting textures of natural surfaces, such as tree-trunks and stone walls. The surfaces of ponds or lakes make excellent mirrors – try to exploit their reflective potential by lighting objects along their edge, giving you ‘double’ the lighting effect.
Avoid trying to light landscapes in an all-over, uniform manner. Best results are often achieved by the selective highlighting of key objects within areas of darkness.
The lighting of pathways needs careful consideration. Lower level lighting such as bollards or marker lights may be less intrusive aesthetically than column-mounted luminaires.
Always consider the main pedestrian routes or viewing positions – light to enhance those views.
Always ensure that lighting equipment is concealed as much as possible.
Ensure the installer positions the sleeve and luminaire in the correct orientation otherwise the beam may not point in the right direction: even slightly misaligned luminaires can ruin the desired effect. Final positioning is often best achieved at night whilst the luminaires are illuminated. Close offset positions on large trees can be difficult. Locate the luminaire without cutting through large roots, as this could kill the tree.
Due consideration should be given to surface glass temperatures – select a luminaire and lamp combination that offers an acceptable temperature for the intended application. IP67 ground recessed luminaires must not be installed in a hollow where water can stand. Correct installation, with adequate drainage around and below the luminaire is crucial.
For landscapes with a major viewing position, try to illuminate a prominent or distant object – a fountain, sculpture or tree – to create a central lit focus to the scene.
Capra and Petra Q8 Quorum Business Park, Newcastle
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
296 How-to Guides
How-to Guides 297
Lighting Façades, Statues and Monuments Lighting Statues and Monuments Many monuments are listed, therefore lighting will require planning approval from the local Conservation Officer or English Heritage.
Lighting Façades Lighting at an angle to the normal viewing direction can create a subtle, yet effective shadowing, or ‘modelling’ effect on the texture of a surface.
With small statues, it is possible to achieve an effective result with a single fitting, but this should have a narrow-beam and preferably be located above and to one side of the object. This will help to create strong, dramatic shadowing and avoid glare to passers-by.
Be careful to choose a lamp with colour characteristics sympathetic to the building materials. There are many light sources to choose from including LEDs, white SON and metal halides. Generally use narrow and medium beam spreads to create interest. Wide beams can flood the facade and lose impact.
Ensure luminaires are sited and shielded to avoid glare to the viewer and the building occupants, and conceal them from view during the day. Use louvres or visors for example to minimise light spill beyond the facade and into the night sky.
Be wary of using excessive lighting on the surface; if the luminance level is too high it could be deemed as obtrusive lighting. See the ILP’s ‘Guidance Notes for the Reduction of Obtrusive Light’ for assistance.
Larger statues or monuments will invariably require more than one luminaire – these should be used to reveal different parts of the object, but be careful not to cancel out the shadows from one fitting by another. The impact of a carefully illuminated statue is often defined by the creative use of shadows. Brightness is a key issue – floods or spots that are too powerful will bleach out the statue’s details. In most cases, it is useful to do a trial or mock-up, using different wattages, beam angles and positions. Think about the main viewing positions and concentrate on lighting to mainly enhance that view. Consider spill light around and behind the object being lit – the use of narrow-beam equipment, shields, baffles and lighting from high positions will help to reduce this. With monuments on plinths, don’t only light the statue itself – try to put a gentle wash of light onto the plinth as well. Vaio, Unite Building, Liverpool
Consider the daytime appearance of the lighting equipment – ground lights are a good solution for minimising the daytime visual impact. Computer generated renderings are an ideal first step, provided that appropriate software such as 3D Studio Max is used to generate sufficiently realistic and photometrically accurate images.
Monza Luton Hoo Hotel, Bedfordshire
Monza and Light Point, Hull University
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
298 How-to Guides
How-to Guides 299
Lighting Pedestrian Crossings It is not always necessary to separately illuminate pedestrian crossings, for example, if the street is well lit and pedestrians are clearly visible to motorists. However, if this is not the case and a decision is made to light the crossing, then there are three main principle issues to consider • Ensuring the crossing is highly visible and distinguishable from the surrounding areas • Clear visibility of pedestrians approaching and using the crossing • Minimising glare to drivers In order to achieve these objectives an appropriate form of supplementary lighting is required. To ensure that the approaching motorist clearly sees where pedestrians are crossing, the lighting must generate an illuminated area over the crossing surface, with clearly defined edges. Consider also the area beyond the crossing from the driver’s perspective. The approaches to the crossing marked by zig-zag lines – the controlled area – and the adjacent footways should also be adequately lit; this may be to the appropriate lighting class. Where the road is lit to a road lighting classification then the pavements by the controlled area should be lit to the appropriate equivalent S class. For more information on comparative lighting classes see pages 310 – 311. A low mounting height of no more than 4 metres and often around 2.5 metres is usually most suitable to create this defined crossing area. Furthermore, a different lamp colour from the surrounding road lighting is effective in helping highlight the carpet, for example white light on the crossing in a high pressure sodium (SON) road installation. Luminaires need to be as glare free as possible to ensure maximum visibility through the crossing area, as pedestrians will often try to cross short of the crossing itself. Flat glass luminaires are therefore best. Finally, the light distribution from the luminaire needs to provide high levels of vertical illuminance onto the crossing pedestrians, to ensure that they are visible to approaching motorists. Guidance recommends three separate vertical calculation planes, covering the width of the crossing, are used to ensure good visibility of the pedestrian is maintained throughout.
Monaro LED AMRC Building, Sheffield
New universal Zebra Flood Optic is suitable for both one and two-way traffic
The benefits of our Zebra crossing luminaires
Reference material
DW Windsor Zebra luminaires are available in a variety of styles in order to match the aesthetics of luminaires used elsewhere on the scheme. Furthermore, we can also supply every element required for a complete pedestrian crossing solution. To minimise installation cost and street clutter, position the Zebra luminaire on the same column as the Belisha beacon.
Please refer to the following publications for the full requirements of lighting pedestrian crossings:
These guidance parameters (explored in more depth in the ILP publication TR12) mean that the ideal pedestrian crossing luminaire will distribute most of its light in a concentrated pattern forward of the luminaire. This will ensure that the complete height of the pedestrian is illuminated. DW Windsor Zebra Floods offer this ideal distribution and are therefore highly suitable for this application.
BS EN 13201-2: 2003 Road Lighting Part 2: Performance requirements, Annex B BS 5489-1: 2003 Code of practice for the design of road lighting Part 1: Lighting of roads and public amenity areas Paragraphs 11.5, E.2.4, E.3.3 CEN/TR13201-1:2004 Paragraph 5.3.9 ILP (Institution of Lighting Professionals) Technical Report Number 12 “Lighting of Pedestrian Crossings”
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
300 How-to Guides
How-to Guides 301
Lighting Pedestrian Crossings Equipment required
Precise light control
Complete service
For a standard two lane carriageway, two Zebra luminaires are required for each crossing, positioned on opposite sides of the road between the oncoming traffic and the crossing.
The DW Windsor ‘flood’ optical system aims to provide the lighting control needed for the localised lighting of pedestrian crossings.
As part of our standard service we can supply the complete Zebra Crossing package.
DW Windsor can supply every element required for pedestrian crossing lighting:
The Zebra Flood optic is available in a number of luminaire styles, so continuity can be achieved with the rest of your lighting scheme.
This covers everything from the specially designed luminaire, Belisha beacons with flasher unit and supporting brackets, to fully painted columns complete with black and white bands. In addition, our Applications Team can undertake the lighting scheme design for you, so you can be sure your pedestrian crossing is lit to meet the required standards. Contact customerservices@dwwindsor.co.uk
1 Luminaire
2 Column
Zebra product ranges
Colada Zebra Pages 248 – 249
Monaro Zebra Pages 56 – 57
Optima Range Zebra Pages 92 – 101
Ely Zebra Pages 124 – 125
Windsor Zebra Pages 110 – 111
Strand Zebra Pages 120 – 123
3 Belisha beacons with flasher unit and supporting brackets 4 Painting of black & white bands
Windsor Zebra West Wycombe, Buckinghamshire
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
302 How-to Guides
How-to Guides 303
Lighting Car Parks Car parks are primarily illuminated to provide a clear, way-finding environment for their users, and to encourage a feeling of safety and security. Utilising the correct equipment and lighting levels, a car park can provide a welcoming environment which helps to encourage higher levels of usage.
In order to provide a well-lit car park, the following steps should be considered during the design stage:
Lighting Lighting levels for car parks are clearly defined within the British Standards and aim to provide a good quality of light, uniformly applied to the desired area. The versatile DW Windsor Diamond Optic®, with its adjustable optical distribution (see pages 28 – 31) is a useful tool for achieving the optimum lighting coverage with the minimum number of fittings. Luminaires with flat glass glazing are generally preferable to further reduce glare and upward light. If a building has a dedicated architectural lighting scheme, then it is important that the car park lighting complements this effect. In order to provide clear images to potential CCTV systems, the lamp choice should provide a good colour rendering of 60Ra or above. Products such as high wattage, wide-beam floodlights mounted on columns or buildings should be avoided, as this approach could cause glare to users and create unnecessary light spill onto adjacent areas. Monaro, AMRC Building, Sheffield
Control A car park often fluctuates in the amount of traffic usage it receives, which is a major factor in choosing an appropriate lighting level (see table). The usage of dimming regimes or occupancy control sensors should be considered to reduce the lighting levels during periods of reduced traffic usage. Controls can be used to reduce the intensity of the lighting to a lower level whilst ensuring uniformity levels still provide good way-finding and CCTV coverage for the car park and associated areas. Further information on lighting control options and their benefits can be found on pages 24 – 25.
Location The location of lighting columns within a car park may impact on various different factors, such as the overall car park layout, and therefore should be taken into account early during the design process.
The location of items such as parking meters, CCTV equipment or signage should be considered in areas where the lighting can positively affect their use. Always try to use the minimum number of lighting points to achieve the required illuminance and uniformity in order to reduce both clutter and cost to the scheme.
Protection Columns can be subject to vehicle damage, so ensure that they are located in areas less likely to encounter vehicular movement. Where columns are located close to traffic routes, bollards or rail systems can be used protect the base area from any impact.
Lighting levels The following table provides information from Table 5 of BS 5489:2003 for the lighting of outdoor car parks. Model Outdoor Car Parks recommended lighting levels
Average Illuminance (Eav)
Uniformity
Light Traffic car parks (i.e. shops, apartments, cycle parks etc)
≥ 5 lux
≥ 25%
Medium Traffic car parks (i.e. department stores, offices, sports facilities etc) tyle
≥ 10 lux
≥ 25%
Heavy Traffic car parks (i.e. schools, churches, major sports facilities etc)
≥ 20 lux
≥ 25%
Ideally, columns should be situated in areas to maximise the number of parking bays available without creating unnecessary obstructions.
Monaro AMRC Building Sheffield
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
304 How-to Guides
How-to Guides 305
Minimising Light Spill The problem of light pollution is well known. The emotive issue has continued to grow in intensity in the ensuing years, with current estimates indicating that as much as £100 million per annum in wasted energy is to blame. Camaro has a sharp backward cut-off to prevent light spill into nearby houses Freshbrook Way, Swindon
There are three main aspects of light pollution:
Sky glow Upwards light, either direct or reflected, that is scattered in our atmosphere to become a background luminance that can obliterate visibility of all but the brightest celestial objects. Light emitted at angles just above the horizontal is the main concern, as this can cause sky glow problems many tens of miles away from the source itself. See the Institution of Lighting Professionals publication ‘Towards Understanding Skyglow’, co-authored by Radio Astronomer Dr. Chris Baddiley and our Environmental Strategy Manager, Tom Webster for further details.
Glare Often associated with light trespass, the discomfort or impairment of vision experienced when the brightness of a light source is excessive in relation to the general surroundings, detrimentally affecting one’s ability to undertake a given visual task.
Download and follow the guideline document ‘Guidance notes for the reduction of obtrusive light’, published by the Institution of Lighting Professionals.
This document considers the use of part night switching or dimming regime. Significant energy savings can be achieved using this method. Incorporating central management systems allows the project further controllability, with the potential of reducing lighting to a more appropriate level after installation. See pages 24 – 25 for details on DW Windsor control options or ILP Technical Report 27 for in-depth guidance on variable lighting levels.
Specify well designed lighting equipment with accurate and efficient photometric performance. Good quality products should have the ability to retrofit appropriate shields, baffles or louvres. Remember long light paths at shallow angles above the horizontal contribute most to sky glow and should be avoided. For architectural lighting close offset uplighting techniques, with higher numbers of lower powered luminaires will engender fewer problems than higher powered products with greater range.
Consider down-lighting as a viable alternative to up-lighting. During and after installation, ensure that the equipment has been installed and functions as required. Night-time inspection is particularly effective, as stray light becomes visible and areas which may be over or under lit can be experienced better in real time.
Obtrusive light shields Our Diamond Optic® is designed to minimise light spill by utilising a variable reflector system in order to tailor the light distribution to the areas being lit. For further information about this technology, see pages 28 – 31 where full details are available. There are, however, some applications where luminaires are placed in close proximity to windows or areas where light shields may be desirable to minimise the effect of light nuisance. The unique design of Diamond Optic® allows these shields to be fitted within the bowl of the luminaire, ensuring that they are as discreet as possible.
The Universal and Medium obtrusive light shields are attached to the optic tray using magnetic strips which allows either factory-fitting or on-site installation solutions. If required, they can also be easily adjusted to fine-tune the lighting control. The Full obtrusive light shield is mechanically fixed within the luminaire to ensure complete light cut-off can be achieved. Obtrusive light shields can be fitted to control light in any direction from the luminaire if required. For full details on the correct configuration required, contact answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
A range of obtrusive light shields are available in the following configurations, dependant on luminaire and glazing choice: • Universal OLS – 30°cut-off • Medium OLS – 45° cut-off • Full OLS – 60° cut-off
Light nuisance Light falling outside the area, building or monument being illuminated, onto other areas, so as to cause a nuisance. The Clean Neighbourhoods and Environment Act 2005 (CNE) has made it illegal to put light from one premises onto another if it is undesired. The crucial clause, 102, specifically targets light that is either injurious to health or is a nuisance. Whilst there are specifically named exceptions, many lighting schemes fall within the scope of this legislation and knowledge of its far reaching powers is of paramount importance. DW400 using Diamond Optic®to ensure a controlled cut-off Cribbs Causeway, Bristol
Strand Poundbury, Dorset
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Monaro LED Gravel Pit Lane, Greenwich
306 How-to Guides
How-to Guides 307
Wildlife Considerations When designing a lighting scheme there are many considerations and for some of these the impact the lighting has on wildlife is of particular importance. Some considerations are already taken care of in legislation such as the WEEE directive (pages 312 – 313) to ensure that the product is taken care of responsibly at the end of its life. But what about deploying the product responsibly throughout its service life? The key fact to remember here is that by its very nature lighting modifies the night time environment. The key questions are: to what extent does this modification affect the natural World; and what can I do about it?
Impact So much is known about the impact lighting has on the natural environment that this section can only be a very brief roundup of some of the more common issues. Plants All plants respond to light. Some require long periods of darkness, some short periods of darkness to germinate. Some plants are impervious to this effect. This is known as long day, short day and day neutral plants. Research into any given species of plant will reveal which type it is. It is currently unknown as to the long term effects of artificial light on this process.
Bats Some bats, in particular the abundant pipistrelle go to a light because of the abundance of insects attracted by that light. Some bats actively avoid light. For example the rare horseshoe bats only hunt in the darkest areas. If the insects have been attracted away this means their hunting grounds are denuded of prey. Although it is unknown to what extent this affects the overall numbers, studies in Switzerland have shown previously unlit areas changing from a predominantly horseshoe bat populated area to a predominantly pipistrelle populated area. Daubenton’s bats use rivers as highways and bridges with their undersides illuminated are perceived as a barrier and will not be flown under. Horseshoe bats use hedgerows as highways. If one side of the hedge is lit, they will cross over to the unlit side if the opportunity exists. Most bats will delay emergence from their roosts if the entrance is lit. This has been shown to be detrimental to their existence but the degree of impact is currently not researched.
Some plants (such as the London plane tree) retain leaves well into autumn if artificial lighting is present. If there are severe frosts whilst the tree still has leaves the ability for the leaf bearing twig to regenerate leaves the following year is compromised. The fear is that severe early winters will see the wholesale death of these trees. However, since widespread adoption of street lighting there have not yet been the type of winters that would cause this in England. With the changes we are currently experiencing in our climate this may change in the future.
Kestrels, a daytime raptor, have been seen to hunt pipistrelle bats at night near artificial light sources. Their effect on the overall bat population is currently unknown.
The lack of empirical environmental impact data is a real handicap here and this is not likely to change within the foreseeable future. Step 1 If the lighting scheme is likely to have a high impact on the natural environment, for example high lighting levels in an area in which wildlife is known to inhabit, advice should be sought from local experts in the relevant field. Your local bat expert can be sourced via www.bats.org.uk Step 2 The higher the perceived environmental impact, the more mitigating techniques and technologies need to be used.
Mitigating techniques and technologies 1. Consider the lighting task For most lighting design, the first recourses are the lighting values laid down in the tables from the various guides and codes of practice. Sometimes the lighting task can be achieved in other ways. For example using low level directional lighting such as the DW Windsor Garda illuminated handrail (see pages 214 – 221). 2. (Don’t) see the light Clever use of reflector technologies, shielding and directional sources such as LEDs can all but eliminate light from undesired directions. 3. Attract the right night-time activity Remember light emitted towards the blue end of the spectrum, and especially those sources that emit UV are automatically going to have a greater detrimental effect than those at the opposite end of the spectrum.
Birds Some species are known to stay active under artificial light (blackbirds and robins particularly). So far no detrimental link has been shown to result from this activity, especially when compared to the detrimental effects of daytime noise.
Steps an environmentally aware lighting designer/specifier should undertake
Garda LED gives a sharp cut-off, which prevents disturbance to the flight-path of bats. Lea Bridge Towpath, Hackney
Insects Insects are drawn predominantly to light with a high UV or blue content. Initial evidence suggests that this is having a detrimental impact on insect populations, especially some of the rarer breeds of moth.
DW Windsor has a wealth of experience in this area having worked in collaboration with the Bat Conservation Trust and the ILP to publish the guide: Bats and Lighting in the UK, a free copy of which is available from the ILP: www.theilp.org.uk An extract from a lecture given by our Environmental Strategy Manager, Tom Webster
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
Technical Information 309
Meeting design standards
Technical Information
A reference guide to regulations and other considerations
CEN Code of Practice
Lamp Data
310 – 311
314 – 315
WEEE Directive
Glossary
312
316 – 317
Energy Related Products
Index
312
318 – 319
Ingress Protection & Shock Resistance
General Conditions of Trading
313
320
This section offers a reference guide to many of the regulations and other considerations required when specifying exterior lighting. Particular emphasis has been given to road and car park lighting, where high demands are made in order to provide safe, well-lit areas. Whilst every care has been taken to present up-to-date information, correct at time of print, please refer to our website for latest updates: www.dwwindsor.com
Other helpful sections How-to Guides
Control & Dim
292 – 307
25 – 27
White Light 18 – 24
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
310 Technical Information
Technical Information 311
CEN Code of Practice
CEN Code of Practice
Criteria for selection of S-Classes
Crime Rate1
Low Moderate High
BS 5489-1 & BS EN 13201-2: 2003.
S–series of lighting classes
Lighting classes for subsidiary roads – residential roads, footpaths and cycleways Lighting Class Ra Value Ra < 60
Horizontal Illuminance
Low Traffic Flow2
Normal Traffic Flow3
High Traffic Flow4
E1/E2
E3/E4
E1/E2
E3/E4
E1/E2
E3/E4
S5
S4
S4
S3
S3
S2
S1
Class
Average Illuminance Eav (lux) to fall between the values: 15
&
Minimum Point Illuminance Emin (lux)
22.5
5 3
Ra ≥ 60
S6
S5
S5
S4
S4
S3
S2
10
&
15
Ra < 60
S4
S3
S3
S2
–
S1
S3
7.5
&
11.25
Ra ≥ 60
S5
S4
S4
S3
–
S2
S4
5
&
7.5
Ra < 60
S2
S2
S2
S1
–
S1
S5
3
&
4.5
0.6
Ra ≥ 60
S3
S3
S3
S2
–
S2
S6
2
&
3
0.6
1
Please refer to your local Police Architectural Liaison Officer (ALO) for assistance. See securedbydesign.com
2
Low Traffic Flow is where traffic is solely associated with the adjacent property e.g. a cul-de-sac
3
Normal Traffic Flow is typically found on housing estate access roads and where there may be shops, pubs etc.
4
High Traffic Flow is as above but with greater usage such as a housing estate spine road
The information on these pages is intended only as a handy reference to the two standards and should not be used as a substitute to the full code of practice. Please note that at time of going to press a new British Standard is being drafted that is likely to change the criteria for each class.
1.5 1
Please refer to our website for the most up-to-date information available: www.dwwindsor.com
The above table shows that the range of average values permissible within each S-class results in a design spacings window (it is recommended that overall uniformity be at least 25%)
Criteria for selection of CE Classes
Outdoor Car Park recommended lighting level
Lighting classes for city and town centres
CE-series of lighting classes Horizontal Illuminance
Lighting Class Type of traffic
Reference information
Lighting levels for outdoor car parks
Normal Traffic Flow3
High Traffic Flow4
Class
Average Illuminance Eav (lux) [minimum value]
Overall Uniformity Uo [minimum value]
Environmental zones Average Illuminance Eav (lux) [minimum value]
Overall Uniformity Uo (min) [minimum value]
Light traffic car parks (i.e. shops, apartments, cycle parks)
Eav ≥ 5 lux
Uo ≥ 0.25%
Medium traffic (i.e. departments stores, offices, sports facilities)
Eav ≥ 10 lux
Uo ≥ 0.25%
Heavy traffic (i.e. schools, churches, major sports facilities)
Eav ≥ 20 lux
Uo ≥ 0.25%
Category
Examples
E1
Intrinsically dark areas
E2
Low district brightness areas
National Parks, Areas of Outstanding Natural Beauty, etc. Rural or small village locations
E3
Medium district brightness areas
Small town centres or urban locations
E4
High district brightness areas
Town/city centres with high levels of night-time activity
E3
E4
E3
E4
Pedestrian only
CE3
CE2
CE2
CE1
CE0
50
0.4
Mixed vehicle & pedestrian
CE2
CE1
CE1
CE1
CE1
30
0.4
CE2
20
0.4
CE3
15
0.4
CE4
10
0.4
Traffic route class
Conflict area class
CE5
7.5
0.4
ME1
CE0
ME2
CE1
ME3
CE2
ME4
CE3
ME5
CE4
BS5489-1:2003 / BS EN 12464-2:2007
Lighting classes for conflict areas
Criteria for selection of ME-Classes Lighting classes for motorways and traffic routes Hierarchy description
ME–series of lighting classes
General description (see table B2 BS5489-1:2003)
Traffic flow (average daily traffic)
Main carriageway in complex interchange areas
Motorway
Main carriageway with interchanges <3km
≥40,000 >40,000
ME1
≤40,000
ME2
>40,000
ME1
≤40,000
Main carriageway with interchanges ≥3km
Lighting class
>40,000
ME2
Luminance of the dry road surface
Class
Disability glare
Lighting of Surroundings
Average Luminance Lav (cd/m2) [minimum value]
Overall Uniformity Uo [minimum value]
Longitudinal Uniformity UI [minimum value]
Threshold Increment TI (%) [maximum value]
Surround Ratio SR [minimum value]
ME class
CE class
S class
–
CE0
–
ME1
CE1
–
ME2
CE2
–
0.5
ME3
CE3
S1
15
0.5
ME4
CE4
S2
15
0.5
ME5
CE5
S3
0.5
15
0.5
ME6
–
S4
0.35
0.4
15
0.5
0.35
0.4
15
–
ME1
2.0
0.4
0.7
10
0.5
Emergency lanes
–
ME4a
ME2
1.5
0.4
0.7
10
0.5
Strategic route
Single and dual trunk and principal roads >40mph with few junctions and little pedestrian traffic
≤15,000
ME3a
ME3a
1.0
0.4
0.7
15
0.5
>15,000
ME2
ME3b
1.0
0.4
0.6
15
Main distributor
Single and dual major urban and inter-primary link roads, 40mph or less and with limited parking
≤15,000
ME3a
ME3c
1.0
0.4
0.5
>15,000
ME2
ME4a
0.75
0.4
0.6
≤7,000
ME4a
ME4b
0.75
0.4
7,000 to 15,000
ME3b
ME5
0.5
>15,000
ME3a
ME6
0.3
Secondary distributor
Link road
Classified B and C class roads and unclassified urban bus routes with local traffic, frequent junctions and pedestrians
E1/E2
≤7,000
ME3c
Urban areas with 30mph speed limits
E3/E4
7,000 to 15,000
ME3b
>15,000
ME2
E1/E2
Any
ME5
Any
ME4b or S2
High pedestrian and cycle use
S1
Secondary distribution network with frontage access, frequent junctions and uncontrolled parking
E3
Please note that BS EN 13201 makes no specific references to the lighting of car parks. BS 5489 : 2003 refers users to another standard, EN 12464-2, which is currently only in draft form. Therefore BS 5489 : Part 9 : 1996 remains valid for car park lighting.
Lighting classes for general areas
–
–
S5
–
–
S6
Adjoining schemes should be lit to within 2 categories of each other The above table helps identify this where the adjacent schemes are of different classes
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
312 Technical Information
Technical Information 313
WEEE Directive & Energy Related Products WEEE Directive
ErP – Energy Related Products
The WEEE Legislation – a step towards a better environment
What is ErP and how does it affect lighting?
Effective in the UK from the 1st July 2007, the Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive (WEEE Directive) was implemented to ensure producers and agents take responsibility for the reduction of electrical and electronic waste into our landfill sites.
Ingress Protection & Shock Resistance The degree of protection for luminaires against the penetration of dust, solid bodies and water, as defined in the Standard EN 60598-1, is represented by the initials IP followed by two characteristic digits, and may be represented by graphic symbols, e.g. IP 66.
ErP is part of the Ecodesign directive introduced by the European Parliament, designed to tackle a product’s negative impact on the environment (where decisions are made concerning product performance). It details that consideration must be given to the entire life cycle of the product, including manufacture, installation, maintenance and disposal.
The letters IK indicate the level of shock resistance of the luminaire to impact, according to EN 50102. First digit IPX
Level of shock resistance IK Clarifies the protection of the luminaire against resistance to impact.
The directive aims to minimise the impact of electrical and electronic equipment on the environment by encouraging the design of products with their reuse, recycling and recovery in mind. It sets targets for the collection, treatment, recovery and environmentally sound disposal of electrical and electronic waste.
ErP Directive, regulation 245/2009 sets out manufacturers requirements for lamps, ballasts and luminaires. Manufacturers must now provide product information on suitable replacement parts.
The first digit (IPX-) classifies the protection of the luminaire against the penetration of solid bodies. IP1
Protected against solid objects larger than 50mm Ø
IK01 Protection against 0.14 Joules of impact energy
What are we doing about this legislation?
IP2
IK03 Protection against 0.35 Joules of impact energy
What are we doing about this legislation?
DW Windsor is committed to engineering lighting solutions that maximise energy efficiency and product design life. Whilst we do not manufacture lamps or ballasts, we do sell them within our luminaires. Only lamps and ballasts that meet DW Windsor’s stringent performance criteria, and the requirements of the ErP Directive, are utilised within our products. Any suitable replacement parts may be identified under the luminaire maintenance section on our website.
Protected against solid objects larger than 12.5mm Ø
IP3
Protected against solid objects larger than 2.5mm Ø
IP4
Protected against solid objects larger than 1mm Ø
IP5
Protected against harmful dust ingress (dust protected)
IK08 Protection against 5.00 Joules of impact energy
IP6
Totally protected against any entry of dust (dust tight)
IK10 Protection against 20.00 Joules of impact energy
We are registered with the collective compliance scheme run by Lumicom, a not-for-profit organisation, established by the Lighting Industry Association (LIA), to manage the collection and responsible disposal of end of life lighting equipment. We continue to design products that maximise long life, and where possible are upgradeable as new technologies emerge. Our product development procedures aim to use materials, designs and manufacturing processes that facilitate the treatment and recycling of our products. DW Windsor registration: WEEE/JC0205VY
What’s the impact of the WEEE Directive on the professional lighting specifier/customer? As a member of the Lumicom scheme DW Windsor pays a charge based on the type of luminaire purchased to cover the future disposal of the product. This ensures the end user is not liable for any future costs associated with the disposal of or recycling of the product. When the products need disposing of, at end of life, the end user simply needs to contact Lumicom directly, who will arrange for the correct disposal/recycling. Web: Tel: Email:
How will this affect DW Windsor products in the future?
IK02 Protection against 0.20 Joules of impact energy IK04 Protection against 0.50 Joules of impact energy IK05 Protection against 0.70 Joules of impact energy IK06 Protection against 1.00 Joules of impact energy IK07 Protection against 2.00 Joules of impact energy IK09 Protection against 10.00 Joules of impact energy
Second digit IP-X
The regulations provide on-going withdrawal of the least efficient light sources, resulting in the removal of some lamp options available. A full list of lamp types that are currently used by DW Windsor can be found on pages 314 – 315.
The second digit (IP-X) classifies the protection of the luminaire against the penetration of liquids. IP-1 Protected against vertical water droplets IP-2 Protected against falling water droplets to a maximum of 15º from the vertical
For further information on maintenance and replacement parts for DW Windsor products, go to: www.dwwindsor.com/luminairemaintenance
IP-3 Protected against rain to a maximum of 60º to the vertical (rain proof) IP-4 Protected against water sprays (splash proof) IP-5 Protected against water jets (jet proof) IP-6 Protected against powerful water jets IP-7 Protected against the effects of temporary submersion in water
lumicomrecycling.co.uk 0845 643 0304 info@lumicom.co.uk
IP-8 Protected against the effects of permanent submersion in water
Further information on the WEEE Directive can be found at: berr.gov.uk lumicom.co.uk
Monoro LED Clacton Seafront
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
314 Technical Information
Technical Information 315 Lamp Characteristics There are a number of ways of assessing lamps, for example: Colour Temperature Colour Temperature is a descriptive term for the appearance of light expressed in Kelvin.
Lamp Data
Warm White is less than 3300K Neutral White is between 3300K and 5300K Cool White is greater than 5300K ILCOS codes
Recommended group change interval years
Wattage
Luminous Flux
Efficacy
Colour Temp
Colour Rendering
W
lm
lm/W
K
Ra
Cap
CosmoPolis
CPO-TW
MT
6
45 60 90 140
4950 7200 10450 16500
110 120 116 118
2800 2800 2880 2880
66 73 66 66
PGZ12 PGZ12 PGZ12 PGZ12
CMH StreetWise
CMH-SW
MT
4
50 70 100 150
5000 7640 10900 16200
100 105 109 110
3000 3000 3000 3000
70 70 70 68
E27 E27 E40 E40
High Pressure Sodium Plus (Tubular) [enhanced output]
SON-T+
ST
4
50 70 100 150 250 400 600
4400 6500 10000 17500 33000 55500 90000
88 93 100 117 132 139 150
1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950
20-39 20-39 20-39 20-39 20-39 20-39 20-39
E27 E27 E40 E40 E40 E40 E40
High Pressure Sodium Plus (Double Ended) [enhanced output]
SON-TD+
SD
2
70 150
6800 15000
97 100
2000 2000
20-39 20-39
RX7 RX7
Ceramic Metal Halide
CDM-T
MT
2
35 70 70 150 150
3300 6600 5800 14000 12700
94 94 83 93 85
2800 3000 4200 3000 4200
40-59 80-89 90-100 80-89 90-100
G12 G12 G12 G12 G12
Ceramic Metal Halide Elite
CDM-TMW
MT
4
210 210 315 315
24150 23000 38700 35500
115 108 120 113
3000 4000 3000 4000
90 92 90 93
PGZX18 PGZX18 PGZX18 PGZX18
Ceramic Metal Halide (Edison screw cap)
CDO-ET
ME
3
70 100 150
6300 8700 13500
90 87 90
2800 2800 2800
83 85 85
E27 E40 E40
Ceramic Metal Halide (Edison screw cap)
CDO-TT
MT
3
70 100 150 250
6300 9000 13500 22500
90 87 90 90
2800 2800 2800 2800
83 85 85 85
E27 E40 E40 E40
Quartz Metal Halide
HPI-T
MT
2
250 400 1000 2000 2000
19000 35000 85000 189000 200000
76 88 85 95 100
4500 4300 4300 4600 4200
65 65 65 65 65
E40 E40 E40 E40 E40
ME
2
50 70 70 100 100 150 150
3400 5600 5600 9000 9000 14000 13300
68 80 80 90 90 93 87
4000 4000 3200 4000 3200 4000 3200
65 65 65 65 65 65 65
E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27
90 80 92 90
4000 5000 4000 4000
65 75 65 65
E40 E40 E40 E40
(220v) (380v) Quartz Metal Halide (Edison screw cap)
HQI-E (E27)
To put this into context: The northern sky is around 10000K An overcast sky is around 7000K Noon on a sunny day is about 6000K Tungsten filament lamps are around 2700K A candle flame is around 2000K
Colour Rendering Index (Ra) A measure of the light source’s ability to render the colours of objects as similar to those under a reference light source. Ra
Group
Where accurate colour rendering is required (Colour matching)
80 – 89
1B
Where good colour rendering is required (Accurate colour judgements)
70 – 79
2A
Where moderate to good colour rendering is required
60 – 69
2B
Where moderate colour rendering is required
40 – 59
3
Where colour rendering is of little significance but marked distortion of colour is unacceptable
20 – 39
4
Where colour rendering is unimportant
ILCOS codes
Recommended group change interval years
Wattage
Luminous Flux
Efficacy
Colour Temp
Colour Rendering
W
lm
lm/W
K
Ra
Similar performance clear tubular lamps are available
HQI-T (E40)
MT
2
400 400 600 1000
36000 32000 55000 90000
PL-L
FSDH
3
24 24 24 24 24 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 40 40 40 55 55 55 55 55 80 80 80 80
1800 1800 1800 1800 1800 2900 2900 2900 2900 2900 2200 2400 3500 3500 3500 4800 4800 4800 3700 3800 6000 6000 6000 6000
75 75 75 75 75 81 81 81 81 81 90 80 88 88 88 87 87 87 87 87 75 75 75 75
2700 3000 3500 4000 6500 2700 3000 3500 4000 6500 3000 5300 3000 3500 4000 3000 3500 4000 3000 5300 2700 3000 3500 4000
82 82 82 82 80 82 82 82 82 80 90 91 82 82 82 82 82 82 90 91 82 82 82 75
2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11
Master PL-C (Dulux D/E) [4 tube 2 pin] [4 pin variant (lamp holder G24q) also available]
PL-C
FSQ
2
10 10 10 13 13 13 13 18 18 18 18 18 26 26 26 26 26
600 600 600 900 900 900 900 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800
60 60 60 69 69 69 69 67 67 67 67 67 69 69 69 69 69
2700 3000 4000 2700 3000 4000 6500 2700 3000 3500 4000 6500 2700 3000 3500 4000 6500
82 82 82 82 82 82 80 82 82 82 82 80 82 82 82 82 80
G24-d1 G24-d1 G24-d1 G24-d1 G24-d1 G24-d1 G24-d1 G24-d2 G24-d2 G24-d2 G24-d2 G24-d2 G24-d3 G24-d3 G24-d3 G24-d3 G24-d3
Master PL-T (Dulux T/E) [triple U tube 4 pin]
PL-T
FSM
2
18 18 18 26 26 26 32 32 32 42 42 42 57 57 57
1200 1200 1200 1800 1800 1800 2400 2400 2400 3200 3200 3200 4300 4300 4300
67 67 67 69 69 69 75 75 75 76 76 76 75 75 75
4000 3000 2700 4000 3000 2700 4000 3000 2700 4000 3000 2700 4000 3000 2700
82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82
GX24q-2 GX24q-2 GX24q-2 GX24q-3 GX24q-3 GX24q-3 GX24q-3 GX24q-3 GX24q-3 GX24q-4 GX24q-4 GX24q-4 GX24q-5 GX24q-5 GX24q-5
3
28 38
2050 2850
73 75
3500 3500
80-89 80-89
GR10 GR10
The above are clear tubular lamps NB Both the E27 and E40 HQI lamps above are compatible with
FSMH
High Pressure Sodium control gear, but note the caps for 100W and 150W
Quartz Metal Halide (Double Ended)
HQI-TS
MD
2
70 70 70 150 150 150 250 250 400 400 400 1000 2000
5200 5500 4800 11250 11250 11250 20000 20000 36000 28000 35000 80000 240000
74 79 69 75 75 75 80 80 90 80 88 80 120
3000 4000 6500 4200 3000 6500 3000 4200 5200 5600 4200 5200 4500
70 70 90 70 70 90 70 70 90-100 90-100 80-89 65 65
RX7s RX7s RX7s RX7s RX7s RX7s Fc2 Fc2 Fc2 Fc2 Fc2 RX7s cable
Cap
Master PL-L (Dulux L)
The above data is based on the clear elliptical lamp envelope
Quartz Metal Halide (Edison screw cap)
Lamp Data
Typical Application
90 – 100 1A
2D [4 pin]
2D
FSD
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
316 Technical Information
Technical Information 317
Glossary Accent lighting The highlighting of individual features Adaption The process whereby eyesight adjusts to relative levels of brightness, e.g. daytime or night time Arc tube That part of a discharge lamp that emits the light Asymmetric reflector A reflector that distributes light differentially in specific directions
Diffuse lighting Lighting that emanates in many directions with no peak intensity in any given direction Diffuser Translucent or frosted glazing that engenders a more even light distribution Direct entry luminaire Luminaire where the connection between it and the column is via an offset spigot
Baffle A shield type of apparatus to prevent light spill from a luminaire
Direct lighting Lighting where the target area is lit directly from the luminaire rather than via another surface
Ballast An electrical component used with discharge lamps to balance the light output and electrical current consumption
Disability glare Light that adversely affects one’s ability to undertake a given visual task
Beam angle The angle over which the intensity from a reflector drops to half of the peak value
Discomfort glare Light that makes a given visual task uncomfortable
Cap The part of the lamp that connects to the lamp holder
DMX A digital communication protocol used in lighting to allow numbers of products to be controlled by one main source. This allows colour changing, dimming and switching of architectural products to create a wide range of interesting lighting effects
Colour appearance The relative perception of warmth of light, warm, intermediate or cool. (See also correlated colour temperature)
Downward light output ratio (DLOR) That proportion of the total light emitted by a luminaire that shines downwards
Colour rendering index (CRI) The relative ability of a light source to enable the identification of colour
Easy-fit™ connector The preferred connector between a pendant luminaire and its bracket that resolves all the problems associated with the more dated screw type connectors
Candela A measure of luminous intensity from a lamp
Correlated colour temperature (CCT) The numeric expression of colour appearance, expressed in Kelvin Contrast The subjective appearance of different levels of lighting within the visual field DALI Stands for Digital Addressable Lighting Interface and is a standardised communication protocol used with electronic control gear such as LED Drivers. Many CMS systems use DALI interface to communicate with street lighting equipment Diamond Optic® Award winning adjustable reflector system that tailors light distribution to the area to be lit. See pages 28 – 31
Electronic control gear An electrical device in discharge lamp circuits that supplants the ballast, igniter and capacitor in conventional circuits Fluorescent lamp A low intensity discharge lamp with phosphor coating to modify the wavelength of emitted light Full cut off luminaire Expression for luminaires where there is an absolute cut off of light above the horizontal. For further information on G4, G5 and G6 glare ratings see EN 13201 Glare That light emitted by a luminaire that has an adverse effect on a given visual task
Group lamp change The recommended policy for lamp changes whereby all of the lamps for a given project or area are changed together, whether still functional or not, on a periodic cycle High intensity discharge lamp (HID) Lamp where the arc tube contains gas at a relatively high pressure High pressure sodium lamp (SON) A high intensity discharge lamp where the main active ingredient is sodium. These lamps have a relatively poor colour rendering, but are very efficient, robust, long lived and easily aimed in a quality reflector system such as Diamond Optic® Ignitor That component in a conventional HID lamp circuit that is responsible for initiating the arc in the arc tube Integrating sphere Testing equipment which measures various aspects of light output including total luminous flux, colour temperature and colour rendering index. It allows more accurate data to be collected from products which utilise LED as their light source IP rating Is a two digit number that defines the relative ingress protection of a product. Further information on this can be found on page 313 Illuminance The measure of light arriving at a given point. Measured in lux and represented by the symbol E Isolux diagram A diagram showing the light distribution on a surface by means of contour type lines where each contour joins points of like illuminance Junction temperature (Tj) Is the temperature measured at the point where an LED creates the emitted light. It is important to keep the junction temperature as low as possible in order to gain the expected longevity stated for the product Lamp The generic term for a light source or light bulb Lamp holder That part of a luminaire to which the lamp’s cap is affixed Lamp life With HID lamps this is the expected duration in which 50% of a batch is expected to fail under test conditions LED Light Emitting Diode. A solid state light source
LED driver Required by LED products to control the electrical supply to banks of LEDs. This can be adapted to provide specific pre-set drive currents which allow controllability of the products light output and wattage
Maintained lighting principle Current best practice calls for lighting design to simulate the results that would be expected in a project at the worst snapshot in time. This equates to just prior to lamp change and luminaire cleaning for most values except glare which is calculated for when the luminaire is clean and the lamp new
Light That part of the electromagnetic spectrum that is visible to humans
Mesopic vision A state of human visual performance that equates to brightness levels between scotopic and photopic vision. i.e. at levels where colour and focussed vision begins to fail and monochromatic peripheral vision is starting up
Light output ratio (LOR) The proportion of light emitted by the luminaire against that emitted by the light source within the luminaire Light pollution More properly known as obtrusive light. It is that light that is spilled in undesired directions, and/or causing undesired effects Light source See Lamp Longitudinal uniformity ratio (Ul) The minimum point luminance divided by the average luminance in any row of calculated points between two lighting positions in a street lighting design. Under BS5489-1:2003 the lowest of these is used in assessing the project Louvre An optical controller consisting of a number of blades arranged to obstruct and/or redirect light output from a luminaire Luminaire Technical term for a light fitting or lantern Luminance The measure of brightness of a surface. Measured in Candelas per metre square (cd/m2) and represented by the symbol L Luminous efficacy The ratio of light output of a light source against the electricity consumed. Measured in lumens per watt [lm/w] Lux Unit of measurement for illuminance L70 Is the term used for predicted lifetime of an LED chip to the point at which it still produces 70% of the initial luminous flux. This figure is used to calculate the yearly light loss from the product and is a good guide as to the general longevity of the complete product Maintained illuminance Measurement of light arriving at a given point after maintenance factors have been taken into account Maintenance factor A multiplier used to downgrade the calculated light output from a luminaire that takes into account light degradation from the light source and the increasing accumulation of dirt on the luminaire
Metal halide lamp An HID lamp where the active ingredients within the arc tube come from the halide family of elements. Currently there are two types of metal halide lamp available: those with quartz arc tubes and those with ceramic arc tubes Narrow beam reflector A symmetrical reflector with a beam spread typically less than 25° Obtrusive light More accurate terminology for light pollution Obtrusive light shields (OLS) A range of shields that can be applied to luminaires to reduce or eliminate light distribution in given directions Overall uniformity ratio (Uo) The minimum point illuminance or luminance divided by the average illuminance or luminance in a project or target area Pendant luminaire A luminaire that is suspended via an entry in its top surface Photoelectric control unit (PECU) or photocell A light sensitive switch Photopic vision Human visual response at relatively high brightness levels, i.e. daytime adapted vision. This is colour vision and is also associated with focussed vision Post top luminaire A luminaire with the mechanical entry for the column or bracket being on the under surface Projection The distance from the centre of the column (for column brackets or surface of wall for wall brackets) to the point of entry of the luminaire except for pendant or post top type luminaires where it is to the centre point of the luminaire Reflectance The relative degree to which a surface reflects light Remote monitoring Technology that allows luminaires to be assessed and usually switched from a location remote from the luminaires themselves
RGB A method of colour changing which combines red, green and blue colours mixed in differing amounts to create the various colours available Semi cylindrical illuminance Measure of light that falls on a vertically oriented half cylinder. This is usually measured at 1.5m above ground level to simulate light falling on a human face Scotopic vision Human visual response associated with very low levels of light. It is also monochromatic vision and mostly peripheral rather than focussed. See also photopic and mesopic vision Side entry luminaire Luminaire where the support bracket enters the luminaire from one side Spill light Light from a luminaire that has no intended illuminating purpose, usually associated with light pollution, although can be used intentionally for decorative purposes Surround ratio Under BS EN13201 this is a specific term for the ratio of a 5m wide strip of land outside either side of the road compared to 5m strips within each side of the roadway. (NB for roadways of less than 10m overall width the strips are reduced to be accommodated Symmetric reflector Reflector where the light reflected is symmetrically distributed about a vertical axis through it Threshold increment [ti %] Relative measure of loss of visibility in a roadway caused by glare Uniformity Measure of evenness of the light distribution on a lit surface. Mathematically it is the minimum point divided by the average values Uplighter A type of luminaire designed to emit light in an upwards direction Upward light output ratio (ULOR) That proportion of light emitted by a luminaire above the horizontal compared with the light output of the light source. NB Sometimes the term Upward Waste Light Ratio (UWLR) is used Windage area The projected area, usually of the luminaire plus brackets used to calculate wind resistance when specifying an appropriate column
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
318 Technical Information
Technical Information 319
Index
Index
About DW Windsor
1 – 47
Evora
58 – 65
Malo LED
194 – 195
Scotopic/Photopic Ratios
19
Akord Bullet
86 – 87
Evora LED
58 – 63
Manhattan
82 – 83
Shock Resistance
313
Akord Cone
86 – 87
Excel
94 – 95
Mano LED
190 – 191
Silka
232 – 235
Anello LED
166 – 167
Feeder Pillars
288 – 289
Meridian
148 – 149
Silka-Max
236 – 237
Aventis
212 – 213
Finials
284 – 285
Mesopic Vision
19
Solar & Wind
152 – 157
Barosa
78 – 79
Floodlight Brackets
254 – 255
Milano
44 – 51
Sorento
74 – 77
Berkeley
118 – 119
Forza
88 – 89
Monaro
52 – 57
Special Structures
258 – 259
Braemar
138 – 139
Garda
216 – 221
Monaro LED II
52 – 55
Camaro
66 – 73
GE StreetWise™
22 – 23
Monza
192 – 193
Specifying Products from our Catalogue
Inside Front Cover Flap
Cannon
244 – 245
General Conditions of Trading
320
New Products
6–9
Strand B & C
122 – 123
Capra
178 – 183
Glossary
316 – 317
Newport
136 – 137
Stratum
92 – 93
Capra-Compact
178 – 185
Harvard LeafNut
26 – 27
Nexus
240 – 241
Tatra
210 – 211
Capra-Mini
178 – 181
Hatfield
132 – 133
Obtrusive Light Shields
305
Tizona
250 – 251
Cassia LED
186 – 187
Henley
140 – 141
310 – 311
84 – 85
24 – 27
220 – 221
Toronto
Central Management System (CMS)
How-to Illuminate Areas using Garda LED Handrail
Inside Front Cover Flap
150 – 151
CEN Code of Practice
Paint Colours
Toro
Pall Mall
116 – 117
Trebem
224 – 225
Colada
248 – 249
Iffley
130 – 131
Part Night Dim
24 – 25
Unique Solutions
36 – 37
Colada LED
248 – 249
Illuminated Finials
284 – 285
Part Night Switch
24 – 25
Urban Furniture
40 – 41
Column Brackets
279 – 283
Ingress Protection
313
Pedestals
278
Using Ground Recessed Luminaires
294 – 295
Column Enhancements: Banners, Festive Decorations, Baskets and CCTV
276 – 277
Integrating Sphere
16 – 17
Petra
176 – 177
Vaio LED
160 – 165
ISO Standards
11
Pharola
228 – 229
Vector
242 – 243
Column Technical Details
272 – 273
Knightsbridge
114 – 115
Pharola-Max
230 – 231
Vertica
206 – 207
Columns
256 – 292
Kona
202 – 203
Pharola-Wall
200 – 201
Vertica LED
204 – 205
Columns – Special
266 – 269
Lago
226 – 227
Philips CosmoPolis
20 – 21
Visualisations
12 – 13
Columns – Standard
260 – 265
Lamp Data
314 – 315
Polar
98 – 99
Wall Brackets
286 – 287
Columns & Brackets – Painting
270 – 271
Lancaster
112 – 113
Polar (bollard)
242 – 243
Warwick
134 – 135
Control & Dim
24 – 27
LED Light Engine
32 – 33
Portea LED
172 – 173
Waterford
138 – 139
Corvus
104 – 105
Light Point
168 – 171
Portland
118 – 119
WEEE Directive
312
CPD Seminars
13
Light Pollution
304 – 305
Products at a Glance
4–5
Westminster
116 – 117
Cradle
98 – 99
Light Spill – Minimising
304 – 305
Raise & Lower Columns
274 – 275
White Light
18 – 23
Crieff
102 – 103
Lighting Car Parks
302 – 303
Refurbishment & Replicas
38 – 39
Wildlife Considerations
306 – 307
DIALux
14
Lighting Design Services
13
Reno
198 – 199
Windsor
110 – 111
Diamond Optic
28 – 31
Lighting Façades
296 – 297
Renza LED
174 – 175
York
134 – 135
Dover
96 – 97
Lighting Landscapes
294 – 295
Retrofit LED
32 – 33
Zebra Products
300 – 301
DW400
146 – 147
Lighting Pedestrian Crossings
298 – 301
Riga
240 – 241
Easy-fit™
100
Lighting Statues and Monuments
296 – 297
Rio
80 – 81
Ely
124 – 127
Lighting the Vertical
294 – 295
Road Lantern
144 – 145
EN 40 Column Standard
290 – 291
Luca
196 – 197
Rona
238 – 239
Energy Related Products (ErP)
312
LX1 Luminance Optic
34 – 35
Sabre
252 – 253
Eton
244 – 245
Lyra
188 – 189
Salisbury
136 – 137
®
Garda Hyde Park Corner, London
dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
320 General Conditions of Trading
1. GENERAL In these General Conditions of Sale the “Company means D.W. Windsor Limited, the “goods” mean any item of whatsoever nature which is to be sold by the Company, the “Purchaser” means the person, firm or body corporate which buys or has agreed to buy the goods. These General Conditions of Sale shall apply to and form part of every contract or sale entered into by the Company. All orders are accepted and executed on the understanding that the Purchaser is bound by these General Conditions of Sale. Where there is any inconsistency between these General Conditions of Sale and any conditions which the Purchaser seeks to impose, these General Conditions of Sale shall prevail. No contract of sale shall come into being unless and until the Purchaser has accepted these General Conditions of Sale either expressly or by implication. 2. LIMITS OF CONTRACT The contract includes only such goods as are specified in the quotation or acknowledgement accompanying these General Conditions of Sale. 3. PRICES a) The price payable for goods shall unless otherwise stated by the Company in writing be the list price of the Company current at the date of despatch and in the case of an order for delivery by instalments the price payable for each instalment shall be the list price of the Company current at the date of despatch of such instalment.
c) Unless otherwise stated in writing the Company shall be entitled to make partial deliveries of the goods. d) The Company shall not be liable in any way whatsoever for the consequences whether direct or indirect of any delay in delivery or in the carrying out of any work of the contract. 11. VARIATIONS a) The Company shall be under no obligation to alter or vary any part of the contract or any work connected therewith. Any alteration to or addition to or amendment or other variation of the specification, including any increase or decrease in the quality of the goods or any alteration to any drawings or to the quality, performance, weight or measurements of any goods or any alteration or variation of advised delivery schedules, shall, if requested by the Purchaser, be subject to the agreement of the Company, with such alteration or addition to the price and to delivery dates or schedules as may be required by the Company, and shall not be binding upon the Company unless and until accepted by the Company in writing. b) In the event of any variation or suspension of the work by the Purchaser’s instructions or lack of instructions the Company shall be entitled to adjust the contract price to reflect costs involved, and to adjust delivery dates or schedules.
c) All prices are exclusive of Value Added Tax, customs duties or other statutory taxes and this will be charged additionally at the applicable rate and recoverable as part of the amount due from the purchaser by the Company.
12. STORAGE If the Company does not receive forwarding instructions sufficient to enable it to despatch the goods within fourteen days after notification that the goods are ready for delivery or that they have been tested under Clause 14, the Purchaser shall thereupon take delivery or arrange for storage. If the Purchaser does not take delivery or arrange for storage as aforesaid, the Company shall be entitled to invoice and be paid for the goods as though the goods had been duly delivered in accordance with these General Conditions of Sale and the Company may arrange storage either at the Company’s own works or elsewhere on the Purchaser’s behalf and all charges for storage, insurance or demurrage shall be payable by the Purchaser.
4. PAYMENT a) Unless otherwise agreed in writing, payment is due in full by the end of the month following the month of invoice.
13. PERFORMANCE Any performance figures given by the Company are based on its experience and are such as the Company expects to obtain under the conditions of its standard tests at its work.
b) Where the Contract is to be or may be fulfilled in separate instalments, deliveries or parts, payment for each instalment, delivery or part shall be made as if the same constituted a separate contract.
14. INSPECTION AND TESTS The Company’s products are carefully inspected, and, where practicable submitted to its standard tests at the Company’s works before despatch. If tests other than those specified or tests in the presence of the Purchaser or its representatives are required, these will be charged for. In the event of any delay on the Purchaser’s part in attending tests after the Purchaser has received 7 days notice that the Company is ready to perform the tests, the tests will proceed in the Purchaser’s absence and the Purchaser accordingly agrees herein to accept and pay for such tests as if they had been performed in the Purchaser’s presence.
b) Unless otherwise expressly stated to be firm for a period the Company’s prices are subject to variation to take account of variations in wages, materials and other costs. The Company accordingly reserves the right to adjust the invoice price without notice by the amount of any increase or decrease in such costs after the price is quoted.
c) Time for payment shall be of the essence of the contract. d) Without prejudice to any other rights it may have, whether under the Late Payment of Commercial Debts (Interest) Act 1988 or otherwise, the Company is entitled to charge interest at 4% above the current base rate of Natwest Bank Plc on overdue payments of the price of the goods or the price of any instalment or partial delivery thereof. e) Additionally and without prejudice to its other rights the Company shall be entitled to recover all direct expenses reasonably incurred by the Company in collecting or attempting to collect amounts of the price outstanding. f) If the Purchaser fails to make any payment when due in accordance with these General Conditions of Sale, the Company reserves the right in its absolute discretion and without prejudice to any of its other rights or remedies to suspend all further deliveries until such payment has been made in full or, at the Company’s option, to cancel the balance of the order. In either case the Company shall hold the Purchaser liable for costs incurred in respect of goods in course of manufacture or ready for despatch. g) The Company shall be entitled to bring an action for the price or part thereof whether or not the property in the goods has passed. 5. CREDIT Any contract shall be subject to the Company being satisfied as to the Purchaser’s credit references, and without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing, the Company may (in its absolute discretion), having informed the Purchaser that the goods are ready for despatch, refrain from delivering the goods until such time as the Purchaser tenders the purchase money to the Company together with any outstanding amounts which may be due to the Company on any account whatsoever. 6. CARRIAGE In all cases the prices are exclusive of carriage and insurance to the Purchaser’s premises unless otherwise agreed in writing at the time of order. 7. PACKING All lanterns are despatched in protective cartons, but where it is necessary to despatch goods in crates, cases, pallets, stillages or skids or other such packaging, a charge will be made for this. Unless otherwise specified this amount will be credited in full on the return, within one month, of such crates, skids, stillages and pallets etc. in good condition carriage paid. No charge is made for any other form of packaging and no credit will be allowed for its return. 8. LOSS OR DAMAGE IN TRANSIT When the total price quoted includes delivery, the Company shall repair or replace free of charge goods damaged in transit or not delivered in accordance with the Advice Note provided that the Company is given written notification of such damage or non delivery within such time (being not more than 7 days) as will enable the Company to comply with the carrier’s conditions of carriage as affecting loss or damage in transit, or, where delivery is made by the Company’s own transport within 14 days after receipt of the Advice Note. Notwithstanding the above undertaking, the Company will only consider claims for alleged shortage if they are received within two working days of the receipt of the goods by the Purchaser together with sufficient information to enable the Company properly to identify the shortage including the Advice Note number, case number and condition of case. 9. SAMPLES Any samples submitted with the Company’s quotation or at the Purchaser’s request must be returned within sixty days of receipt and the Company shall be entitled to charge for them if they are not so returned. 10. DELIVERY a) All times or dates for delivery of the goods are given in good faith but are approximate only and shall not be of the essence of the contract. b) All times or dates for delivery shall be calculated from the date of acceptance by the Company of the order of the Purchaser, or from the date of receipt by the Company from the Purchaser of all information, instructions and drawings as shall be necessary to enable the Company to carry out the order, whichever shall be the later.
15. DESCRIPTIVE MATTER AND ILLUSTRATIONS All descriptions and illustrations and particulars of weights and dimensions issued by the Company in catalogues, price lists, advertising matter and forwarding specifications are by way of general descriptions and approximate only, and shall not form part of any contract or give rise to any liability on the part of the Company. It is the policy of the Company to endeavour to develop and improve its products, and accordingly the Company reserves the right to change all specifications without prior notification or public announcement pursuant to such policy. Provided that nothing in this Clause shall oblige the Purchaser to accept goods which do not substantially comply with the contract. 16. WARRANTY a) The Company will make good by repair or at the Company’s option by the supply of a replacement defects which, under proper storage and use appear in the goods within the period of twelve calendar months after the goods have been delivered and arise solely from faulty design (other than design made or furnished by the Purchaser), materials or workmanship. b) The Warranty given in this Clause is subject to the following provisos namely i) That the Purchaser shall have followed all instructions issued by the Company in relation to the goods. ii) That in the case of defects which would have been reasonably apparent to the Purchaser on reasonable examination of the goods on delivery, the Purchaser shall notify the Company of the defects in writing within fourteen working days of delivery. iii) That in the case of any other defects, the Purchaser shall notify the Company of the defects in writing within seven days of the date when the defect becomes apparent. iv) Where in discharge of its obligations under the Warranty given in this Clause the Company agrees that the Purchaser may undertake any repair or remedial work on its behalf, the cost of such work shall be agreed in writing between the Purchaser and the Company before the commencement of any such repair or remedial work. 17. REJECTION Unless otherwise agreed in writing and subject to Clause 16 hereof (WARRANTY), goods rejected as not complying with the contract must be rejected within fourteen working days of delivery to the Purchaser’s premises or such other place as the Purchaser shall have specified. 18. RETURN OF GOODS In no circumstances may goods supplied against a firm order be returned without the Purchaser having first applied for and obtained the written consent of the Company. A handling charge may be deducted from any credit allowed by the Company where it is established that the reason for the return of goods was not the subject of Clause 8 hereof or due to any error on the part of the Company. 19. CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS Save as may be expressly provided for herein the Company shall not be liable for any consequential loss suffered by the Purchaser, and in particular the Company shall not be liable for any costs claims or damages or expenses arising out of any tortious act or omission or any breach of contract or statutory duty calculated by reference to profits income production or accruals or by reference to accrual of such costs claims damages or expenses on a time basis.
These conditions of trading are correct at time of going to press. Please check our current terms and conditions on our website: www.dwwindsor.com
20. PATENTS The Purchaser will indemnify the Company against all damage penalties costs losses and expenses suffered by the Company or for which it may become liable in respect of the infringement of any intellectual property including (but without limitation) any patent copyright registered design trade mark name or know-how arising out of the Company’s manufacture of goods in accordance with any specification design drawings or other data supplied by the Purchaser or its servants or agents. 21. COPYRIGHT All drawing descriptions and other information submitted by the Company shall remain the property of the Company together with the copyright therein. 22. FORCE MAJEURE AND OTHER CIRCUMSTANCES The Company shall be entitled without liability on its part and without prejudice to its other rights, to terminate the contract or any unfulfilled part thereof, or at its option to suspend or make partial deliveries or extend the time or times for delivery, if the manufacture of the goods by the Company or Company’s suppliers, or the delivery of the goods or the performance by the Company of any of its obligations under the contract is hindered or delayed whether directly or indirectly by reason of the Purchaser failing to furnish necessary instructions or information, or by war or other hostilities, civil commotion, act of God, government action or legislation, interruption of transport, strike, lock out or other form of industrial action, accidents or stoppages to works, shortage of labour, materials, equipment, fuel or power, breakdown of machinery or any other cause whatsoever beyond the reasonable control of the Company or its sub-contractors whether or not such cause exists at the date of the order. 23. PASSING OF PROPERTY AND RISK a) The risk in the goods shall pass to the Purchaser immediately on delivery of the goods to the Purchaser. b) The property in the goods shall remain with the Company, which reserves the right to dispose of the goods until payment in full for all the goods has been received by it in accordance with the terms of this contract or until such time as the Purchaser sells the goods to its customers by way of bona fide sale at full market value in the ordinary course of business. While the goods remain the property of the Company the Purchaser shall keep the goods identifiable and separate from all other goods in its possession. Not withstanding the foregoing, the Purchaser shall be responsible for insuring the goods at his expense following dispatch / delivery. c) Until such payment as aforesaid has been received in full by the Company the Purchaser shall be under an obligation to redeliver the goods to the Company if the Company so requires and the Company shall be entitled at any time to retake possession of the goods and for that purpose to enter upon any land or premises of the Purchaser where the goods may be for the time being. The Company shall be entitled, where the goods have been fixed or attached to any other product, to detach the goods in order to recover possession of them. Such redelivery or retaking of possession shall be without prejudice to the obligation of the Purchaser to purchase the goods. d) If the Purchaser sells any of the goods before the property in the goods has passed to the Purchaser, the Purchaser shall hold the proceeds of such sale in trust for the Company. The Purchaser shall, at the request of the Company, assign to the Company its rights to receive the proceeds of such sale. 24. In the event of the Purchaser committing any breach of this contract, or if any distress or execution is levied upon the Purchaser, his goods or assets, or if the Purchaser enters into any negotiations for arrangement or composition with or for the benefit of his creditors or commits any act of bankruptcy or, if any petition in bankruptcy shall be presented against him, or if, being a corporate body the Purchaser shall be wound up or if any resolution is proposed or petition presented to wind up the Purchaser (not being a members voluntary winding up for the purpose of reconstruction or amalgamation without insolvency), or if a receiver of the Purchaser’s assets or undertaking or any part thereof shall be appointed or if the Purchaser shall be deemed to be unable to pay its debts, the Company shall be entitled, without prejudice to any other claim or right or remedy which it may have, forthwith to suspend any or all deliveries until the default has been made good or to determine the contract or any unfulfilled part thereof. 25. DISPUTE RESOLUTION a) Negotiation between Executives The parties shall attempt in good faith to resolve any dispute arising out of or relating to this Agreement promptly by negotiation. Any party may give the other party written notice of any dispute not resolved in the normal course. Within fifteen (15) days after delivery of the notice, the receiving party shall submit to the other a written response. The notice and response shall include (i) a statement of each party’s position, and (ii) the name and title of the representative for that party. Within thirty (30) days after delivery of the disputing party’s notice, the representatives of the parties shall meet as often as they reasonably deem necessary to attempt to resolve the dispute. If the matter has not been resolved by these persons within sixty (60) days of the disputing party’s notice or if the parties fail to meet within thirty (30) days, either party may initiate Mediation. b) Mediation If the dispute has not been resolved by negotiation as provided herein, the parties shall endeavour to settle the dispute by Mediation under the then current Centre for Dispute Resolution (CEDR) rules for mediation of business disputes. The neutral third party will be selected from the CEDR panel unless the parties agree otherwise. c) Litigation If the dispute has not been resolved by non-binding means as provided herein within ninety (90) days of the initiation of such procedure, either party may initiate litigation subject to the provisions of this Agreement (upon thirty (30) days’ written notice to the other party), provided, however, that if one party has requested the other to participate in a non-binding procedure and the other has failed to participate, the requesting party may initiate litigation before expiration of the above period. 26. All contracts to which these General Conditions of Sale apply shall be governed by and construed in accordance with English Law.
folds
Contact numbers General Enquiries: T: 01992 474600 F: 01992 474601 E: info@dwwindsor.co.uk
DW Windsor Lighting Pindar Road, Hoddesdon Hertfordshire. EN11 0DX T: 01992 474600 F: 01992 474601 E: info@dwwindsor.co.uk
DW Windsor Limited is a member of DW Group Holdings Limited © DW Windsor 2012
DWW2012_Cover_OUTER_AW.indd 1
folds
Products at a glance
Dedicated product advice: E: answers@dwwindsor.co.uk
See pages 4 - 5 for a visual index of all our products
If you have a question about our products please contact us using our dedicated email address for an answer within twenty-four hours (Monday to Friday)
New products
Akord Bullet Akord Cone Anello LED Aventis Barosa Berkeley Braemar Camaro Cannon Capra Capra-Compact Capra-Mini Cassia LED Colada Colada LED Columns Corvus Cradle Crieff Dover DW400 Ely Eton Evora Evora LED Excel Forza Garda Hatfield Henley Iffley Knightsbridge Kona Lago Lancaster LED Light Engine Light Point Luca Lyra Malo LED Manhattan Mano LED Meridian Milano
Monaro Monaro LED II Monza Newport Nexus Pall Mall Petra Pharola Pharola-Max Pharola-Wall Polar Polar (bollard) Portea LED Portland Reno Renza LED Riga Rio Road Lantern Rona Sabre Salisbury Silka Silka-Max Solar & Wind Sorento Strand A & A Plus Strand B & C Stratum Tatra Tizona Toro Toronto Trebem Vaio LED Vector Vertica Vertica LED Warwick Waterford Westminster Windsor York
86 86 166 212 78 118 138 66 244 182 184 180 186 248 248 256 104 98 102 96 146 124 244 58 62 94 88 214 132 140 130 114 202 226 112 32 168 196 188 194 82 190 148 44
See pages 6 - 9 for some of our latest innovative products
52 54 192 136 240 116 176 228 230 200 98 242 172 118 198 174 240 80 144 238 252 136 232 236 152 74 120 122 92 210 250 150 84 224 160 242 206 204 134 138 116 110 134
Product index
Exterior Lighting | Issue 4
www.dwwindsor.com
Exterior Lighting Contemporary Classic Traditional Functional Solar & Wind Architectural LED Handrail Illuminated Bollards Floodlighting Columns & Brackets
Please open this flap for our handy guide to specifying our products
www.dwwindsor.com 05/11/2012 11:59